2021 BMW x5 78225

LINK:
CONTENT & A-Z
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
OWNER'S MANUAL.
THE BMW X5.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FB7 - VI/20

WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on
the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining
the value of your BMW.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most
current resource. After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Soft‐
ware Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐
board literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Software Upgrade –

the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest infor‐
mation.
NOTES
Information ......................................................................................................................... 6
Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 14
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ............................................................................................................................ 16
Set-up and use ............................................................................................................... 20
On the road ...................................................................................................................... 24
CONTROLS
Cockpit .............................................................................................................................. 32
Operating state of the vehicle .................................................................................... 37
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 40
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ............................................................................. 57
General settings ............................................................................................................. 60
Personal settings ........................................................................................................... 64
Connections .................................................................................................................... 69
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 78
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel .......................................................................... 113
Transporting children safely ..................................................................................... 131
Driving ............................................................................................................................. 137
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 156
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 176
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 184
Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 225
Driver assistance systems ........................................................................................ 231
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 282
Climate control ............................................................................................................. 289
4
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 307
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 318
Cargo area ..................................................................................................................... 323
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 332
Trailer towing ................................................................................................................ 338
Saving fuel ..................................................................................................................... 342
MOBILITY
Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 348
Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 350
Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 383
Operating materials .................................................................................................... 386
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 393
Replacing components .............................................................................................. 395
Breakdown assistance ............................................................................................... 400
Care ................................................................................................................................. 407
REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 412
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 416
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 418
© 2020 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID7 VI/20, 07 20 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Additional sources of
information
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a particu‐ Service center
lar topic is by using the index.
A service center will be glad to answer questions
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in at any time.
the first chapter.
Internet
Validity of the Owner's Manual Vehicle information and general information on
BMW, for instance, on technology, are available
Production of the vehicle on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed
Owner's Manual is the most current resource. Integrated Owner's Manual in the
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
vehicle
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
the vehicle. scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
played on the Control Display.
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
After a software update in the

BMW Driver’s Guide app
vehicle The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐
cle. The app can be displayed on smartphones
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐
and tablets.
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest
information.
BMW Driver’s Guide Web
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable in‐
formation for the selected vehicle. If possible,
Entertainment, Communication
only equipment and functions that are actually in‐
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ stalled in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s
ment, and Communication can be obtained as a Guide Web can be displayed in any current
printed book from the service center. browser.
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
6
Information NOTES
Symbols and displays Vehicle features and

options
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
Symbol Meaning all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐
ment that is offered in the model series. There‐
Precautions that must be followed in
fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐
order to avoid the possibility of injury
lustrates features and functions that are not
to yourself and to others as well as
available in a vehicle, for example because of the
serious damage to the vehicle.
selected optional features or the country-specific
Measures that can be taken to help version.
protect the environment. This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select
individual functions. When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the served.
voice activation system.
For any options and equipment not described in
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary
activation system. Owner's Manuals.
Your BMW service center is happy to answer any
Action steps questions that you may have about the features
and options applicable to your vehicle.
Action steps to be carried out are presented as a
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
Status of the Owner's
1. First action step. Manual
2. Second action step.
Basic information
Enumerations
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐
icy of constant development that is conceived to
native possibilities are presented as a list with
ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the
bullet points.
highest quality and safety standards. In rare
▷ First possibility. cases, therefore, the features described in this
▷ Second possibility. Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
Symbols on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component
Validity of the Owner's Manual
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's Manual. Production of the vehicle
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
7
NOTES Information
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in tronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair
the vehicle. work.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
BMW center. If you choose to use another serv‐
After a software update in the ice facility, BMW recommends use of a facility
vehicle that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair,
according to BMW specifications with properly
trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's
Manual as "another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop".
information.
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐
For Your Own Safety quent damage and related safety risks.
Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint
Intended use can lead to a failure or malfunction of compo‐
nents, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result
Heed the following when using the vehicle: in a safety risk.
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove Parts and accessories
stickers. BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐
▷ Technical vehicle data. sory products approved by BMW.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
vehicle is driven. their use and installation are available from a
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents. BMW center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested by
Warranty BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐
cles.
Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐
erating conditions and registration requirements BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
applying in the country of first delivery, also sories.
known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be BMW does not evaluate whether each individual
operated in a different country it might be neces‐ product from another manufacturer can be used
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety
operating conditions and registration require‐ hazard, even if a country-specific official approval
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether
homologation requirements in a certain country these products are suitable for BMW vehicles
you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for under all usage conditions.
your vehicle there. Further information on war‐
ranty is available from a service center. California Proposition 65
Warning
Maintenance and repairs
For vehicles sold in California, the law requires
Advanced technology, for instance the use of vehicle manufacturers to provide the following
modern materials and high-performance elec‐ warning:
8
Information NOTES
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

Warning ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐ ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
bile components and parts, including compo‐
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
Warranty.
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth Detailed information about these warranties is
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐ listed in the Service and Warranty Information
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
products of component wear contain or emit Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
chemicals known to the State of California to Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ designed to meet the particular operating condi‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ tions and homologation requirements in your
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ country and continental region in order to deliver
pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐
known to the State of California to cause can‐ ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐
cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐ ate your vehicle in another country or region, you
gine oil contains chemicals that have caused may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and mologation requirements. You should also be
water. For more information go to aware of any applicable warranty limitations or
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. exclusions for such country or region. In such
case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐
ther information.
Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐
Maintenance
ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐ safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle
haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, Limited Warranty.
which are known to the State of California to Specifications for maintenance measures:
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
▷ BMW Maintenance system.
ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐ ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for
cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a US models.
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐ Canadian models.
hicle. For more information go to If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. maintained, this could result in serious damage
to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by
the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Service and warranty
Refer to chapter engine oil change regarding
We recommend that you read this publication recommended service intervals for oil changes.
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐
ing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
NOTES Information
Data memory This information generally records the state of a

component, a module, a system, or the environ‐
ment, for instance:
General information ▷ Operating states of system components, for
Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐ instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat‐
hicle. Electronic control units process data they tery status.
receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
exchange with each other. Some control units components, for instance lights and brakes.
are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or
provide assistance during driving, for instance ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐
units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions. ment of the driving stability control systems.
Information about stored or exchanged data can ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.

be requested from the manufacturer of the vehi‐ The data is required to perform the control unit
cle, in a separate booklet, for example. functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recog‐
nize and correct malfunctions, and helps the ve‐
Personal reference hicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle The majority of this data is stored temporarily
identification number. Depending on the country, and is only processed within the vehicle itself. In
the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehi‐ some circumstances the vehicle may store some
cle identification number, license plate and corre‐ data for an additional but limited period of time.
sponding authorities. In addition, there are other When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐
options to track data collected in the vehicle to ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐
the driver or vehicle owner, for instance, via the ance measures, this technical information can be
ConnectedDrive account that is used. read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐
cle identification number.
Operating data in the vehicle A dealer’s service center or another qualified
Control units process data to operate the vehicle. service center or repair shop can read out the in‐
formation. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
For example, this includes:
sis required by law in the vehicle is used to read
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐ out the data.
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational
The data is collected, processed, and used by
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, lateral ac‐
the relevant organizations in the service network.
celeration, engaged safety belt indicator.
The data documents technical conditions of the
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain vehicle, which can be used to determine vehicle
sensor signals. maintenance status, and facilitate quality im‐
The processed data is only processed in the ve‐ provement.
hicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be
stored beyond the operating period. reset when a dealer’s service center or another
Electronic components, e.g. control units and ig‐ qualified service center or repair shop performs
nition keys, contain components for storing tech‐ repair or servicing work.
nical information. Information about the vehicle
condition, component usage, maintenance rec‐
ommendations, events or faults can be stored
temporarily or permanently.
10
Information NOTES
Data entry and data transfer into ferred to the mobile device at the same time. De‐
the vehicle pending on the type of incorporation, this in‐
cludes, for instance position data and other
general vehicle information. This optimizes the
General information
way in which selected apps, for instance naviga‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort tion or music playback, work.
and individual settings can be stored in the vehi‐
There is no further interaction between the mo‐
cle and modified or reset at any time.
bile device and the vehicle, such as active access
For example, this includes: to vehicle data.
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐ How the data will be processed further is deter‐
tions. mined by the provider of the particular app being
▷ Suspension and climate control settings. used. The extent of the possible settings de‐
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en‐ pends on the respective app and the operating
tertainment and communication system of the system of the mobile device.
vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the re‐ Services
spective equipment:
General information
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
system. this enables data to be exchanged between the
vehicle and other systems. The wireless network
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with
connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐
an integrated hands-free system or an
ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐
integrated navigation system.
ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐
▷ Entered navigation destinations. phones. This wireless network connection
▷ Data on the use of Internet services. enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is clude online services and apps supplied by the
found on a device that has been connected to vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it Services from the vehicle
can be deleted at any time. manufacturer
This data is only transmitted to third parties upon Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐
personal request as part of the use of online turer are concerned, the corresponding functions
services. The transmission depends on the se‐ are described in the appropriate place, for in‐
lected settings for the use of the services. stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's
website. The relevant legal information pertaining
Incorporation of mobile devices to data protection may also be found on the
manufacturer’s website. Personal data may be
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐
used to perform online services. Data is ex‐
vices connected to the vehicle, for instance
changed over a secure connection, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer
control elements.
intended for this purpose.
The sound and picture from the mobile device
Any collection, processing, and use of personal
can be played back and displayed through the
data above and beyond that needed to provide
multimedia system. Certain information is trans‐
the services must always be based on a legal
11
NOTES Information
permission, contractual arrangement or consent. corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
It is also possible to activate or deactivate the tions and no personal data, for instance name,
data connection as a whole. That is, with the ex‐ gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
ception of functions and services required by law However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
such as Assist systems. ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
Services from other providers during a crash investigation.
When using online services from other providers, To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
these services are the responsibility of the rele‐ ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
vant provider and subject to their data privacy EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐
conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐ facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
facturer has no influence on the content ex‐ that have the special equipment, can read the in‐
changed during this process. Information on the formation if they have access to the vehicle or
way in which personal data is collected and used the EDR.
in relation to services from third parties, the
scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐
tained from the relevant service provider. Vehicle identification
number
Event Data Recorder EDR
General information
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ Depending on the national-market version, the
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to vehicle identification number is located in differ‐
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ ent positions in the vehicle. This chapter de‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a scribes all positions that are possible for the ser‐
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐ ies.
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
Engine compartment
dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐
erating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal. The engraved vehicle identification number can
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. be found in the engine compartment, on the
This data can help provide a better understand‐ right-hand side of the vehicle.
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
12
Information NOTES
Right nameplate iDrive

It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐
tion number via iDrive.
Additional information:
Displaying the vehicle identification number and
software part number, refer to page 70.
Reporting safety defects

The vehicle identification number can be found
For US customers
on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of the
vehicle. The following only applies to vehicles owned and
operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
Left nameplate which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
The vehicle identification number can be found recall and remedy campaign.
on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐
vehicle. dividual problems between you, your dealer, or
BMW of North America, LLC.
Windshield To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about mo‐
tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐
The vehicle identification number can also be vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free
found behind the windshield. hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
13
NOTES Owner's Manual media
Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest
information.
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Printed Owner's Manual
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
Concept
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, fered with the series.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served. General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as a
General information printed book from the service center.
Media at a glance Supplementary Owner's Manuals

You can use various media formats to call up the Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals,
content in the Owner's Manual. The following which are included in addition to the onboard lit‐
Owner's Manual media formats are available: erature.
▷ Printed Owner's Manual.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Integrated Owner's Manual
Validity of the Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Production of the vehicle Concept
At the time of production at the plant, the printed The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
Owner's Manual is the most current resource. scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ cle.
ences may exist between the printed Owner's The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in on the Control Display.
the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix Selecting the Owner's Manual
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
1. Press the button.
After a software update in the 2. "CAR"
vehicle
3. "Owner's Manual"
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐ 4. Select the desired method of accessing the
contents.
14
Owner's Manual media NOTES
Scrolling through the Owner's ▷ "Quick link"

Manual
2. Press and hold the desired button
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
until the displayed bar on the Control Display
contents are displayed.
has loaded completely.
Context help Executing

General information Press the corresponding button.
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be ac‐ The owner's manual is directly dis‐
cessed from any menu. Depending on the se‐ played at the selected entry point.
lected function, either the associated description
or the main menu of the Integrated Owner's
Manual will be displayed.
Opening via iDrive

Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:

2. "Help"
Opening when a Check Control

message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The entry points into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the programmable memory buttons
and called up directly.
Storing
1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Picture search"
▷ "Operating tips"
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Topics"
15
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Entering
Opening and closing 2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons on the vehicle key
Buttons for the central locking
system
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 To open the tailgate
4 Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode Buttons for the central locking system.
Press briefly: pathway lighting
Locking
Unlocking the vehicle Press the button with the front doors
closed.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐
er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐ Unlocking
locked.
Press the button.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the
button on the vehicle key again to unlock the
other vehicle access points. Panic mode
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
cle key after unlocking. self in a dangerous situation.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
as long as the button on the vehicle key is and hold for at least 3 seconds.
pressed. ▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key
three times in succession.
Locking the vehicle
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
1. Close the driver's door.
16
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
Comfort Access Opening and closing the tailgate

with no-touch activation
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without operating Concept
the vehicle key. The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your touch activation using the vehicle key you are
pants pocket, is sufficient. carrying.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key Performing the foot movement
when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐
rior. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
the vehicle.
Unlocking the vehicle
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
Locking the vehicle
Tailgate
Opening
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button

on the outside of the tailgate.
▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐

hicle key for approx. 1 second.
17
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
With Comfort Access: Depending on the set‐ Driver's door

tings, the bottom tailgate also opens.
Closing
1. Without Comfort Access: closing the lower
tailgate manually.
With Comfort Access: the lower tailgate will
be closed automatically with the upper tail‐
gate.
2. Press the button on the inside of the upper
tailgate. 1 Safety switch
2 Power windows
3 Central locking system
4 Exterior mirrors
Displays, control elements 5 Seats, comfort features
6 Opening/closing the tailgate
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel Switch console
1 Light switch element 1 Selector lever

2 Turn signal indicator, high beams 2 Controller
3 Instrument cluster 3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold
4 Wipers 4 Driving Dynamics Control
5 Start/Stop button
Indicator/warning lights 6 Assistance systems
Instrument cluster
iDrive
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
Concept
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
The iDrive combines the functions of many
tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready
switches. These functions can be operated via
state is switched on.
the Controller.
18
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Opens the main menu.
Opens the Apps menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens navigation map.
Opens destination input menu for

navigation.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐
vation system is active.
No other commands may be available. In this

case, operate the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐

vation system is deactivated.
19
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors, and steering Distance to the back of the head
wheel
Electrically adjustable seats
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐

straint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
1 Backrest width
2 Thigh support Side extensions
3 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
4 Upper backrest
5 Backrest tilt, head restraint
6 Lumbar support
Adjusting the head restraint
Height
Fold the side extensions forward to increase lat‐
eral support.
Push switch up or down.
20
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Adjusting the exterior mirrors Storing

1. Set the desired position.
2. Press button on the door. The writ‐

ing on the button lights up.
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 at the door
while the writing is lit. A signal sounds.
Calling up settings
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Infotainment
Radio
Adjusting the steering wheel
Electrical steering wheel adjustment
1 Changing the entertainment source

2 Sound output on/off, volume
Press the switch to adjust the forward/back posi‐ 3 Programmable memory buttons
tion and height of the steering wheel to the seat 4 Changing the station/track
position. 5 Waveband/satellite radio
Memory function Navigation destination input

Concept Entering a destination via quick
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ search
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position. 1. Press the button on the Controller.
▷ Exterior mirror position. 2. "Where to?"
▷ Steering wheel position. 3. Enter at least two letters or characters.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display. The search term may be completed automat‐
ically in gray print.
21
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Press or move the controller up to apply the Using the telephone

suggested search term.
4. Select the symbol, if needed. Accepting a call
Results are displayed in a list. Depending on the equipment, incoming calls can
5. "Search location": select search area. be answered in several ways.
6. Move the Controller to the right. ▷ Via iDrive:
7. Select desired destination. "Accept"
▷ /
Connecting a mobile phone
Press the corresponding button on the steer‐
General information ing wheel.
After the mobile phone is connected once to the ▷ Via the selection list in the instrument cluster:
vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
iDrive and the steering wheel buttons. select: "Accept"
▷ Via touch screen: tap on the corresponding
Connecting the mobile phone via entry on the Control Display.
Bluetooth ▷ Via gestures: point the index finger into the
1. "COM" direction of the Control Display.
2. If necessary, select the following setting:
"Telephone" Dialing a number
3. "Connect new phone" 1. "COM"
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile 2. If necessary, "Telephone"
phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's 3. "Dial number:"
manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐
4. Enter the numbers.
tooth device or a new device.
5. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
tablished via the mobile phone to which this
on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐
function has been assigned.
tooth name of the vehicle.
Establish the connection via the additional tele‐
5. Depending on the mobile device, a control
phone:
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control 2. "Call via"
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the device Apple CarPlay preparation
and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
Concept
ber on the device and via iDrive. CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
The device is connected and displayed in the
and iDrive.
device list.
22
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
▷ The data connection may have to be acti‐
vated on the smartphone.
▷ Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice operation
are activated on the iPhone.
▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle.
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. "New device"
4. "Phone calls and audio"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
the Control Display.
5. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.
A control number is displayed.
6. Compare the control number displayed on
the Control Display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐
firm that the two match.
7. Select CarPlay:
"Confirm note and connect to Apple CarPlay"
23
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
On the road
Driving Parking brake
Setting
Drive-ready state
Pull the switch.
Switching on drive-ready state The LED on the switch and the indicator
light in the instrument cluster are illuminated.
Releasing
With drive-ready state switched on:
1. Depress the brake pedal. Press the switch while stepping on the
2. Press the Start/Stop button. brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
Switching off drive-ready state The parking brake is released.
Steptronic transmission:
1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐ Parking

hicle stopped. The parking brake is automatically set if the vehi‐
2. Press the Start/Stop button. cle is being held by Automatic Hold and the
The engine is switched off. drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is
exited.
3. Set the parking brake.
Steptronic transmission
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function switches the en‐ Engaging selector lever position D,
gine off automatically while stationary to save N, R
fuel. The engine starts automatically under the
following preconditions:
Steptronic transmission:
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
the accelerator pedal.
In vehicles with Mild-Hybrid technology, the en‐
gine will already switched off while coasting at
low speeds.
▷ Drive mode D.
▷ Neutral N.
▷ R is reverse.
24
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push Steptronic transmission, Sport
the selector lever in the desired direction, past a program and manual mode
resistance point, if needed. The selector lever re‐
turns to the center position in each case.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure
on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
A selector lever lock prevents the inadvertent
shifting to selector lever position R or the inad‐
vertent shifting from selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary. Activate the Sport program/manual mode:
Press the selector lever to the left from selector
Releasing the selector lever lock lever position D.
Manual mode:
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
End the sport program/manual mode:

Push the selector lever to the right.
Turn signal, high beams,

Press the button.
headlight flasher
Engaging P Turn signal

Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point.

▷ Off: press the lever past the resistance point
Press button P. in the opposite direction.
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
lever up or down.
25
▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐ Symbol Function

ance point and hold it there for as long as you
want the turn signal to flash. Instrument lighting.
High beams, headlight flasher Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
brief wipe
▷ High beams on, arrow 1. Switching on
The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Symbol Function
Press the lever up until the desired position is
Front fog lights. reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0.
Night vision. ▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Automatic headlight control.

Adaptive light functions.
Low beams.
26
Switching off and brief wipe Adjusting the sensitivity
Press the lever down. Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position. Cleaning the windshield
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
Rear window wiper
Switching on
To activate: press the lever up once from its

standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
standard position.
Turn the outer switch upward.

▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐
tinuous operation.
27
Clean the rear window Button Function

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
Seat and armrest heating.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward,
arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to
its idle position when released. Climate control operation.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, Opening the Climate menu.
arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to For example, for the following
its interval position when released. settings: upper body tempera‐
ture adjustment, parked-car ven‐
tilation.
Climate control
Automatic climate control Intermediate stop
Button Function Refueling
Temperature.
Fuel cap
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
Maximum cooling.
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
AUTO program.
Recirculated-air mode.
Air flow, manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Defrost and defog the wind‐ 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
shield. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Rear window defroster.
Gasoline
Active seat ventilation. For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
28
Wheels and tires 3. "Engine oil level"

Different messages appear on the Control Dis‐
Tire inflation pressure specifications play depending on the engine oil level. Pay atten‐
The tire inflation pressure specifications can be tion to these messages.
found in the tire inflation pressure table in the
printed Owner's Manual. Adding engine oil
After correcting the tire inflation General information

pressure Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
With runflat tires: state before adding engine oil.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Adding engine oil
With Tire Pressure Monitor:
The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied
automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐
tings have been made.
With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐
sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire inflation pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
correct it as needed: played in the instrument cluster.
▷ At least twice a month.
Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
sage.
Cleaning the wheels Take care not to add too much engine oil.
The friction during hard braking may produce Observe recommended engine oil types.
brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust
can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW rec‐
ommends using vehicle care and cleaning prod‐
Providing assistance
ucts from BMW.
Hazard warning flashers
Electronic oil measurement
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving with the com‐
bustion engine running.
Displaying the engine oil level

1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status" The button is located in the center console.
29
Breakdown assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance

1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps"
3. "BMW Assist"
4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
ConnectedDrive
Concierge service
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Assist Response Center.
1. "COM"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. If necessary, select the entry for the Con‐
cierge Service.
A voice connection to the Concierge service is
established.
Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Teleservices can comprise the following serv‐
ices:
▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Service Request.
▷ Teleservice Report.
▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.
▷ Your dealer’s service center.
30
31
CONTROLS Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
options also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. served.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Window safety switch 109 Unlocking
2 Power windows 108 Locking
3 Exterior mirror operation 124 5 Seating comfort features

4 Central locking system 93
32
Cockpit CONTROLS
Front passenger seat functional‐ Cruise control: to store the speed

ity 116 Speed Limit Assist: take over sug‐
gested speed 244
Memory function 126
Pause or continue cruise control
Massage function 127

Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐
tance
6 Opening and closing the tail‐
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐
gate 99
tance
7 Steering column stalk, left Cruise control rocker switch
Turn signal 145
10 Instrument cluster 156
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
High beams, head‐
Selection lists 171
light flasher 146
High-beam Assistant 179

Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Widgets in the instrument clus‐ Communication 6
ter 158 Voice activation system 48
Trip data 171
8 Shift paddle Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
9 Steering wheel buttons, left
Communication 6
Speed Limiter 231
Thumbwheel for selection lists 171
12 Steering column stalk, right
Depending on the equipment:
Wipers 146
Cruise control on/off 233
Rain sensor 147

Cleaning the windshield 148
Active Cruise Control on/off 235
With steering and traffic jam assis‐
Rear window wiper in Canadian
tant 245:
models 148
Cruise control, distance control and
lane guidance on/off
33
CONTROLS Cockpit
Rear window wiper 148 Lights off

Daytime running lights 178
Clean the rear window 148 Parking lights 177
13 Horn, entire surface Automatic headlight control 176

Adaptive light functions 179
High-beam Assistant 179
14 Heated steering wheel 126
Low beams 177
15 Adjusting the steering wheel 125 Instrument lighting 182
16 Glove compartment 319 Right roadside parking light 177

17 Lights
Front fog lights 181 Left roadside parking light 177
Night Vision 203

18 Unlocking the hood 384
Light switch 176
34
Cockpit CONTROLS
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 44 9 Parking brake 142

2 Hazard warning system 400
Automatic Hold 143
Intelligent Safety 188
10 Driving Dynamics Control 140

3 Ventilation 294 SPORT drive mode
4 Glove compartment 318 COMFORT drive mode
5 Automatic climate control 289
6 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for ECO PRO drive mode
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐
tion 6
7 Controller with buttons 44 ADAPTIVE drive mode
8 Air suspension level adjust‐
ment 282
11 Switching drive-ready state on/
xOffroad drive mode 285 off 137
HDC Hill Descent Control 228
35
CONTROLS Cockpit
12 Auto Start/Stop function 137 Surround View: Panorama

View 263
PDC Park Distance Control 255 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

Without Surround View: rearview trol 225
camera 261
13 Steptronic transmission selector lever 149
Surround View 263
Cross traffic warning 278
Parking assistant 271
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 402 4 Reading lights 182
2 Glass sunroof 109 5 Interior lights 182
3 Indicator light, front-seat passenger

airbag 187
36
Operating state of the vehicle CONTROLS
Operating state of the vehicle

Vehicle features and Safety information
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
cific and optional features offered with the series. possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
It also describes features and functions that are Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due ing.
to the selected options or country versions. This In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
served. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
General information ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one wheel chock.
of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
▷ Standby state. Warning
▷ Drive-ready state. Unattended children or animals in the vehicle

can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
Idle state following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Concept ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
off. All power consumers are deactivated. dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
General information ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
the outside and after exiting and locking. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
Automatic idle state

The idle state is automatically established under
the following conditions:
37
CONTROLS Operating state of the vehicle
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes General information

place on the vehicle.
The vehicle is in the standby state after the front
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is doors are opened from the outside.
low.
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive, if one of Display in the instrument cluster
the front doors is opened when exiting the
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
vehicle.
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
The idle state is not automatically established switched off and standby state
while a phone call is active. switched on.
Establishing idle state when

opening the front doors
1. "CAR"
Drive-ready state
2. "Settings"
Concept
3. "Doors/Access"
Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
starting the engine.
Manual idle state General information

To establish idle state in the vehicle after end of
Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stability
trip:
Control, can only be used with drive-ready state
switched on.
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
Press and hold the button until
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
the OFF indicator on the instru‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
ment cluster goes out.
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
Standby state Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
Concept possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
When standby state is switched on, most func‐
ing.
tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary.
Desired settings can be adjusted.
38
Operating state of the vehicle CONTROLS
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Display in the instrument cluster
against rolling away, follow the following:
When drive-ready state is switched on, the tach‐
▷ Set the parking brake. ometer shows the current engine speed.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the Switching off drive-ready state
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Steptronic transmission
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a 1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐
wheel chock. hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
NOTICE The engine is switched off. The vehicle

switches into standby state.
In the case of repeated starting attempts or re‐
peated starting in quick succession, the fuel is 3. Set the parking brake.
not burned or is inadequately burned. The cata‐
lytic converter can overheat. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in
quick succession.
Switching on drive-ready state
Concept
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief
time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.
Gasoline engine
Depending on the motorization, the full drive
power may not be available for approximately
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case,
the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
39
CONTROLS iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and Input and display
options Main menu
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ General information
The main menu is divided into two areas. The
left area contains menu items that can be used
to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area
contains widgets that provide quick access to
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
certain functions.
served.
Operating concept
Concept
iDrive includes a large number of functions.
These functions can be operated via the Control‐
ler and, depending on the equipment version, via
Media/Radio
touchscreen, voice activation system or gesture
control. All functions of the entertainment system,
e.g., radio stations or connection with external
devices.
Safety information
Communication
Warning Phone and message functions, e-mail and
Operating the integrated information systems calendar, and also the connection and manage‐
and communication devices while driving can ment of mobile devices, such as smartphones.
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only Navigation
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐ Access to the navigation system, destination
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐ views and other functions, such as points of in‐
tionary. terest and areas to be avoided.
My Car
Information about vehicle status and trips.
Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and
also administration of driver profiles and range of
adjustments for vehicle and iDrive.
40
iDrive CONTROLS
Apps Activating/deactivating the

Management of apps, access to apps and ve‐ functions
hicle functions. Additional apps can be pur‐ Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
chased from the BMW Store. box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
Widgets menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Widgets provide quick access to fre‐ Function is activated.
quently used functions. The configured widgets
Function is deactivated.
display dynamic contents such as the navigation
map, and serve as interfaces at the same time.
Status information
Letters and numbers General information
Letters and numbers can be selected when the
The status field can be found in the upper area of
destination is inputed, for example.
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
Letters and numbers can be entered using the played in the form of symbols.
Controller and, depending on the equipment ver‐
sion, via touchscreen or voice activation system. Radio symbols
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Symbol Function Symbol Meaning
Change between capital and HD Radio station is being received.

lower-case letters. Satellite radio is switched on.
Enter a blank space.
Telephone symbols
Switching between languages.
Use voice activation. Symbol Meaning
Confirm entry. Incoming or outgoing call.
Slide the input area to the left or Missed call.

right.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Entry comparison Network search.
When entering names and addresses, the choice Cellular network is not available.
is narrowed down with every letter and number
The critical charge state of the mo‐
and added automatically as needed.
bile phone has been reached.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle. Roaming is active.
▷ Only those letters and numbers are offered Locating is active.
during entry for which data is available.
SMS text message received.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available in Message received.
iDrive.
41
CONTROLS iDrive
Symbol Meaning Programmable memory buttons

Reminder.
General information
Sending not possible. The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
Entertainment symbols rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries or
Symbol Meaning pages in the Integrated Owner's Manual.
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
Bluetooth audio.
used.
USB device.
Overview
WLAN.
Apple CarPlay.
Other symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
Sound output active.
Sound output deactivated. Programmable memory buttons
Voice activation system active.
Request for the current vehicle posi‐ Storing a function

tion. A function can be stored on a programmable
memory button. A button with a stored function
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
can be overwritten with another function.
tion.
1. Select function via iDrive, for instance radio
Driver profile.
station.
Messages.
2. Press and hold the desired button
Service notifications. until the displayed bar on the Control Display
Information. has loaded completely.
Stop. Executing a function

Data protection. Press the button.
The function will work immediately. This means,

for instance that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
42
iDrive CONTROLS
Displaying the key assignment Control Display

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or
use objects. Safety information
The assignment of the buttons is displayed in
the upper area of the Control Display. NOTICE
Objects in the area in the front of the Control
Deleting all button assignments Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
All button assignments can be deleted. play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not place objects in the area in front of the
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 at the same
Control Display.
time.
2. "OK"
Switching on/off automatically
The Control Display is switched on automatically
Control Display and when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the
Controller Control Display is needed for operation.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
Concept switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
The iDrive functions are displayed on the Control
minutes.
Display. The Control Display can be operated us‐
ing the Controller, touchpad, and touch screen.
Switching on/off manually
Overview The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Screen off"
Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
troller to switch it back on again.
System limits
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar
1 Control Display with touchscreen radiation, the brightness may be reduced down
2 Controller with buttons and touchpad to complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐
ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
43
CONTROLS iDrive
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the Buttons on the Controller
touchpad on the Controller.
Button Function
Operation
Opens the main menu.
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
ample.
Opens the Apps menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens navigation map.
Opens destination input menu for

▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. navigation.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Operating via the

Controller
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐
plays, for example. Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
44
iDrive CONTROLS
Selecting a menu Adjusting contents

Depending on the equipment, the contents of
Selecting menu items menus "MEDIA", "COM" and "NAV" can be ad‐
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu justed, for instance to remove the entries of
item is highlighted. functions that are not used from the menu.
2. Press the Controller. 1. Select the menu.
2. "Personalize menu"
Select a widget
3. Select the desired setting.
1. Move the Controller in the main menu to the
right.
Changing between displays
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget is
After a menu item is selected, for instance
selected.
"Settings", a new display appears.
3. Press the Controller.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐
The current display closes and the previous
ment cluster.
display is shown.
Adjusting the menu ▷ Press the button.

The previous display re-opens.
Adjusting widgets
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐ The new display opens.
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐ opened.
tionary.
1. Select the desired page in the main menu. Opening the Options menu
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐ Press the button.
justed.
2. Tip the Controller up. The "Options" menu is displayed.
3. "Adjust main menu" The menu consists of various areas, for instance:
4. Select the desired adjustment: ▷ "MEDIA": control options for the selected
▷ Symbol and select desired widget: add main menu.
new widget. ▷ "Help": help for the selected menu.
The requested widget will be inserted in ▷ "Display off": system settings.
the relevant position. A maximum of four
widgets can be displayed per page. Entering letters and numbers
▷ Select symbol: delete selected widget.
▷ Add new page: "Add page". Input
▷ Delete selected page: "Delete page". 1. Turn the Controller: select letter or number.
▷ Adjust the content of the widget: select 2. : confirm entry.
widget.
5. "Done"
45
CONTROLS iDrive
Deleting Entering letters and numbers

▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the
Symbol Function Control Display.
Press the Controller: delete letter or ▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
number. accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized.
Hold the Controller down: delete all
letters or numbers. ▷ The set language determines what input is
possible. Where necessary, enter special
characters via the Controller.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, Entering special characters
the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐
played in a text box. Input Operation
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly. Delete a charac‐ Swipe to the left on the
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry. ter. touchpad.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐ Enter a blank Swipe to the right in the
played in the list. space. center of the touchpad.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐

Operation via touchpad per area of the touchpad.
Enter an under‐ Swipe to the right in the

General information score. lower area of the touchpad.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller. Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be moved
Selecting functions via the touchpad.
1. "CAR"
Function Operation
2. "Settings"
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
3. "General settings"
rection.
4. "Touchpad"
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out on the touch‐
5. Select the desired setting:
map. pad with fingers.
▷ "Character input": enter letters and num‐
bers. Display menu. Tap once.
▷ "Map": use the map.
▷ "Search fields": to write letters without se‐
lecting the list field.
Operation via touchscreen
▷ "Audio confirmation": pronounces entered
letters and numbers. General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
46
iDrive CONTROLS
You can tap on menu items and widgets. Touch Showing/hiding the display bar
the screen with your fingers. Do not use any ob‐
In the upper area of the Control Display, it is pos‐
jects.
sible to show or hide a display bar with additional
functions.
Opening the main menu
▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis‐
Tap on the symbol. play bar at the top edge of the screen.
▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display bar
at the top edge of the screen.
Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened.
The main menu is displayed. ▷ Swipe to the left.

▷ Tap arrow.
Adjusting widgets The new display opens.
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐ Entering letters and numbers
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐ Input
tionary. 1. When approaching the touchscreen, a key‐
1. Select the desired page in the main menu. board appears on the Control Display.
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐ 2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
justed.
2. Tap the symbol in the main menu. Deleting
3. Select the desired adjustment:
Symbol Function
▷ Tap symbol and select desired widget:
add new widget. Tapping the symbol: deletes the let‐
The requested widget will be inserted in ter or number.
the relevant position. A maximum of four Tapping and holding the symbol all
widgets can be displayed per page. letters: deletes all letters or numbers.
▷ Tap symbol: delete selected widget.
▷ Add new page: tap "Add page". Using the map
▷ Delete selected page: tap "Delete page". The navigation map can be moved using the
▷ Adjust content of the widget: tap center of touchscreen.
widget.
4. Tap "Done".
47
CONTROLS iDrive
Function Operation Activating the voice activation

Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
system
rection.
General information
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin‐ There are various methods for activating the
map. gers. voice activation feature:
Display menu. Tap once.
▷ Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Operation via voice ▷ Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal
wake word.
Concept ▷ Active voice processing.
The voice activation system can be used to op‐ This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐
erate functions with spoken commands. The vation system is active.
system supports you with announcements dur‐
ing input. Then say the command. No other commands
may be available. In this case, operate the func‐
The voice control system and the feedback it tion via iDrive.
provides are not a substitute for the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual. The voice activation can be terminated:
▷ Press the button on the steering

General information
wheel again.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐
▷ ›Cancel‹
hicle is stationary can only be operated via
the voice activation system to a limited ex‐ This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐
tent. vation system is deactivated.
▷ The system includes special microphones on
the driver side and the front passenger side. Button on the steering wheel
▷ ›...‹ denotes commands to use with the voice
activation system. 1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Functional requirements 2. Wait for the signal.
▷ A language must be set via iDrive that is sup‐ 3. Say the command.
ported by the voice activation system.
To set the language, refer to page 61. Wake word
▷ Always say commands in the language of the
voice activation system. General information
Speaking the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the per‐
sonal wake word will start the system.
Preset wake word

The preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹ can be acti‐
vated and deactivated.
48
iDrive CONTROLS
›Hello BMW‹ activates the preset and personal Possible commands

wake word.
1. "CAR" General information

2. "Settings" Most contents on the Control Display can be
spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list en‐
tries. Speak these list entries out loud exactly as
4. "Voice control" they are shown in the list.
5. "Activation with "Hello BMW"" Say the commands and numbers fluently as well
as with normal volume, emphasis, and speed.
Personal wake word
The status of the voice recognition is displayed
In addition to a preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹, a in the upper area of the Control Display.
personal wake word can be set up.
1. "CAR" Function examples

2. "Settings"
Menu items
The commands of the menu items are spoken
4. "Voice control" just as they are selected via the Controller.
5. "Personal wake word"
6. "Start recording" 1. Press the button on the steering
For "Start recording", online speech process‐ wheel.
ing must be available and activated. Alterna‐ 2. ›MEDIA‹
tively, the personal wake word can be entered 3. ›Presets‹
using the Controller.
The stored stations are displayed on the Control
7. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ Display.
play.
Navigation
Active voice processing Destinations can be entered in the navigation
system using the voice activation system. It is
General information
also possible to say points of interest or have
Active voice processing recognizes keywords traffic reports announced.
that are spoken in the car's interior. For instance,
▷ ›Drive me to 300 Chestnut Ridge Road,
if the name of a city is named, information for the
Woodcliff Lake in New Jersey‹
navigation will be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play. ▷ ›Take me home‹
▷ ›Are there any traffic messages‹
1. "CAR" Communication
2. "Settings" For example, when a mobile phone is connected,

the voice activation system can be used to start
calls or send SMS.
4. "Voice control"
▷ ›Call John Doe on cell phone‹
5. "Active speech processing"
▷ ›Dial the number 1 8 0 0 8 3 1 1 1 1 7‹
49
CONTROLS iDrive
▷ ›New text message to John Doe: I'll be right Settings

there‹
Setting the voice control
Media and Radio
You can set the system to use standard dialog or
Most radio functions can be used via the Active a short version.
Voice Recognition.
The short version of the voice control plays back
▷ ›Turn on music‹ short messages in abbreviated form.
▷ ›Music off‹
1. "CAR"
▷ ›Next title‹
2. "Settings"
Climate control 3. "General settings"
Most climate control functions can be used via 4. "Voice control"
voice. 5. "Response length"
▷ ›Activate climate control‹ 6. Select the desired setting.
▷ ›Deactivate air recirculation‹
▷ ›Temperature [...] at ...‹ Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
Help on the voice activation system voice activation system. The function can be de‐
activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐
▷ ›Voice commands‹: to have the available spo‐
rupted, for instance due to background noise or
ken commands announced.
conversations in the vehicle.
▷ ›General information on voice control‹: have
information on the operating principle of the 1. "CAR"
voice activation system read out loud. 2. "Settings"
▷ ›Help‹: have help for the current menu read 3. "General settings"
out loud. 4. "Voice control"
5. "Speaking during voice output"
Information for Emergency
Requests
Online speech processing
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
Online speech processing provides a dictation
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
function, a natural method of destinations input
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
and improves the quality of voice recognition. To
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tele‐
use the functions, data is transmitted to a service
phone connection.
provider via an encrypted connection and stored
Instead, use the SOS button close to the interior locally there.
mirror.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Emergency Request, refer to page 402.
4. "Voice control"
5. "Online speech processing"
50
iDrive CONTROLS
Adjusting the volume ▷ Vehicle added in the BMW Connected app.

Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐ ▷ Third-party account and BMW account are
structions until the desired volume is set. linked in the BMW Connected app.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐ ▷ Smartphone connected to the vehicle via
ume of other audio sources is changed. Bluetooth.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
currently used. Activation in the BMW Connected
app
Using the voice activation Third-party assistants are set up in the BMW
system of the smartphone Connected app.
Depending on the device, a smartphone con‐ Follow the instructions in the app.
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice acti‐
vation. Activation in the vehicle
Activate voice command response on the smart‐ An authorization for the use of the voice assistant
phone for this purpose. is required every time before starting a trip.
1. Authorizing voice assistants from third-party

1. Press and hold the button on the providers:
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. ▷ Connect the smartphone to the vehicle
Voice command response is activated on the via Bluetooth.
smartphone. ▷ Selects appropriate driver profile.
Driver profiles, refer to page 65.
2. Release the button.
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐ 2. If necessary, press the button on the
pears on the Control Display. steering wheel and wait for signal tone.
3. Say the specific activation word of the third-
Voice assistants from third-party party provider and the desired command.
providers
Information about the active function is dis‐
Concept
Some third-party providers provide digital voice Activation/deactivation of the
assistants. Supported voice assistants can be specific activation word
used in the vehicle.
In addition to the activation word of the voice ac‐
tivation system, the specific activation word from
General information
the third-party provider can be activated or deac‐
Some of the functions are limited in the vehicle tivated.
to prevent any impairment of safety while driving.
1. "APPS"
Functional requirements 2. "Installed apps"
▷ Connected Voice Services purchased via 3. "Personal assistant"
ConnectedDrive Store. 4. "Voice control"
▷ Same ConnectedDrive account used in the 5. "Wake word"
vehicle and in the BMW Connected app.
51
CONTROLS iDrive
6. "Activation by speech" ▷ In the Guest profile: the variant is linked to a

7. Select the desired setting. vehicle and cannot be personalized. Not all
described functions are available to the full
Malfunction extent.
In case of a malfunction, switch off the drive- ▷ With active Driver profile: the variant can be
ready state and restart again. used and personalized in different vehicles.
All described functions are available to the full
extent.
System limits
▷ Certain noises can be detected and may lead Functional requirements
to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and
glass sunroof closed. Enter the following settings to access the full
range of functions:
▷ Noises from the front passenger or the rear
seat bench can impair the system. Avoid ▷ The Driver profile is activated.
making other noise in the vehicle while ▷ Relevant ConnectedDrive Services have
speaking. been purchased via ConnectedDrive Store.
▷ Major language dialects can cause problems ▷ Registered in the ConnectedDrive Store.
with the voice recognition feature. Speak loud ▷ "Online speech processing" is activated.
and clear.
▷ "Synchronize driver profile" under
"Personalization" is activated.
BMW Intelligent Personal Data protection, refer to page 64.
Assistant ▷ All settings under "BMW ConnectedDrive"

activated.
Data protection, refer to page 64.
Concept
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is the per‐ Example for function
sonal assistant that expands the voice activation
1. Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal
system with intelligent functions and improves
wake word.
the interaction in the vehicle.
2. ›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹
General information The personal assistant provides information
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is available about the tire pressure.
depending on the national-market version. The
use of the personal assistant is based on voice Settings
operation. The voice operation is enhanced with
personal recommendations and messages as Display, notifications
well as the automation of routines.
The personal assistant is connected to other dig‐ General information
ital services such as the Concierge service and is Depending on the situation, different conditions
continually being developed. The full scope re‐ can be activated.
quires an active driver profile.
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is availa‐
ble in two variants:
52
iDrive CONTROLS
Condition Description Functional requirements

▷ The Experience Modes app is installed in the
"Do not disturb" Incoming calls and some
vehicle.
messages are not displayed.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
"Passenger on Private contents, such as
board" sender and content of e- Selecting a mode
mails, will not be displayed.
1. "CAR"
2. "Experience Modes"
3. Select the desired mode.
1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps" Deactivating
3. "Personal assistant" 1. "CAR"
4. "Notification display" 2. "Experience Modes"
5. Select the desired setting. 3. "End"
Automating routines Adjusting the mode

1. "CAR"
General information
2. "Experience Modes"
The personal assistant can learn routines, e.g.,
3. Select the desired mode.
the automatic activation of the seat heating from
a specific external temperature. Rules are cre‐ 4. "Settings"
ated for this purpose, which can be activated and 5. Make the desired setting.
deactivated at any time.
Caring Car
Creating a rule
1. "APPS" General information
2. "Installed apps" Different vehicle functions in the car's interior are
3. "Personal assistant" harmonized for the driver in a short-term pro‐
gram. A program takes 3 minutes.
4. "Automate habits"
5. Select the desired setting. Activating/deactivating
1. "CAR"
Functions 2. "Caring Car"
Experience Modes 3. Select the desired channel.

The program can be stopped prematurely:
General information "End program"
The Experience Modes combine different vehi‐
cle functions in the car's interior to an overall ex‐ Connected Command
perience. For example, the selection of a mode
harmonizes the ambient light and seat climate General information
control. Connected Command enables passengers to
control different functions in the vehicle via
53
CONTROLS iDrive
smartphone and the BMW Connected App and

receive information about the trip.
BMW Gesture Control
Functional requirements Concept

▷ The smartphone is connected to the vehicle Several iDrive functions can be operated by hand
via Bluetooth and WLAN. motion using BMW Gesture Control.
▷ The BMW Connected app is installed on the
smartphone. Overview
Managing rights
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Select the desired setting for the respective
device.
Owner's Manual via voice operation
Concept The camera in the roofliner detects gestures that

are carried out in the area of the center console
You can ask simple questions about vehicle
at the height of the Control Display.
functions and the operation of the vehicle.
General information Activating/deactivating

The voice control system and the feedback it 1. "CAR"
provides are not a substitute for the printed or 2. "Settings"
Integrated Owner's Manual. The voice recogni‐ 3. "General settings"
tion and quality of the feedback may vary.
4. "Gesture control"
The system supports questions that begin with
How or What.
Example for function Settings

1. ›Hello BMW‹ 1. "CAR"
2. ›How can the passenger airbag be 2. "Settings"

deactivated‹ 3. "General settings"
The voice activation system returns a feedback. 4. "Gesture control"
When stationary, the section of the integrated 5. Select the desired setting.
Owner's Manual is displayed on the Control Dis‐
play. Carrying out gestures
▷ Perform gestures underneath the interior mir‐
ror and next to the steering wheel.
▷ Execute gestures clearly.
▷ The gestures can also be executed from the
front-passenger side.
54
iDrive CONTROLS
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move index finger forward and backward in the di‐ Accept call.
rection of the screen. Select a highlighted entry in a list
during voice activation.
Confirm pop-up.
Move hand across the width of the Control Dis‐ Reject call.
play in the direction of the front-passenger side. Close pop-up.
Terminate voice activation.
Slowly move hand clockwise in a circular pattern Increase the volume.

with the index finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a circu‐ Reduce the volume.

lar pattern with the index finger stretched out for‐
ward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move hand Surround View: turn camera
horizontally to the right or left. view.
This gesture can only be exe‐
cuted while the vehicle is station‐
ary.
Move stretched out index and middle finger for‐ Individually assignable gesture.
ward.
Move fist with thumb extended to the left back Reverse Skip function.
and forth. The previous music track is
played.
55
CONTROLS iDrive
Gesture Operation Function
Move fist with thumb extended to right left back Forward Skip function.
and forth. The next music track is played.
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and stretch five Individually assignable gesture.
fingers out again.
Assigning gesture individually System limits

Gesture recognition by the camera in the roof‐
General information liner can be disturbed by the following circum‐
Depending on the equipment version, the follow‐ stances:
ing functions can be assigned to gestures that ▷ The camera lens is covered.
allow individual assignments:
▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror.
▷ Destination guidance to home address.
▷ The camera lens is dirty, clean camera lens.
▷ Voice command response.
Sensors and camera lenses, refer to
▷ Mute/Playback page 410.
▷ Last calls. ▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐
▷ Control Display on/off tection range.
▷ Notifications. ▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
▷ Music recognition ▷ Smoking in the car's interior.
▷ NightVision on/off
▷ No function.
Select function
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or
"Function assignment gesture 2"
56
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade

Vehicle features and ▷ The vehicle can be exited during the installa‐
tion.
options
Validity of the Owner's Manual
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. Production of the vehicle
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
tems. When using these functions and systems, After a software update in the
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ vehicle
served. After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐
BMW Remote Software information.
Upgrade
Functional requirement
Concept The use of the Remote Software Upgrade re‐
quires an active ConnectedDrive contract.
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up‐
date the software of the vehicle. Remote Soft‐
ware Upgrade makes new functions, functional
Information about the version
enhancements or quality improvements availa‐
ble. General information
The information about the version contains a de‐
General information scription of the updates that are included in the
Remote Software Upgrade. During the download
BMW recommends performing the Remote
and after the installation has been completed
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes availa‐
successfully, the information about the version
ble.
can be displayed on the Control Display. The in‐
The available data for Remote Software Upgrade formation is available in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
is automatically loaded into the vehicle. tomer portal at any time.
For reasons of safety, the loaded upgrade can Logging on to the ConnectedDrive customer
only be installed when the vehicle is stationary. portal on the Internet under:
The installation is not installed until it was con‐
www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.
firmed on the vehicle.
▷ The installation may take around 20 minutes. Displaying information about the
▷ The installation cannot be terminated. version
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the instal‐ 1. "CAR"
lation. 2. "Settings"
57
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
3. "General settings" 3. "General settings"

4. "Remote Software Upgrade" 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Installed version:" 5. "Search for upgrades"
6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
Safety information play.
Warning Via BMW Connected app

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle 1. Download the available upgrade to the smart‐
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger phone in the BMW Connected app.
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the 2. Follow the instructions in the BMW Con‐
following actions: nected app.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. 3. Establish connection to the vehicle.
▷ Releasing the parking brake. ▷ iOS: Bluetooth Audio and WLAN.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ ▷ Android: WLAN in the vehicle.
dows. The data transfer of the upgrade from the
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. smartphone to the vehicle occurs only while
▷ Using vehicle equipment. driving.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ play.
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ Additional information:
ing and lock the vehicle. Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, refer
to page 69.
Search for and download of an Install the upgrade immediately

upgrade
General information
General information
After successful download completion, installa‐
There are various options to search for and tion is offered once the vehicle is parked. The in‐
download an upgrade: stallation can be carried out immediately follow‐
▷ Automatic. ing the download.
▷ Via iDrive. Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
▷ Via BMW Connected app. After the successful completion of the upgrade,
booked services, for example RTTI, will be reacti‐
Automatic download vated automatically while driving.
The available data for Remote Software Upgrade
is automatically loaded into the vehicle. The Functional requirements
download does not require an approval. ▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ The external temperature is above
Via iDrive 14 ℉/-10 ℃.
1. "CAR" ▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
2. "Settings"
58
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
▷ Hazard warning system is switched off. ▷ Central locking system.

▷ Selector lever position P is engaged. ▷ Parking lights.
▷ Engine is sufficiently cooled down. ▷ Horn.
▷ Automatic engine start for stationary climate ▷ Alarm system.
control is not activated via iDrive. ▷ Emergency Request.
▷ Power windows.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Glass sunroof.
▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road. ▷ Checking the fuel filler flap lock.
▷ Cellular network reception must be ensured The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
so that an error message can be sent, for in‐ from the outside using the integrated key.
stance if the installation is terminated.
▷ Close the windows. Malfunction
▷ Close the glass sunroof. In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐
tions on the Control Display or in the BMW Con‐
▷ Close the tailgate. nected app.
▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such as If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact a
a mobile phone. dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
▷ Unhitch any trailer or load carrier. ice center or repair shop.
▷ The vehicle key is in the vehicle at the start of
the installation.
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.
Additional vehicle related functional require‐
ments are shown on the Control Display.
Install the upgrade later

The installation of the upgrade can be carried out
at a later time.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Functional limitations
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
temporarily unavailable, for instance:
▷ Hazard warning system.
59
CONTROLS General settings
General settings
Vehicle features and 8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
options 9. "OK"

Setting the time format
It also describes features and functions that are 1. "CAR"
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due 2. "Settings"
to the selected options or country versions. This 3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ 5. "Time format:"
served. 6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Time
Automatic time setting
Setting the time zone Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
1. "CAR" the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
2. "Settings" updated automatically.
3. "General settings" 1. "CAR"
4. "Date and time" 2. "Settings"
5. "Time zone:" 3. "General settings"
6. Select the desired setting. 4. "Date and time"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 5. "Automatic time setting"
rently used.
rently used.
Setting the time
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Date
4. "Date and time"
Setting the date
1. "CAR"
5. "Time:"
2. "Settings"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are
displayed. 3. "General settings"
7. Press the Controller. 4. "Date and time"
5. "Date:"
60
General settings CONTROLS
6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is 4. "Units"

displayed. 5. Select the desired menu item.
7. Press the Controller. 6. Select the desired setting.
8. Make the settings for the month and year. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
9. "OK" rently used.
Setting the date format

1. "CAR"
Driver Attention Camera
2. "Settings"
Concept
A camera that monitors driver activity is located
4. "Date and time"
in the instrument cluster. The camera evaluates
5. "Date format:" the head position and eye opening and uses the
6. Select the desired setting. data to analyze the attention of the driver. This
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ system supports various vehicle assistance sys‐
rently used. tems, e.g.:
▷ Fatigue alert.
▷ Steering and traffic jam assistant with Ex‐
Language tended Traffic Jam Assistant.
Setting the language Activating/deactivating

1. "CAR" 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" 2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" 3. "General settings"
4. "Language" 4. "Driver Attention Camera"
5. Select the desired setting. 5. Select the desired setting.
rently used. System limits
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
functional in the following situations:
Setting the units of ▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered
measurement by the steering wheel rim.
▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐
Depending on the country version, you can set able sunglasses.
the units of measurement for some values, for in‐
stance consumption, distances, and tempera‐
ture. Trip data settings
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Concept
3. "General settings" The intervals in which the trip data will be reset
can be configured.
61
CONTROLS General settings
Resetting trip data Setting your current speed as

1. "CAR" the speed warning
2. "Settings" 1. "CAR"
3. "General settings" 2. "Settings"
4. "Reset trip data" 3. "General settings"
5. Select the desired setting. 4. "Speed warning"
5. "Select current speed"
Speed warning
Concept pop-ups
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued. For some functions, pop-ups are displayed auto‐
matically on the Control Display. Some of these
General information pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐ 1. "CAR"
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐ 2. "Settings"
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Adjusting 4. "Pop-ups"
1. "CAR" 5. Select the desired setting.
2. "Settings" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐

rently used.
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Warning at:" Control Display
6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is
displayed. Brightness
7. Press the Controller. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Activating/deactivating 3. "Displays"
1. "CAR"
4. "Control display"
2. "Settings"
5. "Brightness at night"
4. "Speed warning"
7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
5. "Speed warning" ness is set.
rently used.
62
General settings CONTROLS
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ Retrieving messages

ness settings may not be clearly visible.
2. "Notifications"
Resetting the vehicle 3. Select the desired message.
configuration
Deleting messages
All individual settings can be reset to the factory All messages, except Check Control messages
settings when the drive-ready state is switched or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can
off. be deleted from the list.
1. "CAR" Check Control messages or messages from the

vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as
2. "Settings"
they are relevant.
4. "Reset vehicle data"
2. "Notifications"
5. "Reset vehicle data"
3. Select desired message, for instance. SMS.
When the stored settings in a driver profile are
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account,
these settings will remain in the ConnectedDrive
account. 5. ▷ "Delete this notification"
▷ "Delete all notifications"
Messages Settings
The following settings can be adjusted:
Concept ▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐ sages will be permitted.
ing in the vehicle in list form. ▷ All messages or a limited time period for re‐
ceived messages.
General information 1. Tip the Controller up.
The following messages can be displayed:
2. "Notifications"
▷ Traffic messages.
3. Move the Controller to the right.
▷ Check Control messages.
4. "Settings"
▷ Messages on service notifications.
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ Messages from, e.g., the Concierge service
or the BMW Connected app.
▷ Messages from the vehicle manufacturer.
The number of messages is additionally dis‐
played in the status field.
The Messages menu can also be created as
Widget.
63
CONTROLS Personal settings
Personal settings
Vehicle features and Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
options
Concept
cific and optional features offered with the series. Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐
It also describes features and functions that are sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due personal data can be permanently deleted using
to the selected options or country versions. This iDrive.
tems. When using these functions and systems, General information
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
served. lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
Data protection ▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
Data transfer ▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
Concept ▷ Phone book.
The vehicle offers different services, whose use ▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐
▷ Office data, for instance voice memos.
vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for
some services. ▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
General information to 15 minutes.
When the data transfer is deactivated, the re‐
spective service cannot be used. Functional requirement
Only make these settings while stationary. Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Settings Deleting data

The data transfer can be configured in different The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
stages or individually for separate services. when the vehicle is reset to the factory settings.
1. "CAR"
Resetting the vehicle configuration, refer to
2. "Settings"
page 63.
4. "Data privacy"
64
Personal settings CONTROLS
Driver profiles As soon as the engine is started or any button is

pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden.
Concept Setup assistant

Driver profiles can be created to store personal The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles for
vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multiple a limited period of time on the Welcome screen
drivers, each driver can create his personal driver to configure the most important settings for the
profile. When a driver profile is selected, the vehi‐ vehicle.
cle will automatically apply the stored settings in
"Getting started" Select to start the set-up assis‐
the driver profile.
tant.
General information The set-up assistant can be started via iDrive at

any time.
Three personal driver profiles can be created.
In addition, a guest profile is available that can be 1. "CAR"
selected by any driver. The guest profile is active 2. "Settings"
when a personal driver profile has not been se‐ 3. "General settings"
lected.
4. "Getting started"
Changes to the vehicle settings are automatically
The driver is guided step by step through the fol‐
stored in the active driver profile or in the guest
lowing functions:
profile.
▷ Setting the system language.
The vehicle can already adjust to the driver when
it is unlocked. For this purpose, the recognition ▷ ConnectedDrive countries:
via a vehicle key and a digital key can be as‐ If the set-up assistant was opened in the
signed to a driver profile. guest profile: create driver profile.
ConnectedDrive countries: The settings stored ▷ Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle.
in the driver's profile can be synchronized with ▷ If the set-up assistant was opened from an al‐
the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. It is ready defined driver profile: set up personal
thereby possible to use these settings in other assistant.
BMW vehicles as well.
▷ Depending on whether the set-up assistant
was opened from an already defined driver
Functional requirements profile or a guest profile: set up services or
When switching the driver profile, the vehicle confirm the explanation for the transmission
must move at a maximum of walking speed. of vehicle related data.
▷ Set up other methods for use.
Welcome screen The selected settings are stored in the active
After the Control Display is switched on, the Wel‐ driver's profile.
come screen will be displayed.
The following actions can be carried out on the Guest profile
Welcome screen: The guest profile can be activated by any driver.
▷ Switching the driver profile. Vehicle settings that are entered when the guest
▷ Starting the set-up assistant. profile is active will be stored in the guest profile.
This option is offered in new vehicle for a lim‐ In the following cases the guest profile is auto‐
ited period of time. matically active:
65
▷ A driver profile has not been created yet. Scanning the displayed QR code will accept
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the ve‐ the access data for the ConnectedDrive ac‐
hicle key that was used to unlock the vehicle. count from the BMW ConnectedDrive app.
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the ▷ "Log in"

digital key that was used to unlock the vehi‐ The access data must be entered via iDrive.
cle. ▷ "New registration"
The following limitations apply: If a ConnectedDrive account does not yet ex‐
▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed. ist, it can be created via iDrive.
▷ It is not possible to assign the recognition to
the guest profile. Selecting recognition
▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the guest 1. "CAR"
profile. 2. "Driver profiles"
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: It is not possible 3. Move the Controller to the right.
to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac‐
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
count.
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
4. "Driver recognition"
screen or via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
▷ "with vehicle key"
2. "Driver profiles"
The vehicle key that is recognized in the
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile car's interior is assigned to the driver pro‐
image can be tapped in the top status bar. file. If multiple vehicle keys are detected,
3. "Guest" the unintended vehicle keys must be re‐
4. "OK" moved from the car’s interior.
▷ "With Digital Key"
Creating a driver profile The digital key that is recognized in the
1. "CAR" car's interior is assigned to the driver pro‐
file. If multiple digital keys are detected,
the unintended digital keys must be re‐
3. Move the Controller to the right. moved from the car’s interior.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile 6. "Activate linkage"
As soon as the vehicle detects the vehicle key or
4. "Add driver profile" the digital key, the corresponding driver profile
Not ConnectedDrive countries: A name must be will be activated. If the vehicle key or the smart‐
entered for the driver profile. phone with the digital key is not carried with you
ConnectedDrive countries: An existing Connec‐ or not recognized, the driver profile can only be
tedDrive account must be assigned to a driver selected on the Welcome screen when a PIN has
profile. The following options are available for this been set up.
purpose:
▷ "Via BMW Connected App"
Setting up a PIN
A driver profile with recognition cannot be acti‐
vated without vehicle key and without digital key.
66
Personal settings CONTROLS
In this case, a PIN can be set up to activate the The handed over vehicle key can then no longer
driver profile. be used to access the personal driver profile.
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not availa‐
ble: If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not Selecting a driver profile
known, the driver profile cannot be activated. Depending on the recognition setting, the driver
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is available: If profile will be selected automatically.
a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not known, the If the guest profile is active, the driver profile will
driver's profile can be activated with the access be selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive:
data of the corresponding ConnectedDrive ac‐ A PIN may have to be entered.
count.
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile
3. Move the Controller to the right. image can be tapped in the top status bar.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile 3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
4. "Driver recognition"
All settings stored in the selected driver profile
5. "using PIN" are automatically applied.
Changing/canceling the Switching synchronization with

recognition function the ConnectedDrive account
When another vehicle key or another digital key on/off
is assigned to a driver profile, the current assign‐ ConnectedDrive countries:
ment must be canceled first.
The settings stored in the driver's profile are
1. "CAR" synchronized with the personal ConnectedDrive
2. "Driver profiles" account. This means that it is possible to use the
personal settings in other BMW vehicles with
ConnectedDrive access as well, if this function is
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile supported.
The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive
4. "Driver recognition" account is enabled when a driver profile is cre‐
5. Select the desired setting: ated or via iDrive:
▷ "with vehicle key" 1. "CAR"
▷ "With Digital Key" 2. "Driver profiles"
6. "Activate linkage" 3. Move the Controller to the right.
When the vehicle and vehicle key will be handed As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
over, such as for maintenance, carry out the fol‐ image can be tapped in the top status bar.
lowing steps first:
4. "Settings"
▷ Setting up PIN.
5. "Synchronize driver profile"
▷ Canceling recognition using the vehicle key.
6. "Synchronize driver profile"
▷ Switching to the guest profile.
67
Renaming a driver profile 6. Select the desired driver profile.

Non-ConnectedDrive countries: 7. "Delete now"
ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profile
1. "CAR"
was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac‐
2. "Driver profiles" count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive ac‐
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile count will be retained.
3. Select driver profile. System limits
4. "Settings" A clear detection of the desired vehicle key may
5. Enter a profile name. not be possible in the following cases, e.g.:
6. Select the symbol. ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access.
ConnectedDrive countries:
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
The name of the driver profile is transferred from locked and unlocked.
the ConnectedDrive account. Changes for the
profile name must be made in the Connected‐ ▷ When multiple vehicle keys are located out‐
Drive account. side on the driver's side of the vehicle.
Selecting a profile picture A driver profile can only be created and
Non-ConnectedDrive countries: synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account
when cellular network reception is available.
1. "CAR"
The use of personal settings that are stored in
2. "Driver profiles" the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles is
3. Move the Controller to the right. subject to technical limitations. For example, set‐
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile tings may be stored for a system that is not avail‐
image can be tapped in the top status bar. able, or available in a non-compatible version, in
other vehicles.
4. "Avatar"
5. Select the desired profile picture.
The profile image is transferred from the Con‐
nectedDrive customer portal or the BMW Con‐
nected app.
Deleting the driver profile

1. "CAR"
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
4. "Settings"
5. "Remove driver profile"
68
Connections CONTROLS
Connections
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle

Concept General information
Various connection types are available for using The following overview shows possible functions
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection and the suitable connection types for them. The
type to select depends on the mobile device and scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐
the desired function. vice.
Function Connection type Symbol in the

device list
Making calls via the hands-free sys‐ Bluetooth.

tem.
Using phone functions via iDrive or
touchscreen.
Other functions, e.g. Contacts or SMS.
Playing music from the smartphone or Bluetooth audio.

the audio player.
WLAN in the vehicle: WLAN.

Using apps in the vehicle.
Wi-Fi hotspot: WLAN.

Using the vehicle Internet access.
Screen Mirroring: WLAN.

Showing the smartphone display on
USB port: USB.

Playing music or videos from a USB
device.
69
CONTROLS Connections
Function Connection type Symbol in the

device list
Apple CarPlay: Bluetooth and WLAN.

Using apps via iDrive and via voice op‐
eration.
Android Auto: Bluetooth and WLAN.

Using apps via iDrive and via voice op‐
eration.
The following connection types require one-time Displaying the vehicle identification
pairing with the vehicle: number and software part number
▷ Bluetooth. When looking for compatible devices, you may
▷ WLAN. have to state the vehicle identification number
Paired devices are automatically recognized later and the software part number. These numbers
on and connected to the vehicle. can be displayed in the vehicle.
1. "COM"
Safety information 2. "Mobile devices"
Warning 4. "Settings"
Operating the integrated information systems 5. "Bluetooth® info"
and communication devices while driving can
6. "System information"
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
Managing mobile devices
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary. General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐
matically recognized and reconnected when
Compatible devices standby state is switched on.
▷ After stored content on the SIM card or the
General information
mobile phone, such as contacts, has been
Information on mobile devices compatible with detected, the data is transmitted to the vehi‐
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/ cle and can be used via iDrive.
bluetooth.
▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed sary, for instance authorization; see the own‐
or deviating software versions. er's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list

All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐
cle are displayed in the device list.
70
A maximum of 4 devices can be connected to functions may be deactivated on a device

the vehicle via Bluetooth, and a maximum of 10 already connected.
devices can be connected to the vehicle via ▷ "Disconnect device"
WLAN. A maximum of 20 devices will be de‐
The device remains paired and can be
tected.
connected again.
1. "COM" ▷ "Delete device"
2. "Mobile devices" The device is disconnected and removed
A symbol to the right of the device name indi‐ from the device list.
cates, for which function the device is used. ▷ "Connection mode"
When the icon is displayed in white, this function Select a connection mode, for instance
is actively connected to the vehicle. The icon is Apple CarPlay.
displayed in gray when the function of the device
▷ "Telephone"
is inactive.
Set telephone.
Symbol Meaning
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
Telephone. Playback of music files on external devi‐
Bluetooth audio. ces such as audio devices or mobile
phones via Bluetooth.
WLAN in the vehicle, WiFi hotspot. ▷ "Apps"
Apps. With the installed BMW Connected app,
apps from the smartphone can be dis‐
Screen Mirroring.
played in the vehicle.
Apple CarPlay. ▷ "Wi-Fi®"
Android Auto. Connects the device with the WLAN in
the vehicle.
Configuring the device
Priority of the phones
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices. When multiple mobile phones are connected to
the vehicle, you can specify the priority of the
The scope of functions depends on the mobile mobile phones for reconnection.
device.
Follow the information on the Control Display. 1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
3. Select the desired device.
5. "Priorities for telephones"
6. Select the desired device.
▷ "Connect device"
7. Select the desired priority by sliding.
The functions that were assigned to the
device before disconnecting are assigned
to the device when it is reconnected. The
71
Bluetooth connection Activating/deactivating

telephone functions
Functional requirements To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, activate the desired functions in the vehi‐
▷ Compatible device with Bluetooth interface.
cle prior to pairing the mobile phone with the ve‐
Compatible devices, refer to page 70. hicle as needed.
▷ The vehicle key or BMW display key is in the
1. "COM"
vehicle.
2. "Personalize menu"
▷ The device is ready for operation.
3. Select the desired settings, for instance"Text
▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle and
messages".
on the device.
▷ The pairing readiness is displayed on the Frequently Asked Questions
Control Display.
All requirements are met and all required steps
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may were completed in the specified order. Despite
be required on the device; refer to the own‐ that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
er's manual of the device. pected.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
Activate Bluetooth
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
1. "COM"
connected?
2. "Mobile devices"
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
3. Move the Controller to the right. nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
4. "Settings" In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections
5. "Bluetooth®" with other devices.
6. Select setting. Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐
vice list on the mobile phone and start a new
Connecting the device device search.
1. "COM" Too many Bluetooth devices with the same
function are paired.
2. "Mobile devices"
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or
has only a limited remaining battery life.
4. "New device"
Charge the mobile phone and deactivate the
5. "Phone calls and audio" power-save mode where required.
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not
6. Compare the control number displayed on function anymore.
the Control Display with the control number
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
firm that the two match. ▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for
mobile phone operation.
7. A Bluetooth connection is established.
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle
ambient temperatures.
and displayed in the device list.
72
Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive? hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
▷ Phone functions are not configured for the fied service center or repair shop.
mobile phone.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone function.
WLAN connection
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
General information
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is For certain applications, such as apps, the data
not yet complete. exchange between smartphone and vehicle oc‐
curs via WLAN.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries
of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
transmitted.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters. ▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐
terface.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
Activate WLAN in the vehicle
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
transmitted is too high. 1. "COM"
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐ 2. "Mobile devices"
stance due to stored information such as 3. Move the Controller to the right.
notes. 4. "Settings"
Reduce the data volume of the contact. 5. "Wi-Fi®"
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it WiFi hotspot
with the telephone function.
▷ Contact was created in the contact list of the Concept
phone after the last synchronization. Compatible devices with WLAN interface can
Synchronize contacts again: "Reload use the Internet connection of the vehicle via the
contacts" WiFi hotspot.
How can the phone connection quality be im‐
proved? General information
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on Up to 10 devices can be connected to the
the mobile phone, depending on the mobile WiFi hotspot simultaneously.
phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless Functional requirements
charging tray. ▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐ terface.
rately in the sound settings. Compatible devices, refer to page 70.
If all points in this list have been checked and the ▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle.
required function is still not available, contact the ▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle.
73
▷ Registration and data contract with a service Deactivating Internet usage via
provider where required. the WiFi hotspot
▷ Standby state is switched on. Internet usage may be deactivated if the data
volume is used up, for instance.
Connecting a device to the
1. "COM"
Internet via the WiFi hotspot
2. "Mobile devices"
Using the Internet for the first time via the
WiFi hotspot requires registration and possibly a 3. Move the Controller to the right.
data volume purchase from a service provider. 4. "Settings"
Depending on the country version, data volume 5. "Internet connection"
can be purchased via the connected mobile de‐ 6. Select the desired setting.
vice or from the ConnectedDrive Store.
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
Screen Mirroring
General information
4. "New device"
Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (outputting)
5. "Internet, apps"
of the smartphone display on the Control Dis‐
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐ play.
6. Activate Internet usage via WLAN if neces‐ Functional requirements
sary. ▷ Compatible smartphone with Screen Mirror‐
"Open settings" ing interface.
7. Activate Internet usage. Compatible devices, refer to page 70.
"Internet connection" ▷ Screen Mirroring is activated on the smart‐
8. Move the Controller to the left. phone.
9. Search for WLAN networks on the mobile de‐ ▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle.
vice. Select network name on the device.
10. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐ Pairing a smartphone with
nect. Screen Mirroring
The device is displayed in the device list. 1. "COM"
Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on the 2. "Mobile devices"
Control Display. Alternatively, this QR code can 3. Move the Controller to the right.
be used to pair the mobile device with the hot‐
4. "New device"
spot.
5. "Screen Mirroring"
All devices connected via the hotspot use this
data volume. The WLAN name of the vehicle is displayed
on the Control Display.
6. Search for WLAN devices in the surroundings
of the smartphone.
74
The WLAN name of the vehicle appears on 7. Compare the control number displayed on
the device display. Select the WLAN name of the Control Display with the control number
the vehicle. on the display of the mobile device, and con‐
7. Confirm the connection via iDrive. firm that the two match.
The device is connected and displayed in the 8. "Confirm note and connect to Apple CarPlay"
device list. The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list.
Apple CarPlay preparation Operation

For more information, refer to the Integrated
Concept Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible gation, Entertainment, Communication.
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
and iDrive. Frequently Asked Questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
Functional requirements were completed in the specified order. Despite
▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
iOS 7.1 or later. pected.
Compatible devices, refer to page 70. In this case, the following explanations can help:
▷ Corresponding mobile contract. The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is established,
▷ Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice operation
CarPlay can no longer be selected.
are activated on the iPhone.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device
▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must
list.
be activated on the iPhone.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: smart‐
from the list of stored connections under
phone integration.
Bluetooth and under WLAN.
▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehi‐
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
cle.
If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact the
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
hotline, a dealer's service center or another quali‐
1. "COM" fied service center or repair shop.
2. "Mobile devices"
4. "New device"
Android Auto preparation
Concept
the Control Display. Android Auto allows the operation of certain
functions of a compatible smartphone via voice
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth operation and iDrive.
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.
A control number is displayed.
75
Functional requirements Operation

▷ Compatible Android smartphone with For more information, refer to the Integrated
Android 9.0 or later. Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐
Compatible devices, refer to page 70. gation, Entertainment, Communication.
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.

Frequently Asked Questions
▷ Bluetooth and WLAN are enabled on the
smartphone. All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
be activated on the smartphone. pected.
▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: smart‐ In this case, the following explanations can help:
phone integration.
The smartphone has already been paired with
▷ The Android Auto app is installed on the Android Auto. When a new connection is estab‐
smartphone. lished, Android Auto can no longer be selected.
▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehi‐ ▷ Delete the smartphone concerned from the
cle. device list.
▷ On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con‐
Pairing a smartphone with cerned from the list of stored connections
Android Auto under Bluetooth and under WLAN.
1. "COM" ▷ Pair the smartphone as a new device.
2. "Mobile devices" If the steps listed have been carried out and the
3. Move the Controller to the right. required function is still not available: contact the
4. "New device" hotline, a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
the Control Display. USB connection
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. General information
A control number is displayed. The following mobile devices can be connected
7. Compare the control number displayed on to the USB port:
the Control Display with the control number ▷ Mobile phones.
firm that the two match. ▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players.
8. "Confirm note and connect to Android Auto" ▷ USB storage devices.
9. If necessary, finish the setup on the mobile Common file systems are supported. FAT32
device. and exFAT are the recommended formats.
The smartphone is connected to the vehicle and A connected USB device will be supplied with
displayed in the device list. charge current via the USB port if the device
supports this. Follow the maximum charge cur‐
rent of the USB port.
The following uses are possible on USB ports
with data transfer:
76
▷ Playing music files. Connecting the device

▷ Playing videos. Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter
Follow the following when connecting: cable to a USB port.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐ The USB device is displayed in the device list.
tor into the USB port. Additional information:
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable. USB port, refer to page 313.
▷ Protect the USB device against mechanical
damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB devices
available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐
teed that every device is operable on the ve‐
hicle.
▷ Do not expose USB devices to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the owner's manual of the
device.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
niques, proper playback of the media stored
on the USB device cannot be guaranteed in
all cases.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB device via the on‐
board socket, when it is connected to the
USB port.
▷ Depending on how the USB device is being
used, settings may be required on the USB
storage device, refer to the owner's manual of
the device.
Not compatible USB devices:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Compatible device with USB port.
Compatible devices, refer to page 70.
77
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
cific and optional features offered with the series. doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
It also describes features and functions that are this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
to the selected options or country versions. This vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ opened from the outside.
served.
Warning
For some country versions, unlocking from the
Vehicle key inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
General information
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
Depending on the equipment version, the vehicle the vehicle from the outside when there are
is delivered with two vehicle keys or one vehicle people in it.
key and the BMW display key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery.
Depending on the equipment and country ver‐ Warning
sion, various settings can be configured for the Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
button functions. can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
A driver profile with personal settings can be as‐ themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
signed to a vehicle key. following actions:
To provide information on maintenance require‐ ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
ments, the service data is stored in the vehicle ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
key.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, dows.
take the vehicle key with you when exiting the
vehicle.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
78
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Overview ▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle

key, this driver profile will be activated and the
settings that are stored in it will be applied.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the car's interior, they will not be
folded out when unlocking.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be
1 Unlocking switched off.
2 Locking After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle
Stationary climate control through Remote is ready for operation.
Engine Start 300 The light functions may depend on the ambient
3 To open the tailgate brightness.
4 Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode Convenient opening
Press briefly: pathway lighting Press and hold the button on the vehi‐
cle key after unlocking.
Unlocking The windows and the glass sunroof with sun

protection are opened, as long as the button on
General information the vehicle key is pressed.
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking us‐
ing the vehicle key depends on the following set‐ Locking
tings:
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap General information
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked. The behavior of the vehicle during locking using
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed the vehicle key depends on the following set‐
with a light signal or a sound signal. tings:
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the ▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
vehicle is being unlocked. a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
Unlocking the vehicle in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior
mirrors are not folded in when the hazard
Press the button on the vehicle key. warning flashers are switched on.
▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking.
If, due to the settings, only the driver's door and
fuel filler flap were unlocked, press the button on
Locking the vehicle
the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle
access points. 1. Close the driver's door.
In addition, the following functions are executed:
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
79
The following functions are executed: Welcome lights, refer to page 178.
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap The light functions may depend on the ambient
are locked. brightness.
switched on. Tailgate
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks General information
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button. do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
The following settings are available for the opera‐
With Comfort Access: tion of the tailgate with the vehicle key:
convenient closing ▷ Whether the vehicle key opens only the up‐
per tailgate or the upper and lower tailgate at
Safety information the same time.
▷ Determines if the doors will be unlocked
Warning when the tailgate is opened with the vehicle
key.
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure When the trailer power socket is in use, the tail‐
that the area of movement of the doors is clear gate cannot be opened with the vehicle key.
during convenient closing.
Safety information
Closing
Warning
Press and hold the button on the vehicle
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
key in the area close to the vehicle after
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
locking.
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
The windows and the glass sunroof with sun during opening and closing.
protection are closed, as long as the button on
the vehicle key is pressed.
Warning
Switching on the interior and The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is
exterior lights a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
Press the button on the vehicle key with
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
the vehicle locked.
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐

onds after locking. NOTICE
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
they were manually switched off. windows and heat conductors while driving.
Interior lights, refer to page 182. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
▷ Depending on the settings, the exterior light‐
not hit the windows.
ing will be switched on.
80
Opening 3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐

ing a pointed object and lift it out.
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐
cle key for approx. 1 second.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key
three times in succession. 4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐
tive side facing up.
To switch off the alarm: press any button. 5. Press the cover closed.
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key
Switching pathway lighting on until the integrated key engages.
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
cle key for approx. 1 second. er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or take
It is possible to adjust the duration of the path‐
them to a collection point.
way lighting feature.
Pathway lighting, refer to page 178. Additional vehicle keys
Additional vehicle keys are available from a serv‐
Replacing the battery ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle
key.
Loss of vehicle keys
Integrated key, refer to page 92.
A lost vehicle key can be blocked and replaced
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐ by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the service center or repair shop.
cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2. If the lost vehicle key has an assigned driver pro‐
file, the connection to this vehicle key must be
deleted. A new vehicle key can then be assigned
to the driver profile.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐
function under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
81
▷ Interference of the radio connection from tention to the display in the instrument clus‐
transmission towers or other equipment with ter.
high transmitting power. 2. If the vehicle key is detected:
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐ Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
jects. onds.
Do not transport the vehicle key together with If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly
metal objects. change the position of the vehicle key and repeat
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ the procedure.
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the vehicle key. Frequently Asked Questions
Do not transport the vehicle key together with What precautions can be taken to be able to
electronic devices. open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in ve‐
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐ hicle key?
ing process of mobile devices, for instance ▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐
charging of a mobile phone. ices of the BMW Connected app include the
▷ The vehicle key is located in direct proximity ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.
of the tray for wireless charging tray. This requires an active BMW Connected‐
Place the vehicle key in a different location. Drive contract and the BMW Connected app
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also must be installed on a smartphone.
be unlocked and locked from the outside with ▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the integrated key. the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
Additional information: An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
Integrated key, refer to page 92. required.
Switching the drive-ready state on

via emergency detection of the
BMW display key
vehicle key
General information
The BMW display key is supplied with an addi‐
tional mechanical key. If the display key is used,
the mechanical key should be carried with you,
for instance in the wallet. The mechanical key is
used like the integrated key.
The display key supports all functions of the
standard vehicle key.
In addition, the following functions are also avail‐
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready able:
state if the vehicle key has not been detected. ▷ Display status of doors and windows.
Proceed as follows in this case: ▷ Display status of the anti-theft warning sys‐
tem.
1. Hold the back of the vehicle key against the
marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐ ▷ Display service information.
82
▷ Call up range with available fuel. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.

▷ With parked-car heating: operate parked-car ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
heating. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
Without parked-car heating: operate parked- leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
car ventilation. hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
▷ Stationary climate control through Remote ing and lock the vehicle.
Engine Start
▷ Level setting of the vehicle when stationary.
Overview
Safety information
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the 1 To open the tailgate
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be 2 Unlocking
opened from the outside. 3 Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode
Press briefly: pathway lighting
Warning
4 Locking
5 Display
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
6 Back
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ 7 Switch the display on/off
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock 8 Micro-USB charging socket
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
Reception range
The number of available display key functions
depends on the distance from the vehicle.
Warning
▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi‐
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
cle, all functions of the display key are availa‐
ble.
following actions: ▷ The status information can be called up in the
extended reception range.
With parked-car heating: the parked-car heat‐
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
ing can be operated.
Without parked-car heating: the parked-car
dows.
ventilation can be operated.
83
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehicle, ▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐
you can display the last transmitted status in‐ ception range. It indicates when the last data
formation from the vehicle. transfer from the vehicle took place.
The symbol is shown on the display if one of
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception Switching on/off
range. The display will go out automatically after a brief
period to conserve battery power.
Display To hide the display manually:
Press the button on the left side of the display
General information key.
The display is divided into the upper status line, To show the display:
the information area, and the lower status line.
1. Press the button on the left side of the dis‐
Upper status line play key.
The upper status line displays the following infor‐ 2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to
mation: top to unlock the screen lock.
▷ / Vehicle secured/vehicle unsecured. To switch off the display to increase the usable
battery life:
▷ Set time in the vehicle.
▷ Charge state of the display key battery. 1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock.
2. Press and hold the button on the left side of
Information area the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
The information area can be used to access in‐ 3. "OK"
formation and perform additional functions. To switch the display on:
If the information area contains more than one Press the button on the left side of the display
page, then page indicators are shown beneath key.
the information.
A solid indicator denotes the current Operating concept
page.
The following information shows how to access
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change the information and functions using the main
between the pages. menus.
If further information is available on a page, tap
Main menu Information/Function
the appropriate symbol.
To return to the original page: tap on the "Security /
symbol beneath the display. information" Door status.
Alarm system status.
Lower status line
After alarm triggering: date,
The lower status line indicates whether or not time, and reason for trig‐
the display key is within reception range. gering the alarm.
▷ "Connected": the display key is within recep‐
tion range.
Window status.
Glass sunroof status.
84
Main menu Information/Function The charging duration depends on the

charger used.
"Entry level" "Height control" Set
▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the
vehicle level.
charger and the display key.
"Vehicle Maintenance indicators of Charging in the wireless charging tray may
information" Condition Based Service heat up the tray and the display key.
CBS.
At higher temperatures, the charge current
Status of the roadside through the display key may be reduced, and
parking lights. in isolated cases the charge process may be
interrupted temporarily.
"Mobility info" Range with available fuel.
▷ When inserting the display key into the wire‐
"Preconditioning With parked-car heating: less charging tray, make sure there are no
setting" operate parked-car heat‐ objects between it and the wireless charging
ing. tray.
Without parked-car heat‐
ing: operate parked-car Safety information
ventilation.
Stationary climate control Warning
through Remote Engine
Start. When charging a device that meets the Qi
standard in the wireless charging tray, any
metal objects located between the device and
Display key battery the tray can become very hot. Placing storage
devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards,
General information cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal
Follow the following information: transmission, between the device and the tray
may impair the card function. There is a risk of
▷ If the charge state of the display key battery
injury and risk of damage to property. When
declines, the display is switched off automati‐
charging mobile devices, make sure there are
cally. The battery must be recharged so that
no objects between the device and the tray.
the display can be switched back on. The op‐
erability of the standard buttons is retained
until the battery is completely discharged.
Charging
▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first time Via USB
or if the key has not been used for an ex‐
Connect the display key via the micro-USB
tended period.
charging socket to a USB port.
▷ The display key can be used while it is being
charged via the USB port. If the battery is fully
discharged, it may take some time before the
display key can be used again.
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers
available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐
teed that every charger will function properly.
85
With thermoelectric cup holder: centered LED displays

in the center console
Color Meaning
Blue The display key is charging.

The blue LED stays illuminated once
the inserted display key is fully
charged.
Orange The display key is not charging.

Temperature on the display key pos‐
sibly too high or foreign object in
1. Open the tray cover. charging tray.
2. Place display key flush into the recess of the Red The display key is not charging.
wireless charging tray.
Contact a dealer’s service center or
Ensure that the display is facing up. another qualified service center or re‐
3. Close the tray cover. pair shop.
Without thermoelectric cup holder: on the Malfunction

left in the center console
General information
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the display key is discharged.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
1. Open the tray cover. ▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal ob‐
2. Place the display key into the middle of the jects.
wireless charging tray in front of the left cup ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
holder. bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
Ensure that the display is facing up. rect proximity.
3. Close the tray cover. ▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐

ing process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
Do not transport the display key together with
metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the mechanical key.
86
Switching on drive-ready state via Key card

emergency detection of the BMW
display key
Concept
The key card allows the vehicle to be unlocked
and locked, as well as started.
General information
The key card is available with Comfort Access.
Depending on the national-market version, the
key card may not be available.
A digital key that has already been paired with
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready the vehicle is installed on the key card. The digi‐
state if the display key has not been detected. tal key must be activated via iDrive.
Proceed as follows in this case: Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the key
card or take the key card with you because the
1. Hold the display key with its back against the active key card can be used to start the vehicle.
marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐ Always take the vehicle key with you to a service
tention to the display in the instrument clus‐ appointment.
ter.
2. If the display key is detected: Safety information
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
Warning
If the display key is not detected, slightly change
the position of the display key and repeat the
procedure.
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
Resetting the BMW display key vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be
If the charged display key cannot be switched on opened from the outside.
anymore or if the display does not respond to
entries anymore, the display key can be reset.
Press and hold the following buttons on the dis‐ Warning
play key at the same time for at least 10 seconds For some country versions, unlocking from the
until the display is switched off and then on inside is only possible with special knowledge.
again:
▷ cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
▷ the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
87
Unlocking and locking the

Warning vehicle
following actions:
dows.
Hold activated key card directly and centered on
the outside door handle of the driver's door.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ Starting the engine
ing and lock the vehicle. Tray with thermoelectric cup holder:
Connection to the vehicle

The communication between the vehicle and the
key card uses near-field communication, NFC.
Activating/deactivating key card

in the vehicle
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to
activate and deactivate the key card. Tray without thermoelectric cup holder:
When BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehi‐
cle, a digital key can be used instead of the vehi‐
cle key.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "BMW Digital Key"
5. Select key card.
6. "Digital Key active" 1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
A deactivated key card remains in the list of 2. Place activated key card centered into the
paired digital keys. smartphone tray.
3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en‐
gine.
With wireless charging tray: After starting the en‐
gine, take the key card out of the tray to make
88
tray available for charging compatible smart‐ Safety information

phones.
Warning
Malfunction
The detection of the key card by the vehicle may
be disrupted by objects between the sensors
and the key card, for instance a wallet.
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be
BMW Digital Key opened from the outside.
Concept Warning
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un‐
locked and locked, as well as started, with a
compatible smartphone.
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
General information
The BMW Digital Key is available with Comfort the vehicle from the outside when there are
Access. Depending on the national-market ver‐ people in it.
sion, the BMW Digital Key may not be available.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
smartphone, this function must be offered by the Warning
smartphone manufacturer. The BMW Con‐
nected app provides a check to determine if the
smartphone and the vehicle are compatible.
A driver profile with individual settings can be as‐ following actions:
signed to a digital key.
When using a smartphone with a digital key, al‐
ways carry a vehicle key or the activated key card
with you. This ensures access to the vehicle, ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
even in the event of a smartphone malfunction. It dows.
is also useful to carry the vehicle key or the key ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
card with you if the vehicle has to be handed
over to another person. You can then hand over
the vehicle key or the key card, instead of your There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
smartphone. Always take the vehicle key with leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
you to a service appointment. hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
Connection to the vehicle

The communication between the vehicle and the
smartphone uses near-field communication,
NFC.
89
Functional requirements Forwarding authorization

▷ The smartphone is compatible with BMW Select the corresponding menu item on the
Digital Key smartphone to share the digital key.
▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected‐ As soon as a digital key is shared with another
Drive account of the vehicle owner. person, the person will be notified. Following the
▷ The BMW Connected app must be installed confirmation of this message, the digital key on
on the smartphone to register the digital re‐ the recipient's smartphone will be activated.
mote control key.
Pairing shared digital keys in the
▷ The rechargeable battery of the smartphone
has a sufficient charge. The necessary mini‐
vehicle
mum charge of the rechargeable battery de‐ The registration of the shared key occurs on the
pends on the smartphone. external door handle or in the smartphone tray.
This process may take a few seconds. Follow the
Register digital remote control corresponding instructions on the smartphone or
key
After the digital key has been paired, its name will
The installed digital key on the vehicle owner's
be displayed in the list of digital keys.
smartphone is registered as digital remote con‐
trol key in the vehicle. The vehicle owner must
prove his authorization for the vehicle for this
Authentication
purpose. Depending on the recipient’s smartphone model,
an authentication may be required for security
The proof of authorization is completed via the
and safety reasons.
BMW Connected app and both vehicle keys.
Both vehicle keys must be located in the vehicle An authorized vehicle key, the digital remote
for the registration. control key or another method may be used for
authentication. Follow the corresponding instruc‐
Open the BMW Connected app and follow the
tions on the smartphone or the Control Display.
instructions.
The period of validity of a digital key is limited
Deleting a shared key
and corresponds to the term of the booked serv‐
ice. The expiration date of the validity can be
checked in the BMW Connected app and in the
General information
vehicle. Shared keys can be deleted via the smartphone
of the digital remote control key, the smartphone
After a digital key has expired, it can still be used
of a shared key or via iDrive.
to move the vehicle until the vehicle is used with
a different vehicle key or digital key. The deletion via the smartphone of the remote
control key will not be performed until the vehicle
Sharing digital keys is used with a key other than the key to be de‐
leted.
General information Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys with
other people. This option is available via the Deletion via iDrive
smartphone on which the digital key is stored. To be able to delete a digital key via iDrive, an
authorized vehicle key must be located in the ve‐
90
hicle or the digital remote control key must be lo‐ Unlocking and locking the
cated in the smartphone tray. vehicle
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
5. If necessary, select the digital key.
6. "Remove Digital Key"
The digital key will be removed from the list
of paired digital keys.
Hold the near field communication antenna of
Deleting all shared keys the smartphone directly and centered on the
outside door handle of the driver's door.
To be able to delete all digital keys, an authorized
vehicle key must be located in the vehicle or the The position of the near field communication an‐
digital remote control key must be located in the tenna depends on the smartphone model.
smartphone tray. When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,
make sure that all doors and also the tailgate are
1. "CAR"
closed.
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
Starting the engine
Tray with thermoelectric cup holder:
5. "Remove all Digital Keys"
Reset the function

To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au‐
thorized vehicle key must be located in the vehi‐
cle.
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function, all
digital keys including the digital remote control
key will be deleted.
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be un‐ Tray without thermoelectric cup holder:
locked, locked or started with a digital key.
The digital remote control key must be regis‐
tered again to be able to use BMW Digital Key
again.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
5. "Reset function" 1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
91
2. Place smartphone centered into the smart‐ Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
phone tray. cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en‐ tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
gine. the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
Sale of the smartphone
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior to
NOTICE
selling the smartphone. This ensures that that
the smartphone is deactivated for the vehicle. The door lock is permanently joined with the
door. The door handle can be moved. When
Sale of the vehicle pulling the door handle with the integrated key
inserted, paint or the integrated key can be
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital Key
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
function or remove the vehicle from the Connec‐
erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling
tedDrive account of the current vehicle owner.
the outside door handle.
When the vehicle is removed from the Connec‐
tedDrive account, all digital keys for the vehicle
will be deleted. Removing
Malfunction
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐
function under the following circumstances:
▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sensors
in the vehicle by a smartphone cover that is
not suitable.
▷ Objects such as a chip card or the key card
are located between the smartphone and the
smartphone cover. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without the vehicle key using the integrated key.
integrated key also fits the glove compartment.
Safety information
Warning
92
Locking/unlocking via the door Alarm system

lock The activated alarm system is triggered when
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with the door is opened, if the vehicle has been un‐
one hand. locked via the door lock.
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
cle is locked with the integrated key.
Buttons for the central

locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐
back under the cover and push the cover out.
tem and interior lights come on.
Use the thumb for counter support to prevent
the cover from falling out of the door handle. Overview
3. Remove the cover. Buttons for the central locking system.

4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Unlocking
The other doors must be unlocked or locked Press the button.
from the inside.
93
Opening ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
Unlocking
Pull the door opener above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door General information
to open the door. The other doors remain
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking via
locked.
the Comfort Access depends on the following
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on settings:
the door to be opened; the first time unlocks
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed
the door, the second time opens it. The other
with a light signal or a sound signal.
doors remain locked.
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the
vehicle is being unlocked.
Comfort Access
Unlocking the vehicle
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without operating
the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket, is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key
when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐
rior.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐ In addition, the following functions are executed:
tions: ▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the key, this driver profile will be activated and the
door handle. settings that are stored in it will be applied.
▷ Convenient closing. ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
▷ Touchless unlocking and locking of the vehi‐
cle. ▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
BMW Digital Key. button in the car's interior, they will not be
folded out when unlocking.
▷ Open the tailgate.
▷ Open and close the tailgate with no-touch
switched off.
activation.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
outside of the vehicle near the doors.
94
Locking Convenient closing
General information Safety information

The behavior of the vehicle during locking via the
Comfort Access depends on the following set‐ Warning
tings:
With convenient closing, body parts can be
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
a light signal or a sound signal. that the area of movement of the doors is clear
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded during convenient closing.
in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior
mirrors are not folded in when the hazard
warning flashers are switched on. Closing
▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking.
Locking the vehicle

Close the driver's door.
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it
there without grasping the door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass

Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle. Opening the tailgate
The following functions are executed:
General information
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
are locked.
locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
switched on.
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
95
Safety information carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed

foot motion in the central rear area and the tail‐
gate is opened and closed.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the General information
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
Touchless opening and closing of the tailgate is
not possible when equipped with trailer hitch.
during opening and closing.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
Warning If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the tail‐

gate may open or close inadvertently if you unin‐
The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is
tentionally move your foot or if a foot movement
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
is detected.
tailgate is clear during opening and closing. The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
NOTICE If the tailgate is opened with no-touch activation,

locked doors are not unlocked.
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driving. You can configure if only the upper tailgate will
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover open or if the upper and lower tailgate opens.
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do When closing, the upper and lower tailgate will
not hit the windows. always be closed.
Contactless opening and closing of the tailgate
must be activated in the settings.
Opening
Safety information
Warning
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐
tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.

Warning
Opening and closing the tailgate Body parts can be jammed when operating the
with no-touch activation tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
Concept during opening and closing.
The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
touch activation using the vehicle key you are
96
this movement, the leg must pass through

Warning the ranges of both sensors.
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driving.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do Opening
not hit the windows. Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Before the tailgate opens, the hazard warning
system flashes.
Settings
Moving your foot again will stop the opening mo‐
1. "CAR" tion, and moving it one more time after that will
2. "Settings" close the tailgate.
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "Tailgate" Closing
5. Select the desired setting: Perform the foot movement described earlier.
▷ "Open with foot movement" The hazard warning system flashes and an
acoustic signal sounds.
Contactless opening of the trunk lid is
switched on or off. Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐
tion, and moving it one more time after that will
▷ "Close by foot movement" re-open the tailgate.
Contactless closing of the trunk lid is
switched on or off. Touchless unlocking and locking
of the vehicle
Performing the foot movement
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐ Concept
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
The vehicle will be unlocked when the driver ap‐
the vehicle.
proaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle key.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
When the driver walks away from the unlocked
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be
locked.
General information
The vehicle will be unlocked when an authorized
vehicle key is detected in the unlocking zone.
97
The unlocking zone is located within a radius of Functional requirements

approx. 3 ft/1 m around the door handles. ▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off.
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key ▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking zone,
leaves the locking zone. the doors and tailgate must be closed.
The locking zone is located within a radius of ap‐ ▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the
prox. 7 ft/2 m around the door handles. doors and tailgate must be closed.
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking zone ▷ For touchless locking of the vehicle, no sec‐
for an extended period of time without move‐ ond vehicle key can be located in a radius of
ment, the vehicle will be locked automatically. six meters around the vehicle.
If a passenger is detected in the front passenger ▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for
seat during locking and the safety belt of the several days, touchless unlocking/locking is
front passenger is engaged in the safety belt not possible until after the vehicle has been
buckle during locking: driven.
▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured
against theft. Malfunction
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐
The behavior of the vehicle during touchless un‐ function under the following circumstances:
locking/locking depends on the following set‐ ▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
tings:
For replacing the battery, refer to page 81.
▷ If the automatic unlocking is active.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
▷ If the automatic locking is active. transmission towers or other equipment with
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap high transmitting power.
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked. ▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐
Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the driv‐ jects.
er's door and fuel filler flap will only be un‐ Do not transport the vehicle key together with
locked when the driver approaches the vehi‐ metal objects.
cle on the driver's side.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be un‐ bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
locked regardless of the side on which the rect proximity to the vehicle key.
driver approaches the vehicle.
Do not transport the vehicle key together with
▷ If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle is electronic devices.
confirmed with a light signal or a sound sig‐
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking
nal.
request recognition function on the door han‐
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the dles.
vehicle is being unlocked.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking. vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded use the integrated key.
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and Additional information:
locked.
98
Tailgate
NOTICE
Foreign objects, such as sand or icing, between
General information the bumper and tailgate may cause damage
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, when operating the lower tailgate. There is a
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. risk of damage to property. If necessary, re‐
The tailgate consists of the upper and the lower move foreign objects from the bumper and the
tailgate. The lower tailgate opens downward to lower tailgate before operating the lower tail‐
make loading the cargo area easier. gate.
The following settings are available for the opera‐
tion of the tailgate:
▷ The opening height of the upper tailgate. NOTICE
▷ With Comfort Access: Whether the vehicle Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
key opens only the upper tailgate or the up‐ windows and heat conductors while driving.
per and lower tailgate at the same time. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
▷ With Comfort Access: Whether the button in
not hit the windows.
the driver's door opens only the upper or the
upper and lower tailgate together.
▷ Determines if the doors will be unlocked
NOTICE
when the tailgate is opened with the vehicle
key. Manual operation of the tailgate in the wrong
sequence can damage the tailgate. There is a
risk of damage to property. Close the lower tail‐
Safety information
gate first before closing the upper tailgate man‐
ually.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that Upper tailgate
during opening and closing. Opening
General information
Warning It may not be possible to open the tailgate when
the vehicle is in valet parking mode.
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When the trailer socket is occupied, the tailgate
Make sure that the area of movement of the cannot be opened with the vehicle key or with
tailgate is clear during opening and closing. the button in the car's interior.
The upper tailgate will be opened to the config‐
ured opening height.
Valet parking mode, refer to page 102.
99
From the outside From the outside

Without Comfort Access:
1. Closing the lower tailgate manually.

2. Press the button on the inside of the upper
tailgate.
With Comfort Access:

▷ Press the button on the inside of the
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button upper tailgate.
on the outside of the tailgate.
The lower tailgate will be closed automatically
▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key with the upper tailgate.
with you and press the button on the outside
▷ Press the button on the inside of the
of the tailgate.
upper tailgate.
▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐ The vehicle will be locked after closing the
hicle key for approx. 1 second. tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for
With Comfort Access: If necessary, the lower this purpose and the vehicle key must be out‐
tailgate will also be opened. side of the vehicle in the area of the tailgate.
From the inside with the upper tailgate.
Press the button in the driver's door.
From the inside
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
must be engaged first. 1. Closing the lower tailgate manually.
With Comfort Access: If necessary, the lower tail‐
gate will also be opened. 2. Pull and hold the button in the driver
door.
Interruption of the opening procedure The vehicle key must be located in the car’s
The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐ interior for this function.
lowing situations: With Comfort Access:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving. Pull and hold the button in the driver door.
▷ By pressing the used button used again. The vehicle key must be located in the
car’s interior for this function.
Closing
with the upper tailgate.
Without Comfort Access: The lower tailgate An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is
must be closed; otherwise, a Check Control closed.
message will be displayed.
100
Interruption of the closing procedure From the outside

The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐ Without Comfort Access:
lowing situations: Closing the lower tailgate manually.
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement. With Comfort Access:
▷ By pressing the used button used again.
Press the button on the lower tailgate.
Lower tailgate
With Comfort Access: from the inside
Opening The lower tailgate will be closed automatically
with the upper tailgate.
General information
When open, the lower tailgate can support loads With Comfort Access: terminating the
of up to 550 lbs/250 kg. closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
The upper tailgate must be open.
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement.
From the outside ▷ By pressing the button in the lower tailgate.

System limits
Press the button on the lower tailgate
Without Comfort Access: The upper tailgate is
and fold the lower tailgate down.
designed for electric operation via the provided
With Comfort Access: operating points.
With Comfort Access: The upper tailgate and the
Press the button on the lower tailgate.
lower tailgate are designed for electric operation
via the provided operating points.
With Comfort Access: from the inside A manual operation of the tailgate can produce
system states in which an electric operation is no
Depending on the settings, the lower tailgate will
longer possible.
be opened automatically with the upper tailgate.
For instance, this type of system state applies
With Comfort Access: terminating the when there is a danger of collision between the
opening procedure upper and lower tailgate. In this case, an acoustic
signal will sound and the upper tailgate must be
The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
completely opened manually.
lowing situations:
Operate the tailgate manually in exceptional
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
cases only such as in the event of a malfunction.
▷ By pressing the button on the lower tailgate.
Pressing again closes the tailgate.
Closing
There is no cargo on the lower tailgate.
101
Malfunction Valet parking mode

Safety information
Concept
In the valet parking mode, the Control Display is
Warning locked. The operation via iDrive is no longer pos‐
With manual operation of a blocked tailgate, it sible.
can release itself unexpectedly from the block‐ E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle is
age. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage handed over for valet parking.
to property. Do not operate the tailgate man‐
ually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
General information
center or repair shop. In the valet parking mode, it is not possible to
change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal pro‐
Without Comfort Access: Operate the unlocked files cannot be changed. Personal data cannot
upper tailgate manually and slowly without jerk‐ be displayed.
ing. Additionally, the following actions are carried out:
With Comfort Access: Operate the unlocked up‐ ▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.
per or lower tailgate manually and slowly without ▷ The integrated remote control is deactivated.
jerking. When closing, make sure the lower tail‐
▷ DSC cannot be switched off.
gate is closed first.
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
only. Closing occurs automatically.
▷ At least one driver profile has been created.
▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active.
Soft-close automatic ▷ At least one driver profile has an assigned
ConnectedDrive account.
Safety information
Accessing the menu for the valet
Warning parking mode
Body parts can be jammed while operating the
Via the switch-off screen
doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the doors is clear dur‐ After switching off drive-ready state the switch-
ing opening and closing. off screen will be displayed. Select the entry for
the valet parking mode on the switch-off screen.
Closing Via the display bar at the upper edge

To close the doors, push lightly. of the Control Display
Closing occurs automatically. 1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Valet parking mode"
102
Via the vehicle settings Deactivating valet parking mode

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" General information
3. "General settings" The lock screen of the valet parking mode is dis‐
4. "Valet parking mode"
The deactivation of the valet parking mode de‐
pends on which driver profile is selected on the
Activating the valet parking lock screen.
mode
Driver profile with PIN
General information
Regardless of which driver activated the valet
Before activating the valet parking mode, a PIN parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet
must be set up to be able to deactivate the valet parking mode by entering his/her PIN.
parking mode at a future time.
1. Select driver profile.
The procedure for entering the PIN varies de‐
pending on the active driver profile. 2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile.
If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode
Driver profile with PIN must be deactivated by entering the assigned
A PIN has been stored for the active driver pro‐ ConnectedDrive access data.
file.
It is not necessary to enter another PIN.
Driver profile without PIN
The valet parking mode was activated by another
"Activate now"
person. To deactivate the valet parking mode, a
driver without a PIN has to enter the access data
Driver profile without PIN for his ConnectedDrive account.
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.
1. Select driver profile.
1. "PIN"
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as‐
2. Enter PIN. signed to the driver profile.
3. "Activate now"
Guest profile
Guest profile In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can
The guest profile is the active driver profile. only be deactivated if the valet parking mode was
A PIN must be entered. activated in the guest profile.
1. "PIN" 1. Select guest profile.
2. Enter PIN. 2. Enter the PIN that was specified during acti‐
vation.
3. "Activate now"
If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet parking
This PIN can be used once to deactivate the mode must be deactivated via a personal driver
valet parking mode for the active guest pro‐ profile.
file.
103
Adjusting Folding mirrors in automatically

1. "CAR"
General information 2. "Settings"
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ 3. "Doors/Access"
try version, various settings for opening and clos‐ 4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"
ing are possible.
These settings are stored for the driver profile Automatic unlocking
currently used. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Unlocking and locking 3. "Doors/Access"
Doors 4. "Unlock at end of trip"
1. "CAR" After drive-ready state is switched off by

pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked ve‐
2. "Settings" hicle is automatically unlocked.
3. "Key button settings"
4. Select the symbol. Automatic locking
5. Select the desired setting: 1. "CAR"
▷ "Driver's door only" 2. "Settings"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler 3. "Doors/Access"
flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks 4. Select the desired setting:
the entire vehicle.
▷ "Lock automatically"
▷ "All doors"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
The entire vehicle is unlocked. while if no door is opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
Confirmation signals from the
The vehicle locks automatically after you
vehicle
drive off.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Tailgate
3. "Doors/Access"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐ Opening height of the upper tailgate
tion signals: You can set how far the upper tailgate can be
▷ "Flash when locking/unlocking" opened.
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐ When adjusting the opening height, make sure
ing by one. the clearance above the tailgate is at least
4 in/10 cm.
▷ With alarm system:
"Sound when locking/unlocking" 1. "CAR"
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound 2. "Settings"
signals, locking is confirmed with one 3. "Doors/Access"
sound signal. 4. "Tailgate"
104
5. "Opening height" ▷ "Upper tailgate"

6. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired The upper tailgate is opened.
opening height. ▷ "Upper tailgate + door(s)"
The tailgate is opened and the doors un‐
With Comfort Access: upper or both locked.
tailgates
▷ "Both tailgates"
The button in the car's interior can be set
The upper and lower tailgate will be
up to open only the upper tailgate or the
opened.
upper and lower tailgate together:
▷ "Both tailgates + door(s)"
Via iDrive: The upper and lower tailgate will be
1. "CAR" opened and the doors unlocked.
2. "Settings"
Comfort Access
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "Tailgate" Touchless locking and unlocking
▷ "Upper tailgate" 2. "Settings"
Only the upper tailgate opens. 3. "Doors/Access"
▷ "Both tailgates" 4. "Comfort access"
The upper and lower tailgate will be 5. Select the desired setting:
opened together.
▷ "Unlock when approaching"
To open the upper and lower tailgate at
▷ "Lock when walking away"
the same time, the upper tailgate must be
closed when the button is pressed.
Touchless opening of the tailgate
This setting also applies to the touchless open‐
For touchless unlocking, a setting can be en‐
ing of the tailgate.
tered to open only the upper tailgate or the up‐
per and lower tailgate together:
Tailgate and doors
Via iDrive:
The button of the vehicle key can be configured
to control which part of the tailgate will be 1. "CAR"
opened and if the doors will be unlocked at the 2. "Settings"
same time.
3. "Doors/Access"
▷
4. "Tailgate"
Via iDrive:
▷ "Upper tailgate"
1. "CAR"
Only the upper tailgate opens.
2. "Settings"
▷ "Both tailgates"
3. "Key button settings"
The upper and lower tailgate will be
4. Select the symbol. opened together.
105
To open the upper and lower tailgate at Do not modify the system to ensure function of
the same time, the upper tailgate must be the alarm system.
closed when the button is pressed.
This setting also applies to opening the tailgate Switching on/off
in the interior. The alarm system is switched on or off as soon
as the vehicle is locked with the vehicle key or
Establishing idle state after unlocked or locked via Comfort Access.
opening the front doors
1. "CAR" Opening the doors with the alarm
2. "Settings" system switched on
3. "Doors/Access" The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door" integrated key in the door lock.
Idle state, refer to page 37.
Opening the tailgate with the
alarm system switched on
Alarm system
The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm
system is switched on.
General information
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm tored again provided the doors are locked. The
system reacts to the following changes: hazard warning system flashes once.
▷ Opening a door, the hood, or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the car's interior. Panic mode
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, dur‐ You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
ing attempts at stealing a wheel or when tow‐ self in a dangerous situation.
ing the vehicle. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
▷ Disconnected battery voltage. and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard ▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key
Diagnosis. three times in succession.
▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con‐
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
nected to the socket for the OBD Onboard-
Diagnosis.
The alarm system signals these changes visually
and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
alarm may be suppressed.
▷ Visual alarm:
By flashing of the hazard warning system and
headlights, where required.
106
Indicator light on the interior Avoiding unintentional alarms

mirror
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds: ▷ With animals in the vehicle.
The alarm system is switched on. ▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐
ing.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off in such situations.
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access
points are secured. and interior motion sensor
When the still open access points are closed, Press the button on the vehicle key within
the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐ 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
sor will be switched on. locked.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking: The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
til drive-ready state is switched on, but no
longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered. Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
Tilt alarm sensor ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key
and activate the drive-ready state via emer‐
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
gency detection of the vehicle key.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
Malfunction, refer to page 81.
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is
towed. ▷ With Comfort Access: when carrying the ve‐
hicle key, grasp the driver's door or front pas‐
Interior motion sensor senger door handle completely.
The windows and the glass sunroof must be

closed for the system to function properly.
107
Power windows Functional requirements

The windows can be operated under the follow‐
ing conditions.
General information
The windows can be opened with the vehicle
key from the outside as well as closed with Com‐ ▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
fort Access. The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
With Comfort Access: The windows can be
closed from the outside via Comfort Access. Opening
When a window is often opened in the same po‐ ▷ Press the switch to the resistance
sition, this task can be performed by the BMW point.
Intelligent Personal Assistant. For instance when The window opens while the switch is being
the same parking garage is frequently used. held.
Additional information: ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
Vehicle key, refer to page 78. ance point.
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to The window opens automatically. Pressing
page 52. the switch again stops the motion.
Safety information Closing

▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
Warning point.
When operating the windows, body parts and The window closes while the switch is being
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury held.
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resist‐
the area of movement of the windows is clear ance point.
during opening and closing. The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.
Overview
Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door frame
and window while a window is being closed.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing action is in‐
Power windows terrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety switch
108
Safety information ▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows us‐

ing the switches in the rear.
Warning
Switching on/off
Accessories on the windows such as antennas
can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐ Press the button.
jury. Do not install accessories in the area of The LED lights up if the safety function
movement of the windows. is switched on.
Closing without the jam protection Roller sunblinds, rear side

system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
windows
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
Safety information
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there. Warning
The window closes with limited jam protec‐ With closed roller sunblinds and open windows,
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific the roller sunblinds may be strained while driv‐
threshold, closing is interrupted. ing due to the wind. The roller sunblinds may
be damaged and vehicle occupants may be
2. Pull the switch past the resistance harmed. There is a risk of injury. Do not open
point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold the windows while driving if the roller sunblinds
it there. are closed.
The window closes without jam protection.
Pull out the roller sunblind at the strap and hook
Safety switch it onto the bracket.
Concept
With the safety switch, it is possible to block par‐
Glass sunroof
ticular functions in the rear. This makes sense,
for instance if children or animals are carried in General information
the rear. The glass sunroof and the sun protection are op‐
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil‐ erated using the same switch.
dren, for instance from opening and closing the The glass sunroof can be opened from the out‐
rear windows using the switches in the rear. side with the vehicle key and also closed with
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the Comfort Access.
safety function is switched off automatically. With Comfort Access: The glass sunroof can be
closed from the outside via Comfort Access.
General information
The following functions can be locked by press‐
ing the safety switch:
▷ Seat adjustments in the rear.
109
Safety information ▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes.
Warning Opening/closing the glass

Body parts can be jammed when operating the sunroof and sun protection
glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make separately
sure that the area of movement of the glass
▷ Slide switch back to the resist‐
sunroof is clear during opening and closing.
ance point and hold.
Holding down the switch
Overview opens the sun protection. If
the sun protection is already
fully open, the glass sunroof
opens.
▷ Slide switch forward to the resistance point
and hold.
The glass sunroof closes while the switch is
being held. If the glass sunroof is already
closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro‐
tection closes.
▷ Slide the switch back past the resistance
Opening/closing the glass sun‐
point.
roof.
The sun protection opens automatically. If the
sun protection is already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Functional requirements ▷ Push the switch forward past the resistance
The glass sunroof and the sun protection can be point.
operated under the following conditions. The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the
▷ Standby state is switched on. glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on. position, the sun protection closes automati‐
cally.
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward. Opening/closing the glass
▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts
sunroof and sun protection
and the sun protection opens together
slightly. ▷ Briefly press out the switch
▷ The opened glass sunroof twice in succession toward
closes until it is in the tilted the rear past the resistance
position. The sun protection point.
does not move.
110
The glass sunroof and sun

protection are opening to‐
gether.
Pressing the switch again
stops the motion.
▷ Briefly press out the switch twice in succes‐ 1. Close all doors.
sion toward the front past the resistance 2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point. point and hold.
The glass sunroof and sun protection are The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
closing together. protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
Pressing the switch again stops the motion. cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
3. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐
ance point and hold until the glass sunroof
Comfort position closes without jam protection. Make sure that
In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐ the closing area is clear.
terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐ Closing from the lifted position
tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to without jam protection
this comfort position.
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐ prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
roof fully.
Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body 1. Close all doors.
parts from becoming jammed between the roof
2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
and glass sunroof while the glass sunroof is clos‐
point and hold.
ing.
General information Initializing after a power

interruption
If a resistance or blockage is detected while the
glass sunroof is closing, the closing operation is
interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open
General information
position, or it is stopped when closing from the After a power failure during the opening or clos‐
tilted position. ing process, the glass sunroof can only be oper‐
ated to a limited extent. Initializing the system
Closing from the open position can help in this case.
without jam protection The system can be initialized under the following
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might conditions:
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows: ▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ The drive-ready state is established.
111
▷ The external temperature is above

41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing the system

Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is complete:
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.

▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof
and sun protection have opened then closed
again.
112
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐
It also describes features and functions that are trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
to the selected options or country versions. This the vehicle is stationary.
Warning
served.
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be en‐
Sitting safely sured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety
belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting
the occupants can make a vital contribution to the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
relaxed, fatigue-free driving. most upright position as possible and do not
adjust again while driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat posi‐
tion plays an important role. Follow the informa‐
tion in the following chapters.
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
▷ Seats, refer to page 113.
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 119. to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 121. ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 184.
Seats, front
General information
The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is
stored for the driver profile currently used. When
a driver profile is selected, the stored position is
called up automatically.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function.
113
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Overview Seat tilt
1 Backrest width Move switch up or down.

2 Thigh support
3 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt Backrest tilt
4 Upper backrest
5 Backrest tilt, head restraint
6 Lumbar support
Forward/backward
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Multifunctional seat
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push the switch in the front or back.
114
Sport seat To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,

the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Adjusting
▷ Press the front section of the
button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push
The backrest width increases.
the thigh support forward or back.
Upper backrest
Lumbar support
Concept
Concept
The upper backrest supports the back in the
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
shoulder area. A correct setting leads to a re‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region
laxed seating position and reduces strain on the
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are
shoulder muscles.
supported for upright posture.
General information
Adjusting
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
▷ Press the front/rear section of ready state is switched off, the upper backrest
the button: moves into the standard position.
The curvature is increased/
decreased. Adjusting
▷ Press the upper/lower section
of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Concept
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral ▷ Press the front section of the button:
support when taking corners.
The upper backrest is inclined forward.
General information ▷ Press the rear section of the button:
The backrest width is changed by adjusting the The upper backrest is inclined backward.
side sections of the backrest.
115
Front passenger seat Rear seats

functionality
Second row of seats
Concept
The front passenger seat can be adjusted with General information
the switches of the driver's seat, for instance to
The seats of the second row of seats can be ad‐
increase the legroom in the rear.
justed forward and backward including the back‐
If needed, the memory position for the front pas‐ rest tilt.
senger seat can be stored.
The backrest tilt for the center section is ad‐
justed together with the left rear seat backrest.
Overview
Safety information
Warning
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Front passenger seat functionality
Warning
Switching on There is a risk of jamming when folding down
the center armrest in the rear. There is a risk of
1. Press the button. The LED lights up. injury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the center armrest is clear during folding down.
2. Adjust the front passenger seat on the driv‐
er's seat.
3. If needed, store the memory position for the
front passenger seat. Warning
When folding back the second row of seats,
Switching off there is a danger of jamming. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
Press the button. The LED goes out. that the area of movement of the second row of
The function deactivates itself automati‐ seats is clear prior to folding down.
cally after some time.
Warning
Seats in the second row of seats are not locked
when they are folded down and they can move.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only fold the seats in the second row
down while loading. When driving without a
116
load, fold back and lock the seats in the second Forward/backward
row before driving away.
Overview
Push switch forward or backward.
Backrest tilt
1 Resetting to standard position
2 Forward/backward
3 Backrest tilt
Resetting to standard position
Move switch forward or backward.
Access to the third row of seats
Safety information
Press the button to reset to standard position.

Warning
The process is canceled if the button is pressed
again. If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior;
for instance, in the event of an accident, braking
or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked
after folding it back.
Fold down rear seat backrest

1. Fold middle section of the second seat row
up as necessary.
117
2. Push the switch once forward or backward. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked
1. Fold up and engage the backrest.
The seat automatically moves to the respective

end position.
To avoid a collision, the position of the front
seats may be adjusted automatically. 2. Adjust the head restraint correctly as needed.
If the second row of seats is not locked, an
acoustic signal will sound and a warning symbol
Fold down rear seat backrest
will be displayed in the instrument cluster. 1. Move the head restraints down, refer to
page 122.
Third row of seats 2. Slide the lever forward to unlock the backrest.
General information
The third row of seats consists of two divided
seats.
Fold up the backrest
Safety information
Warning 3. Fold the backrest down.

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior; Exiting from the third row of seats
The second row of seats can be folded down

with the switch.
118
Additional information: This locks various functions so that they cannot

Access to the third row of seats, refer to be operated from the rear.
page 117 Additional information:
Safety switch, refer to page 109.
Emergency unlocking rear seat
backrest
Safety belts
General information
The two outer backrests of the second seat row Number of safety belts and
can be folded down manually, such as in the
safety belt buckles
event of an electrical fault.
The vehicle is fitted with five or seven safety
Unlocking from the second seat row belts to ensure occupant safety. However, they
can only offer protection when adjusted cor‐
rectly.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the second
row of seats are intended for the persons sitting
on the left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the second row
of seats is intended for the person sitting in the
middle.
Pull the loop and fold the rear seat backrest for‐
General information
ward. Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐
Unlocking from the third seat row
tional safety device. The airbags are not a substi‐
tute for safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of every build
if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
Warning
Pull the loop and fold the rear seat backrest for‐ Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
ward. person will potentially defeat the ability of the
safety belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
Safety switch for the rear not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
Press the button on the driver's door. gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
119
ported and secured in designated child Correct use of safety belts

restraint systems.
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
Warning
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety your stomach.
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
fragile objects.
stance in the event of an accident, braking or
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or ▷ Avoid thick clothing.
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are ▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward
wearing safety belts correctly. around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt

Warning 1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐ and hip to put it on.
tective function of the middle safety belt is not 2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage
to life. If you are using the middle safety belt, audibly.
lock the wider rear seat backrest.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the
following situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way. To ease accessibility to the safety belt buckle, an
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
modified. position the buckle when not in use.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐ passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, ened once after driving away.
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have Unbuckling the safety belt
the safety belts checked after an accident at 1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
the dealer’s service center or another qualified
2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle.
service center or repair shop.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
120
Safety belt reminder for driver's Front head restraints

seat and front passenger seat
General information
Display in the instrument cluster
The current head restraint position can be stored
The indicator light lights up and a signal using the memory function.
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
are positioned correctly. The safety belt
Safety information
reminder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Warning
Safety belt reminder for rear A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
seats cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
General information
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
The safety belt reminder is automatically acti‐ restraints on the occupied seats.
vated each time the engine starts.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
The safety belt reminder is also activated when a ports the back of the head at as close to
passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt dur‐ eye level as possible.
ing the trip.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu‐ backrest tilt as needed.
minates after the engine is started.
Symbol Description
Warning
Green: the safety belt is buckled on
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
the corresponding rear seat.
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
Red: the safety belt is not buckled on
moving the head restraint.
the corresponding rear seat.
Safety mode Warning

In critical situations, for instance during an emer‐ Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
gency stop, the front safety belts tighten auto‐ tective effect in the head and neck area. There
matically. is a risk of injury.
If the situation passes without an accident occur‐ ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
ring, the belt tension relaxes. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically, hangers, directly on the head restraint.
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐ ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
ing the red button in the safety belt buckle. Fas‐ termined to be safe for attachment to a
ten the safety belt before continuing on your trip. head restraint.
121
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance Adjusting the side extensions
pillows, while driving.
Active head restraint

In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
severity, the active head restraint automatically
reduces the distance from the head.
Have the active head restraint checked and if
necessary replaced in the case of damage or if it
was exposed to an accident.
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint
forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐
Adjusting the height
ing position.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints

Safety information
Warning
Adjusting distance A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐ straint is as close as possible to the back
straint toward the rear. of the head. Adjust the distance via the
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the backrest tilt as needed.
front.
After setting the distance, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
122
Adjusting the height

Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push
is a risk of injury. the head restraint down.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes After setting the height, make sure that the head
hangers, directly on the head restraint. restraint engages correctly.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
Removing
head restraint.
The head restraints cannot be removed.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Cushions for head restraints in
the rear
Folding down the head restraints Only use the pillow when the vehicle is switched
To improve the view to the rear, the outside head off.
restraints can be folded back. Only fold the head
restraint back if no one will be sitting in the corre‐ 1. Bring the head restraint to a sufficiently high
sponding seat. position.
2. Attach the pillow and place the pillow band
around the back of the head restraint, ar‐
row 1.
▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and

fold the head restraint backward.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the 3. Close pushbuttons, arrow 2.
head restraint engages correctly.
123
Exterior mirrors Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror:
General information Slide the switch.
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror. Malfunction
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
currently in use. When a driver profile is selected, mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.
the stored position is called up automatically.
The current exterior mirror position can be stored Folding in and out
using the memory function.
Safety information NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a
Warning risk of damage to property. Before washing,
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
they appear. The distance to the traffic behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance Press the button.
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.
by looking over your shoulder.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐
Overview lowing situations:
▷ In car washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as
needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor Automatic dimming feature
3 Folding in and out The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mir‐
ror are used to control this.
Adjusting electrically
Press the button.
The selected mirror moves along with the
button movement.
124
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior Functional requirements

mirror ▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
Concept mirror and the windshield.
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-ly‐ Steering wheel
ing obstacles when parking, for instance.
Safety information
Activating
1. slide the switch to the driver's side Warning

mirror position. Steering wheel adjustments while driving can
2. Engage selector lever position R. lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
When the trailer socket is in use or trailer towing
accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the
is activated, the Automatic Curb Monitor is deac‐
vehicle is stationary only.
tivated.
Deactivating Electric steering wheel

Slide the switch to the passenger's side mirror adjustment
position.
General information
Interior mirror The steering wheel setting is stored for the driver
profile currently in use. When a driver profile is
selected, the position is accessed automatically
General information when the drive-ready state is switched on.
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically. The current steering wheel position can be
Photocells are used for control: stored using the memory function.
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Adjusting
Overview
Press the switch to adjust the forward/back posi‐

tion and height of the steering wheel to the seat
position.
125
Assistance getting in and out The following settings are not stored:
The steering wheel temporarily moves into the ▷ Backrest width.
highest position to make it easier to enter and ▷ Lumbar support.
exit the vehicle.
Safety information
Heated steering wheel
Overview Warning
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is stationary.
Warning
Button for heated steering wheel seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
Switching on/off ment.
Press the button.
A Check Control message is displayed. Overview
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes
after an intermediate stop, the heated steering
wheel activates automatically if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ The memory buttons are located on the front
essary, retrieved using the memory function: doors.
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position. Storing
▷ Steering wheel position. 1. Set the desired position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
2. Press the button. The writing on the
button lights up.
General information
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is
Two memory locations with different settings
lit. A signal sounds.
can be set for each driver profile.
126
Calling up settings Switching on

Press the desired button 1 or 2. Press the button once for each intensity
The stored position is called up. level.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting The maximum intensity level is reached when
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐ three LEDs are lit.
tons is pressed again.
Once underway, adjustment of the seat position Switching off
on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs go out.
Massage function
Adjusting the massage program
Concept 1. "CAR"
Depending on the program, the massage func‐ 2. "Settings"
tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood
3. "Seat comfort"
circulation and can avoid fatigue.
4. Select desired seat.
General information 5. "Seat massage"
Eight different massage programs can be se‐ 6. Select the desired setting.
lected:
▷ Pelvis activation.
Seat and armrest heating
▷ Upper body activation.
▷ Full body activation.
Concept
▷ Back massage.
The system heats seats and armrests as
▷ Shoulder massage. needed.
▷ Lumbar massage.
▷ Upper body training. General information
▷ Full body training. Seat heating can also be used without armrest
heating. Deactivate the armrest heating as
Overview needed.
Massage function
127
Overview If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes

after a stop, functions are activated automatically
Front with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO is activated, the heating output
is reduced.
ECO PRO, refer to page 343.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Seat and armrest heating

Seat heating distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and the
Rear seat backrest can be distributed in different
ways.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select desired seat.
6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the seat
heating distribution.
Seat heating
Switching armrest heating on/off
1. "CAR"
Switching on
2. "Settings"
1. Press the button. 3. "Climate control"
2. Select the temperature level: 4. "Seat and armrest heating"
▷ Press the button once for each level. 5. Select desired seat.
▷ Turn the Controller until the desired level 6. "Heat armrests with seat"
is reached. Press the Controller.
▷ Select the desired level on the touch‐
screen.
Active seat ventilation
Highest level reached when three red LEDs
light up on the button or three red bars are Concept
shown on the Control Display. Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas
provide a comfortable seat temperature.
128
Overview When both systems are active, a push of the but‐

ton reduces the intensity of both functions by
one level each.
The last active function or function that is config‐
ured with higher intensity will be activated di‐
rectly when the system is switched on again.
When both functions with the same intensity
configuration are deactivated, the system will au‐
tomatically activate the seat heating.
Overview
Active seat ventilation
Switching on

2. Select the ventilation level:
▷ Press the button once for each level.
▷ Turn the Controller until the desired level
is reached. Press the Controller. Seat climate control
▷ Select the desired level on the touch‐
screen.
Highest level reached when three blue LEDs Switching on
light up on the button or three blue bars are
shown on the Control Display. 1. Press the button.
2. Select the desired setting via the touch‐
Switching off screen.
Press and hold the button, until the One red and one blue LED each will illumi‐
LEDs go out. nate.
Switching off
Seat climate control Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Concept
The seat climate control combines the functions
of the seat heating and active seat ventilation. Climate control rules
General information Concept
The seat heating and active seat ventilation are A number of heating and cooling functions can
operated with a common button on the climate be automatically activated depending on the ex‐
control panel. ternal temperature.
129
General information
The external temperature at which the functions
are to be automatically activated can be set via
iDrive.
Activation is performed if the external tempera‐
ture exceeds or falls below the set temperature
in the first few minutes after drive-ready state
has been switched on. A new alignment is car‐
ried out after the settings have been changed.
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing functions can be automatically activated:
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Heated steering wheel.
▷ Seat ventilation.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
after a stop, the functions are activated automati‐
cally with the levels that were last selected.
▷ The safety belt of the driver's seat is buckled.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Climate control rules"
5. Select the desired functions.
6. Activate the desired rule.
7. Set the level.
130
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and
Warning
options A heated vehicle may result in death to per‐
sons, especially children, or animals. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not leave
persons, especially children, or animals unat‐
tended in the vehicle.
tems. When using these functions and systems, Warning
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
served. restraint systems and their components to be‐
come very hot. Persons may sustain burn inju‐
ries when touching the hot components. There
The right place for children is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child re‐
straint system to direct sunlight or cover where
necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint
Safety information
system cool down before transporting a child.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Warning
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger Transport children in the rear
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the seat
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. General information
▷ Releasing the parking brake. Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
dows. Children younger than 13 years of age or shorter
than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported in the
rear seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐
▷ Using vehicle equipment. signed for the age, weight and size of the child.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ system can no longer be used due to their age,
ing and lock the vehicle. weight, or size.
131
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Safety information Installing child restraint

systems
Warning
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
General information
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐ Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐
cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can ating and safety information of the child restraint
be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐ system manufacturer when selecting, installing,
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety and using child restraint systems.
belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in
the event of an accident, braking or evasive Safety information
maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
Warning
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
The protective effect of child restraint systems
and their fastening systems which have been
Children on the front passenger damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐
ited or lost. A child cannot be properly re‐
seat
strained in the event of an accident, braking or
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
General information
danger to life.
Before using a child restraint system on the front
Do not use child restraint systems which have
passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and
been damaged or exposed to an accident.
side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐
activated. If a child restraint system and its fastening sys‐
tem has been damaged or exposed to an acci‐
dent, have these systems checked and re‐
For automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐ placed by the dealer's service center or another
ger airbags, refer to page 187. qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
Warning The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
child in a child restraint system when the air‐ ment or improper installation of the child seat.
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐ sure that the child restraint system fits securely
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
132
Before mounting Seat position and height

Before mounting child restraint systems, ensure Before installing a child restraint system, move
that the rear seat backrests are locked. the front passenger seat as far back as it will go
Move the rear seats into the rearmost position to and, if possible, bring it up to the highest posi‐
facilitate assembly of the child restraint system. tion. This seat position and height ensure the
best possible position for the belt and offers opti‐
mal protection in the event of an accident.
Third row of seats
If the upper anchor of the safety belt is located in
Before installing a child restraint system in the
front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the
third row of seats, note the following:
front passenger seat carefully forward until the
▷ Roll up the cargo cover and remove the case. best possible belt guide position is reached.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: lower
the electric cargo cover. Backrest width
▷ Remove the cargo area partition net. Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
▷ Bring seats and backrests of the second row child restraint system in the front passenger seat,
of seats into the most forward position. open the backrest width completely. Do not
change the backrest width again and do not call
▷ Fold down the respective backrest of the
up a memory position.
second row of seats and lock.
▷ Raise the head restraints of the third row of
Child seat security
seats into the highest position.
Do not change the settings that have been made
after this.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a The safety belts in the rear and the front passen‐
child in a child restraint system when the air‐ ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury. ten child restraint systems.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
Locking the safety belt
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
Before installing a child restraint system in the 2. Secure the child restraint system with the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front, safety belt.
knee and side airbags on the front passenger 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it
side are deactivated. tight against the child restraint system. The
Additional information: safety belt is locked.
For automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 187.
133
Unlocking the safety belt Position

1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
Symbol Meaning
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐ The corresponding symbol
pletely. shows the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
LATCH child restraint fixing chors are marked with a pair, (2),
system of LATCH symbols.
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
General information
It is not recommended to use
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
the inner lower anchors of
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐ standard outer LATCH positions
ating and safety information from the child re‐ to fasten a child restraint system
straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐ on the middle seat. Use the ve‐
stalling, and using LATCH child restraint fixing hicle safety belt instead for the
systems. middle seat.
Mounts for the lower LATCH Before installing LATCH child

anchors restraint fixing systems
General information Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is
Assembly of LATCH child
restrained by the internal harnesses. restraint fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐
Safety information er's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
Warning erly engaged.
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are

not correctly engaged, the protective effect of
the LATCH child restraint fixing system is lim‐
ited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the lower anchors are securely
engaged and that the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system fits securely against the backrest.
134
Child restraint systems Anchors

with tether strap Symbol Meaning
The respective symbol shows

Safety information the anchor for the upper retain‐
ing strap. Seats with an upper
Warning top tether are marked with this
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used symbol. It can be found on the
for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐ rear seat backrest or the rear
fect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make window shelf.
sure that the upper retaining strap does not run
over sharp edges and is not twisted as it Routing the retaining strap
passes the upper anchor.
Warning
If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective
effect of the child restraint system is limited or
there is none. In certain situations, for instance
braking maneuvers or in case of an accident,
the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that 1 Direction of travel
the rear backrests are locked.
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
NOTICE 4 Anchor
The anchors for the upper retaining straps of 5 Seat backrest
child restraint systems are only provided for 6 Upper retaining strap
these retaining straps. When other objects are
mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount Attaching the upper retaining
child restraint systems to the upper anchors. strap to the anchor
1. Bring the seat of the second seat row into the
base position.
Reset to standard position, refer to page 117.
2. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between or
along both sides of the supports for the head
restraint to the anchor.
Middle seat: raise the head restraint, if
needed, press the button on the mounts for
this purpose. Guide the upper retaining strap
135
between or along both sides of the supports

of the head restraint to the anchor.
4. If there is a retaining strap, run it between the
backrest and the cargo cover.
5. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
anchor.
6. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
7. Lower and engage head restraint as needed.
Locking the doors and

windows in the rear
General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to secure
the rear doors and windows, for instance when
transporting children.
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside

only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's door.
This locks various functions so that they cannot

be operated from the rear.
Safety switch, refer to page 109.
136
Driving CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle features and Auto Start/Stop function
options
Concept
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
cific and optional features offered with the series. The system switches off the engine during a
It also describes features and functions that are stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traffic
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
to the selected options or country versions. This The engine starts automatically for driving off.
In vehicles with Mild-Hybrid technology, the en‐
gine will already switched off while coasting at
low speeds.
served.
Engine-Off Coasting, refer to page 345.
Start/Stop button
General information
Concept After each engine start using the Start/Stop but‐
ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. The
Pressing the Start/Stop button
function is activated from speeds of approx.
switches drive-ready state on or
3 mph/5 km/h.
off.
Depending on the selected driving mode, the
Drive-ready state is switched on
system is automatically activated or deactivated.
when you depress the brake
pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
Engine stop
the drive-ready state back off and standby state
is switched back on. Functional requirements
Additional information: Steptronic transmission

▷ Drive-ready state, refer to page 38. The engine is switched off automatically during a
stop under the following conditions:
▷ Standby state, refer to page 38.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
Driving away D.
1. Switch on drive-ready state. ▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by
2. Apply gear position.
Automatic Hold.
3. Release the parking brake.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐
4. Drive away. er's door is closed.
137
CONTROLS Driving
Manual engine stop Functional limitations

If the engine was not switched off automatically The engine is not switched off automatically in
when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be the following situations:
switched off manually: ▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ Press the brake pedal forcefully again from ▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough.
the current pedal position.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
▷ Engage selector lever position P. matic climate control is running.
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the ▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or
engine switches off. cooled to the required level.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
Air conditioner when the engine is when the automatic climate control is
switched off switched on.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced ▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐
when the engine is switched off. perature.
▷ Engine cooling is required.
Displays in the instrument cluster
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐
General information ing wheel is being turned.
The display in the tachometer in‐ ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.

dicates that the Auto Start/Stop ▷ At higher elevations.
function is ready for an Automatic ▷ Hood is unlocked.
engine start.
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
The display indicates that the
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met. ▷ Selector lever position in N or R.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Total time with switched-off engine

Starting the engine
ECO PRO drive mode: depending
on the vehicle equipment, the to‐ Functional requirements
tal time that the engine has been
switched off using the Auto Start/ Steptronic transmission
Stop function is displayed on an
The engine starts automatically under the follow‐
automatic engine stop.
ing preconditions:
The total time can be reset via the trip data.
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
Additional information: ▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
ECO PRO, refer to page 343. the accelerator pedal.
Driving off
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
138
Driving CONTROLS
Safety mode For instance, this applies to the following situa‐

After the engine switches off automatically, it will tions:
not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐ ▷ When a situation is detected in which the
lowing conditions are met: stopping time is expected to be very short,
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the the engine is not switched off automatically.
driver's door is open. A message appears on the Control Display,
depending on the situation.
▷ Hood was unlocked.
▷ When a situation is detected in which the ve‐
Some indicator lights light up for a varied length hicle needs to drive off immediately, the en‐
of time. gine is started automatically.
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop The function may be restricted if the navigation
button. data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ample.
System limits
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ Without Mild Hybrid technology:
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐ deactivate/activate the system
lowing situations:
manually
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when
the air conditioning is switched on. Concept
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when The engine is not automatically switched off.
the heating is switched on.
The engine is started during an automatic engine
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation stop.
when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
Using the button
▷ When the steering wheel is turned.
▷ Change from selector lever position D to N or
R.
▷ Change from selector lever position P to N,
D, or R.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Start of an oil level measurement.
Without Mild-Hybrid technology:

additional functions Auto Start/ Press the button.
Stop
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ Via selector lever position or Driving
try-specific version, the vehicle features a variety
Dynamics Control
of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The
Auto Start/Stop function uses this information to The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated
adapt to various traffic situations in a proactive in selector lever position M/S or in SPORT driv‐
manner. ing mode of the Driving Dynamics Control.
139
CONTROLS Driving
Display Driving Dynamics Control

▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
Concept
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the
tivated.
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle.
Switching off the vehicle during The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the
situation using various driving modes.
an automatic engine stop
General information
General information
The following systems are affected, for instance:
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can
be switched off permanently, for instance when ▷ Engine characteristics.
leaving it. ▷ Steptronic transmission.
▷ Steering.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
▷ Adaptive M chassis.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Adaptive M Chassis Professional.
▷ Two-axle ride level control.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
matically.
▷ Cruise control.
2. Set the parking brake.
Automatic deactivation Overview
General information
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons,
for instance if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control
message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's
Displays in the instrument
service center or another qualified service center cluster
or repair shop. The selected drive mode is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
140
Driving CONTROLS
Driving modes Switching on
Buttons in the vehicle Press the button repeatedly until

SPORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
Button Driving Configura‐
mode tion Concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the SPORT
SPORT SPORT INDIVIDUAL
INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
SPORT SPORT
PLUS Configuration
COMFORT COMFORT 1. "CAR"

2. "Settings"
ECO PRO ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
3. "Driving mode"
ADAPTIVE ADAPTIVE 4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
COMFORT drive mode is selected automatically. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Driving modes in detail Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐
tings:
COMFORT "Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
Concept SPORT PLUS

Balanced tuning between dynamic and efficient
driving. Concept
Dynamic tuning for maximum agility with an ad‐
Switching on justed drive.
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
Switching on
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster. Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
SPORT
Concept ECO PRO

Dynamic tuning for higher agility with an opti‐
mized chassis and suspension. Concept
Efficient driving setting.
141
CONTROLS Driving
Switching on configuration is activated directly when the driv‐

ing mode is called up again.
Press the button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. Activating configuration of the
driving mode
Press the button for the desired driving mode
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL several times.
Concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO Parking brake
PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Configuration
Concept
1. "CAR" The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driving mode" Safety information
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting. Warning
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
rently used. possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
settings: ing.
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD". In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
ADAPTIVE ▷ Set the parking brake.
Concept
Comfort-oriented driving mode, whose tuning is curb.
automatically modified to the driving situation
and driving style.
If the navigation system is active, upcoming road wheel chock.
sections are considered.
Switching on Warning
Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐ Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
played in the instrument cluster. can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
following actions:
INDIVIDUAL configuration
General information ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
The individual configuration of the driving mode ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
is stored for the active driver profile. The last set dows.
142
Driving CONTROLS
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. A Check Control message is displayed.

The parking brake is engaged when the vehicle
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not is stationary.
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ With Emergency Stop Assistant
Pull the switch briefly to activate the emer‐
gency stop function.
Overview Additional information:
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 218.
Releasing
Releasing manually
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Press the switch while stepping on the

brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
Parking brake
The parking brake is released.
Setting
Automatic release
With a stationary vehicle The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive away.
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ Automatic Hold

ter illuminates red. The parking brake is
set. Concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
While driving
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
General information The vehicle is automatically held in place when it
is stationary.
To use as emergency brake while driving.
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle
from rolling backward when driving off.
brakes hard while the switch is being
pulled.
General information
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ Under the following conditions, the parking brake
ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and is automatically engaged:
the brake lights illuminate. ▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
143
CONTROLS Driving
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
is stationary. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
using the parking brake. ing and lock the vehicle.
Display
NOTICE
The indicator light changes from green
to red. If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐
gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐
cle from rolling in a car wash. There is a risk of
Safety information damage to property. Deactivate Automatic Hold
prior to entering the car wash.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and Overview
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Automatic Hold
wheel chock.
Establishing function readiness of
Automatic Hold
Warning
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger 2. Press the button.
The LED lights up.
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. The indicator light lights up green.
▷ Releasing the parking brake. Automatic Hold is functional.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ After every new vehicle start, the last se‐
dows. lected setting is active.

▷ Using vehicle equipment. Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Function readiness is established and the driv‐
er's door is closed.
144
Driving CONTROLS
After stepping on the brake pedal, for in‐ Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐
stance when stopping at a traffic light, stance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehi‐
the vehicle is automatically secured cle.
against rolling.
The indicator light lights up green. After a power failure
To reestablish parking brake functionality after a
Driving off power failure:
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off. 1. Switch on standby state.

The brake is released automatically and the indi‐
cator light of the parking brake is no longer illumi‐ 2. Pull the switch while stepping on the
nated. brake pedal or selector lever position P is set
and then push.
Activating the parking brake This process may take a few seconds. Some
automatically mechanical sounds associated with this process
are normal.
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is The indicator light is no longer illumi‐
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is nated as soon as the parking brake is
exited. ready for operation again.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
Turn signal
The parking brake is not set automatically, if the
drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐
cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
Turn signal in exterior mirror
vated. When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
Switching function readiness off the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on
the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Press the button.
The LED goes out. Using turn signals
The indicator light goes out.
Automatic Hold is switched off.

If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press additionally on the brake pedal, when
switching off.
Malfunction
Press the lever past the resistance point.
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure
the vehicle against rolling before exiting.
A Check Control message is displayed. Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
145
CONTROLS Driving
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted. Safety information

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Warning
3. "Exterior lighting" If the wipers start moving in the folded away
4. "One-touch turn signal" state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
5. Select the desired setting. of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
rently used. wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it
there for as long as you want the turn signal to NOTICE
flash. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
High beams, risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
headlight flasher shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

Switching on
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

Press the lever up until the desired position is
The high beams light up when the low beams
reached.
are switched on.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
Wiper system ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper system
General information switched on: when travel continues, the wipers
resume at their previous speed.
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them
to become worn more quickly.
146
Driving CONTROLS
Switching off and brief wipe Activating
Press the lever down. Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it tion, arrow 1.
reaches its standard position. Wiping is started.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
standard position. In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not
The lever automatically returns to its initial start.
position when released.
Deactivating
Rain sensor
Press the lever back into the standard position.
Concept
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror.
Safety information
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of
NOTICE the rain sensor.
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
147
CONTROLS Driving
Windshield washer system Rear window wiper
Safety information Overview
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐
tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
NOTICE
Switching on
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
Turn the outer switch upward.
wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not use the ▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
washer system when the washer fluid reservoir ▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
is empty. gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐
tinuous operation.
Cleaning the windshield Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward,
its idle position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further,
its interval position when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer fluid
reservoir level is low.
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
Fold-away position of the wipers
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Concept
Windshield washer nozzles The fold-away position enables the wipers to be
The windshield washer nozzles are automatically folded away from the windshield.
heated while standby state is switched on.
General information
Important, for instance when changing the wiper
blades or for folding away under frosty condi‐
tions.
148
Driving CONTROLS
Safety information 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
Folding down the wipers

NOTICE
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
system must be reactivated.
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐ shield.
shield prior to switching the wipers on. 2. Switch on standby state and press and hold
the wiper lever down again.
Folding away the wipers 3. Wipers return to their resting position and are
ready again for operation.
1. Switch on standby state.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the
wipers stop in a close to vertical position. Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐
sibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
ing, for instance with the parking brake.
149
CONTROLS Driving
Selector lever positions Engaging selector lever

positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐ General information
tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐ To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
tomatically. select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
R is reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when the Functional requirements
vehicle is stationary. Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to
Neutral N change from selector lever position P to another
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power, selector lever position.
for instance in vehicle washes in selector lever The selection lever position P cannot be
position N. changed until all technical requirements are met.
Parking position P Engaging selector lever position D,

N, R
General information
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty
Selector lever position, for instance for parking operation:
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the individ‐
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐
ual wheels in selector lever position P.
tion R.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐
vehicle is stationary.
sition P into another selector lever position.
P is engaged automatically 1. Fasten driver's safety belt.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ 2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐
cally in situations such as the following: lector lever lock.
▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and

selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐
gaged.
▷ After the standby state has been switched off
when selector lever position N is engaged.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal
is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary
and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐
gaged. 3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selec‐
tor lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle
may begin to move. Also set parking brake.
Parking brake, refer to page 142.
150
Driving CONTROLS
selector lever automatically returns to the In this way, standby state remains switched
center position when released. on, and a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
The vehicle can roll.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐

Engaging selector lever position P
cally after approximately 35 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Press button P. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐
ance point at the full throttle position.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle Sport program M/S

General information
Concept
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
The shifting points and shifting times in the
its own power for a short distance, for instance in
Sport program are designed for a sportier driving
a car wash, or be pushed.
style. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on
the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 143.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐
lector lever position N.
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
151
CONTROLS Driving
Activating the Sport program The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
cally in certain situations, for instance when
speed limits are reached.
Press the selector lever to the left from selector
lever position D. Steptronic Sport transmission:
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
cluster, for instance S1. manual mode
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ Depending on the motorization: if drive mode
vated. SPORT is selected, the Steptronic Sport trans‐
mission does not automatically upshift in M/
S manual mode once the maximum speed is
Ending the Sport program reached.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. down.
Manual mode M/S
SPORT, refer to page 141.
Concept
Ending the manual mode
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.
Activating manual mode D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
1. Press the selector lever to the left from selec‐

tor lever position D, arrow 1. Shift paddles
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
General information
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
road speeds.
backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
152
Driving CONTROLS
Short-term manual mode ▷ Downshifting to the lowest possible gear:

In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐ keep the left shift paddle pulled.
dle switches into manual mode temporarily. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
After conservative driving in manual mode with‐ strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles
for a certain amount of time, the transmission Displays in the instrument
switches back to automatic mode.
cluster
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
The selector lever position is dis‐
▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is
played, for example P.
displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull
the left shift paddle.
Continuous manual mode Electronic unlocking of the

In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐ transmission lock
dle switches into manual mode permanently.
With the transmission version it is possible to General information
switch into automatic mode: Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until S is maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
displayed in the instrument cluster. Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling
the left shift paddle. away.
In vehicles with Mild-Hybrid technology and cor‐
Steptronic Sport transmission responding vehicle battery, the action steps for
With the appropriate transmission version, the unlocking the transmission vary.
lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐ Additional information:
neously activating kickdown and operating the
Vehicle battery, refer to page 396.
left shift paddles. This is not possible in short-
term manual mode.
Without Mild-Hybrid technology:
Shifting engage selector lever position N
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the
engine.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must
audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop button
pressed.
3. With your free hand, press the button on the
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector
lever into selector lever position N and hold,
▷ Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle. arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
▷ Shifting down: pull left shift paddle. played in the instrument cluster.
153
CONTROLS Driving
A Check Control message is displayed. Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 404.
Launch Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
rounding conditions.
General information
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever. The use of Launch Control causes premature
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops. component wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own. Do not use Launch Control during the break-in
period.
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off
Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 404.
with Launch Control.
With Mild-Hybrid technology: Additional information:

engage selector lever position N Breaking-in period, refer to page 332.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the Start/Stop button.
Launch Control is available when the engine is at
3. With your free hand, press the button on the
operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector
ing temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at
lever into selector lever position N and hold,
least 6 miles/10 km.
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Start with launch control

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
3. Engage selector lever position S.
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever. 5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
5. Release the brake.
position, kickdown.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
A destination flag is displayed in the instru‐
and secure it against moving on its own.
ment cluster.
154
Driving CONTROLS
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait

briefly until the engine speed is constant.
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.
7. Release the brake within 3 seconds after the
destination flag illuminates.
The vehicle accelerates.
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the
destination flag is displayed and the accelera‐
tor pedal is not released.
Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding con‐
ditions, when used again.
After using Launch Control

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again as soon as possible.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
155
CONTROLS Displays
Displays
Vehicle features and Overview
options
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ 1 Fuel gauge 165
served. Range 168
2 Speedometer
Instrument cluster 3 Central display area 156
Navigation display
Concept 4 Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten‐
The instrument cluster is a variable display. tion Camera
When you change to a different program via Driv‐ 5 Tachometer 165
ing Dynamics Control, the displays in the instru‐ Selection lists 171
ment cluster adapt to the respective drive mode.
Widgets in the instrument cluster 158
General information Trip odometer, see Trip data 171
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be ECO PRO displays 343

possible to deactivate the display change in the Performance display 166
instrument cluster via iDrive. Status, Driving Dynamics Control 140
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster Transmission display 149
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
6 Engine temperature 167
Manual.
7 External temperature 167
8 Check Control 159
9 Speed Limit Assist 244
Speed Limit Info 169
Time 60
Central display area

Depending on the equipment and configuration,
the following is displayed in the central display
area of the instrument cluster:
156
Displays CONTROLS
▷ Navigation displays such as the map view or,

if destination guidance is active, a route pre‐
Assisted Driving View
view with destination guidance information.
▷ Displays showing service notifications.
Concept
▷ Assisted Driving View. Information about the Depending on the equipment, information about
assist systems is displayed in an animated the driver assistance systems is displayed in an
surrounding area of the vehicle. animated surrounding area of the vehicle when
driver assistance is active.
Some displays in the central display area can be
configured individually.
General information
The displays may vary depending on the equip‐
Depending on the settings, Assisted Driving
ment version and country variant.
View can be displayed permanently or tempora‐
rily with active driving assistance in the instru‐
Driving mode view ment cluster.
Concept Safety information

Depending on the equipment, if the drive mode
view is activated, the displays in the instrument
cluster will adapt to the respective drive mode Warning
when a program is changed via the Driving Dy‐ The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
namics Control. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Activating/deactivating Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
1. "CAR"
propriate.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Driving mode view" Settings
Adjusting Permanent display

Individual displays in the instrument cluster can 1. "CAR"
be configured individually. 2. "Settings"
1. "CAR" 3. "Displays"
2. "Settings" 4. "Instrument panel"
3. "Displays" 5. "Central display area"
4. "Instrument panel" 6. "Assisted Driving View"

Temporary display
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
157
CONTROLS Displays
4. "Instrument panel" Selecting

5. "Display Assisted Driving View when Driver
Assistance is active"
Display
Continue to press the button on the turn signal

lever until the desired widget is selected.
Display
Example: the indicator/warning lights for the Ac‐
tive Cruise Control with Stop & Go function ACC
and the Lane Change Assistant indicate a lane
change to the next lane. At the same time, the
lane change to the next lane is shown with ani‐
mation in the Assisted Driving View.
System limits
The system's detection potential is limited.
Only objects that are detected by the system are
taken into account. G-meter
The G-meter indicates the forces that are ap‐
Widgets plied in longitudinal and transverse direction on
the vehicle occupants while driving.
Concept Efficiency display

Displays for specific functions can be displayed
in the instrument cluster. Concept
The following displays can be selected: Information about driving style and consumption
▷ Current entertainment source, e.g., radio. can be displayed in the form of a consumption
▷ Torque and power. display as a widget in the instrument cluster, for
example.
▷ G-Meter.
▷ Trip data. General information
▷ Efficiency display. Depending on the activated driving mode, differ‐
ent information will be displayed:
158
Displays CONTROLS
Driving Display General information

mode A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and text
COMFORT Average consumption.
messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐
SPORT Current consumption. cable, in the Head-up Display.
Energy recovery. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
ECO PRO ECO PRO bonus range. text message may appear on the Control Display.
Distance traveled in Coasting
mode. Hiding Check Control messages
Current consumption.
Average consumption
The average consumption indicates the fuel con‐
sumption when driving a specific route.
Current consumption
The current consumption displays the current
consumption of fuel. Check whether you are cur‐ Press the button on the turn signal lever.
rently driving in an efficient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
Continuous display
Energy recovery Some Check Control messages are displayed
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of the continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
vehicle is converted into electric energy during function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐
coasting. The vehicle battery is partially charged cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐
and fuel consumption can be reduced. utively.
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
ECO PRO bonus range onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically.
In the ECO PRO driving mode, the yielded exten‐
sion of the range as a result of fuel-efficient driv‐
ing is displayed as ECO PRO bonus range. Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
Check Control Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
played again later.
Concept
Displaying stored Check Control
The Check Control system monitors functions in
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
messages
the monitored systems. 1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
159
CONTROLS Displays
Display General information

The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
Check Control ety of combinations and colors.
At least one Check Control message is Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
displayed or stored. tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready
SMS text messages

Red lights
SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Safety belt reminder
Control message and the meaning of the indica‐
tor/warning lights. Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:
safety belt on the driver or passenger
Supplementary SMS text messages side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are placed
Additional information, such as the reason for an
on the front passenger seat.
error or malfunction or the required action, can
be called up via Check Control. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐ Safety belt reminder for rear seats
ther help can be selected. The safety belt is not buckled on the cor‐
1. "CAR" responding rear seat.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control" Airbag system
4. Select the desired text message. Airbag system and belt tensioner may
5. Select the desired setting. not be working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
Messages after trip completion by a dealer's service center or another qualified
Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐
played again after drive-ready state is switched
off. Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Indicator/warning lights
Concept For releasing the parking brake, refer to
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster page 143.
display the status of some functions in the vehi‐
cle and indicate when a malfunction is present in Brake system
the monitored systems.
160
Displays CONTROLS
Braking system impaired. Continue to Person warning with City braking function, refer
drive moderately. to page 200.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer's service center or another qualified Night Vision with pedestrian and
service center or repair shop. animal detection
An infrared camera scans the area in
Front collision mitigation front of the vehicle and issues a warning
if it detects pedestrians and animals on
The indicator light is illuminated: pre‐ the street.
warning. Brake and increase distance.
The indicator light is illuminated: pre‐
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic warning. Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if
signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and make an necessary.
evasive maneuver, if necessary.
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal
Additional information: sounds: acute warning. Immediate braking or
Front collision mitigation, refer to page 189. evading maneuver.
Intersection collision warning
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
The indicator light is illuminated: risk of tion, refer to page 203.
collision with crossing vehicle.
Active Cruise Control with Stop &
Indicator light is illuminated: risk of colli‐ Go function
sion with vehicle without detectable di‐
rection of travel or prewarning for vehi‐ Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
cles that cross own direction of travel. signal sounds: braking and evading.
Intervene yourself, for instance by braking. Additional information:

Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐
sounds: acute warning when vehicles cross own fer to page 235.
direction of travel.
Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if neces‐ Steering and traffic jam assistant
sary.
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
Additional information: signal sounds: the system will be
switched off.
Intersection collision warning, refer to page 195.
Person warning with City braking Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to
function page 245.
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
signal sounds: imminent collision with a
detected person or a cyclist.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
161
CONTROLS Displays
Yellow lights Additional information:

▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
Steering and traffic jam assistant page 225.
The indicator light lights up and an ▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control, refer to
acoustic signal may sound: a system in‐ page 227.
terruption is imminent.
The indicator warning light flashes: lane marking Flat Tire Monitor FTM
driven over. The FTM signals a loss of tire inflation
Additional information: pressure in a tire.
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
page 245. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Antilock Braking System ABS Run-flat tires, refer to page 374.
The Brake Assistant function may not
activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the Tire pressure monitor
longer braking distance into account. The indicator light illuminates: the Tire
Have the system immediately checked Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐
by a dealer's service center or another tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐
qualified service center or repair shop. formation in the Check Control message.
The indicator light flashes and is then illuminated
DSC Dynamic Stability Control continuously: flat tires or tire pressure losses
cannot be detected.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify with the same radio frequency: after leaving
your driving style to the driving circumstances. the area of the interference, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned. ▷ In the case of tires with special approval: the
tire pressure monitor was unable to complete
Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐ the reset. Reset the system again.
er's service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop. ▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
Additional information: ice center or another qualified service center
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to or repair shop as needed.
page 225. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is service center or repair shop.
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Additional information:
Traction Control is activated
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 367.
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
162
Displays CONTROLS
Steering system Parking lights

Steering system may not be working. Parking lights are switched on.
Have the system checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Parking lights/low beams, refer to page 177.
Emissions Low beams

▷ The warning light lights up: Low beams are switched on.
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ Additional information:
cumstances: Parking lights/low beams, refer to page 177.
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine. Lane departure warning
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ The indicator light lights up: the system
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious is activated. A lane marking was detected
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐ on at least one side of the vehicle and
ously damage emission control components, warnings can be issued.
in particular the catalytic converter.
Additional information: Lane departure warning, refer to page 206.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 394. Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on.
Green lights
Safety belt reminder for rear seats Additional information:

The safety belt is buckled on the corre‐ Front fog lights, refer to page 181.
sponding rear seat.
High-beam Assistant
Turn signal High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off au‐
Turn signal switched on.
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator uation.
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed. Additional information:
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 179.
Turn signal, refer to page 145.
163
CONTROLS Displays
Automatic Hold Indicator light illuminates: the detected

speed limit can be applied with the SET
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle
button. As soon as the speed limit has
is automatically held in place when it is
been applied, a green checkmark is displayed.
stationary.
Speed Limit Assist, refer to page 244.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 143.
Steering and traffic jam assistant

Speed Limiter
Indicator light lights up: the system sup‐
The indicator light lights up: the system
ports the driver in keeping the vehicle
is switched on.
within the lane.
The indicator light flashes: the set speed
limit has been exceeded. Additional information:
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to
page 245.
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 231.
Lane change assistant
Cruise control
Gray line for lane marking on the appro‐
Indicator light is illuminated: the system priate side: system detected a lane
is active. change request. Lane change not cur‐
rently possible.
Cruise control, refer to page 233. Arrow symbol for lane change green: the
system carries out a lane change.
Go function Arrow symbol for lane change gray: lane
change not possible; functional require‐
The indicator light lights up: the system ments not met.
is switched on.
Lane change assistant, refer to page 252.
Additional information: Extended Traffic Jam Assistant

Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐ Indicator light is illuminated: the system
fer to page 235. is active.
Speed Limit Assist Additional information:

Depending on the equipment, indicator Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 250.
light illuminates together with the symbol
for a cruise control system: Speed Limit
Assist is active and detected speed limits can be
applied manually for the displayed system.
164
Displays CONTROLS
Blue lights White lights
High beams Extended Traffic Jam Assistant

High beams are switched on. Indicator light is illuminated: the system
is ready.
Additional information: Additional information:

High beams, refer to page 146. Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 250.
Gray lights
Fuel gauge
Go function Concept
Indicator light is illuminated: the system The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.
is interrupted.
Indicator light flashes: the conditions are General information
not adequate for the system to work or the sys‐ Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
tem has been deactivated. vary.
Additional information: Additional information:
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐ Refueling, refer to page 348.
fer to page 235.
Display
Steering and traffic jam assistant An arrow beside the fuel pump
Indicator light is illuminated: the system symbol shows which side of the
is ready. vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
The current range is displayed as
Additional information: numerical value.
page 245.
Indicator light in the instrument
Extended Traffic Jam Assistant cluster
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
Indicator light is illuminated: the system
once the fuel reserve is reached.
is interrupted.
Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 250. Tachometer
General information
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
165
CONTROLS Displays
Activating/deactivating Display
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Engine display"
6. "Tachometer"
When the setting for the drive mode view is acti‐
vated, the activated tachometer is only shown in
the COMFORT or SPORT drive mode. Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐
ergy recovered by coasting or when decelerat‐
ing, CHARGE.
Power rating Pointer in the area of arrow 2: output in percent,
POWER.
Concept
The display indicates the performance POWER
as a percentage of its total power. In the Shift point indicator
CHARGE range, the energy recovery is displayed
when coasting or decelerating. Concept
The shift lights indicate the upshift point at which
General information the best possible acceleration can be achieved.
The available power may be reduced due to cer‐
tain factors, for instance a cold engine. Functional requirement
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: shift
Activating/deactivating lights are shown when the SPORT or SPORT
1. "CAR" PLUS driving program is activated.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays" Switching on/off
4. "Instrument panel" 1. Select SPORT or SPORT PLUS drive mode.
5. "Engine display" Press Driving Dynamics Control.
6. "Power meter" 2. Activate the M manual mode of the transmis‐
sion.
When the setting for the drive mode view is acti‐
vated, the activated power indicator is only
shown in the COMFORT drive mode.
166
Displays CONTROLS
Display Engine oil temperature

Display
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the mid‐
dle or in the lower half of the
Information about the driving temperature display.
style ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. In addition, a Check
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the
Control message is displayed.
tachometer.
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields Additional information:
indicate an increase in the speed. Coolant level, refer to page 391.
▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated fields
indicate the upcoming shift moment. Indicator light in the instrument
▷ Arrow 3: the field lights up red. Do not wait cluster
any further to shift.
A red indicator light is displayed.
When the maximum speed is reached, the entire
display flashes red and the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted in order to protect the engine.
External temperature
Standby state and drive-
ready state General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
The letters OFF in the tachome‐ signal sounds.
ter indicate that drive-ready state A Check Control message is displayed.
is switched off and standby state
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
is switched on.
Safety information
The letters READY in the tach‐
ometer indicate that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to Warning
start the engine automatically. Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
Additional information: bridges or shady sections of the road. There is
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to page 37. a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to
the weather conditions at low temperatures.
167
CONTROLS Displays
Range General information

After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐
ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
Concept
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
The range indicates the distance that can still be nance.
covered with the current fuel level.
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice notifications from your vehicle key.
General information
Some information on service notifications can
The estimated range available with the remaining also be shown on the BMW display key.
fuel is permanently displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Display
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic
Detailed information on service
driving style, for instance fast cornering, the en‐
notifications
gine function is not always ensured.
More information on the type of service required
The Check Control message appears continu‐
may be displayed on the Control Display.
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
1. "CAR"
Safety information 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service notification"
NOTICE Maintenance work and legally mandated in‐
With a driving range of less than spections are displayed.
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have 4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to Symbols
property. Refuel promptly.
Sym‐ Description
bols
Display
No service is currently required.
The current range is displayed as
numerical value next to the fuel
gauge.
The time for recommended mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
Service interval is exceeded.

Service notifications
Concept Entering appointment dates
The function displays the service notifications
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
spections.
168
Displays CONTROLS
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are

set correctly.
Speed Limit Info
1. "CAR" Speed Limit Info
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service notification" Concept
4. "Vehicle inspection" Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid speed
5. "Date:" limit in the instrument cluster and, if necessary,
the Head-up Display.
General information
Gear shift indicator The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐
tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well
as overhead sign posts.
Concept
Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered
The system recommends the most efficient gear and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
for the current driving situation. The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐
nored depending on the situation in the instru‐
General information ment cluster and the Head-up Display.
Depending on the design and country version, With the navigation system, the system takes
the gear shift indicator may be active in the M into account the information stored in the naviga‐
manual mode of the Steptronic transmission. tion data and also displays speed limits present
on routes without signs.
Steptronic transmission: Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐
displaying ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traffic
Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in signs with speed limitations are detected and
the instrument cluster. displayed only. Speed limitations due to entering
or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. are not dis‐
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐
played. Speed limits with extra text characters
gaged gear is displayed.
are always displayed.
Example Description Speed limits for trailer towing will be displayed
when the trailer power socket is occupied or
Efficient gear is set.
trailer towing was activated via iDrive.
Shift into efficient gear. Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
propriate.
169
CONTROLS Displays
Overview Depending on the equipment,

Speed Limit Info not available.
Camera
If the detected speed limit has been exceeded,

the indicator light will flash.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Settings

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror 1. "CAR"
clean and clear.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
Displaying Speed Limit Info 4. If necessary, "Driving"
General information 5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed 6. Select the desired setting:

Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instru‐ ▷ "Warn when speeding": activate/deacti‐
ment cluster or via iDrive. vate the flashing of the Speed Limit Info
display in the instrument cluster and,
Activating where applicable, the Head-up Display
when the currently valid speed limit is ex‐
1. "CAR"
ceeded. The warning that is issued when
2. "Settings" a speed limit is exceeded may depend on
3. "Driver Assistance" the Speed Limit Assist settings.
4. If necessary, "Driving" ▷ "Excess speed display": the speed limit
5. "Speed Limit Assistance" that is detected by the Speed Limit Info is
displayed with a marking in the speedom‐
6. "Speed limits"
eter in the instrument cluster.
7. "Show current limit"
System limits
Display The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
Speed Limit Info uations:
Current speed limit. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
Without a navigation system the ▷ When traffic signs are fully or partially con‐
traffic signals are grayed out after cealed by objects, stickers or paint.
curves or longer stretches of
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
roadway.
of you.
170
Displays CONTROLS
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong Display

reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid, Depending on the equipment version, the list in
outdated or not available. the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tration.
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such Displaying and using the list
as due to changes in road routing.
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs. Button Function
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic Change the entertainment
signs applied to them. source.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. Pressing the button again will
▷ When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel close the currently displayed
road are detected. list.
▷ In the presence of country-specific road signs Show list of most recent tele‐
and road configurations. phone calls.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
Turn the thumbwheel to select
after vehicle delivery.
the desired setting.
Press the thumbwheel to con‐
Selection lists firm the setting.
The currently selected list can
be displayed in the instrument
Concept
cluster by turning the thumb‐
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used for wheel.
certain functions in the instrument cluster or the
Head-up Display.
▷ Entertainment source. Trip data
▷ Current audio source.
▷ List of most recent telephone calls. Concept
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open Values for the trip, such as the average con‐
on the Control Display. sumption or trip miles, are displayed.
171
CONTROLS Displays
General information Selecting and setting widgets in the instrument

cluster.
The trip data can be displayed on the Control
Display and in the instrument cluster. Additional information:
The values can be displayed and reset depend‐ Widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to
ing on various intervals, such as after refueling. page 158.
Display on the Control Display Adjusting the display of the trip

data
Overview The intervals for the display of the trip data in the
The following information is displayed based on instrument cluster and on the Control Display are
the configured interval: adjustable.
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data. 1. "CAR"
▷ Average fuel consumption depending on the 2. "Driving information"
configured interval.
3. "Trip data"
▷ Average speed.
4. "Data since"
▷ Total time for shut off engine through the
Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ "Start of trip ( )": the values are automati‐
▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode.
cally reset approx. four hours after the ve‐
▷ Consumption history in form of a chart. hicle has come to a standstill.
▷ "Refueling ( )": the values are automati‐
Displays cally reset after refueling with a larger
1. "CAR" quantity of fuel.
2. "Driving information" ▷ "Factory": Average consumption
3. "Trip data" since delivery from the factory.
The values since the time of the factory
Consumption history delivery are displayed.
The average consumption is shown in the con‐ ▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last
sumption history in form of a chart based on the manual reset are displayed. The values
distance traveled and the driving mode. can be reset at any time.
Display in the instrument cluster Resetting average values

Depending on the equipment, information about manually
the route can be displayed as widget in the in‐ The following interval can be reset manually at
strument cluster. any time: "Individual ( )".
The following information is displayed:
▷ Total mileage.
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.
▷ Distance traveled depending on the config‐
ured interval.
▷ Average speed.
172
Displays CONTROLS
With the button on the turn signal lever: ▷ Torque.

1. Continue to press the button on the turn sig‐ ▷ Power.
nal lever until the widget for the trip data is
selected. Displays
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Sport displays"

The Sport displays can be displayed in form of
widgets in the instrument cluster.
The following widgets can be selected:
2. Press and hold the button on the turn signal ▷ Widget for torque and power.
lever. ▷ Widget for G meter.
Via iDrive: Additional information:
1. "CAR" Widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 158.
3. "Trip data"
4. "Data since" Vehicle status
5. "Reset individual"
The average values and counters are reset. General information
Once the average values and counters have The status can be displayed and actions per‐
been reset, the following interval is automatically formed for several systems.
set: "Individual ( )".
Opening the vehicle status
Sport displays 1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
Concept
Information at a glance
The Sport displays especially support a sporty
driving style.
Symbols Description
Display on the Control Display "Flat Tire Monitor": status of the

run-flat tires, refer to page 374.
Overview "Tire Pressure Monitor": status
The following information is displayed: of the Tire Pressure Monitor, re‐
▷ Boost pressure. fer to page 367.
▷ Engine oil temperature. "Engine oil level": electronic oil

▷ G-Meter. measurement, refer to
page 387.
173
CONTROLS Displays
Symbols Description Display

"Check Control": displaying
Overview
stored Check Control mes‐
sages, refer to page 159. The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
"Service notification": displaying
▷ Vehicle speed.
service notifications, refer to
page 168. ▷ Navigation instructions.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.
Head-up Display ▷ Driver assistance systems.
▷ Sport displays.
Concept Some of this information is only displayed briefly
This system projects important information into as needed.
the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed.
The driver can get information without averting Selecting displays in the Head-up
his or her eyes from the road. Display
1. "CAR"
General information 2. "Settings"
Follow the information on cleaning the Head-up 3. "Displays"
Display.
4. "Head-up display"
Overview 5. Select the desired setting.

rently used.
Setting the brightness

The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching on/off 3. "Displays"
1. "CAR" 4. "Head-up display"
2. "Settings" 5. "Brightness"
3. "Displays" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
4. "Head-up display" ness is set.
5. "Head-up display" 7. Press the Controller.

When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting.
174
Displays CONTROLS
Adjusting the height ▷ "Off": the Sport displays are not dis‐
1. "CAR" played in the Head-up Display.
2. "Settings" ▷ "In SPORT mode": the Sport displays

are only displayed in SPORT drive
3. "Displays" mode.
4. "Head-up display" ▷ "Always": the Sport displays are con‐
5. "Height" tinuously displayed in the Head-up
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is Display.
reached. ▷ "Reduced height": if not all of the informa‐
7. Press the Controller. tion is in the driver's field of vision, the in‐
formation can be displayed in the lower
section of the Head-up Display.
rently used.
The height of the Head-up Display can also be Visibility of the display
stored using the memory function.
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
Setting the rotation
▷ Seat position.
The Head-up Display view can be rotated.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.
1. "CAR"
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
2. "Settings"
▷ Wet roads.
3. "Displays"
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
4. "Head-up display"
If the image is distorted, have the basic settings
5. "Rotation" checked by a dealer’s service center or another
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is qualified service center or repair shop.
selected.
7. Press the Controller. Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
Additional settings The shape of the windshield makes it possible to
1. "CAR" display a precise image.
2. "Settings" A film in the windshield prevents double images
3. "Displays" from being generated.
4. "Head-up display" For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have
the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
▷ "Speed Limit Assistance": access the set‐ or repair shop, if necessary.
tings for the speed assistant.
▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set up if the
selection lists are displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster or the Head-up Display.
▷ "Sport displays": display tachometer and
Shift Lights in the Head-up Display.
175
CONTROLS Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and Symbol Function
options Parking lights.

cific and optional features offered with the series. Automatic headlight control.
It also describes features and functions that are Adaptive light functions.
to the selected options or country versions. This Low beams.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Instrument lighting.
served.
Right roadside parking light.

Lights and lighting
Left roadside parking light.
Switches in the vehicle
Automatic headlight
control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
The light switch element is located next to the
example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
steering wheel.
cipitation.
Symbol Function
General information
Front fog lights. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Night vision. If the low beams are switched on manually, the

automatic headlight control is deactivated.
Lights off. Activating

Daytime running lights. Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment.
176
Lights CONTROLS
The LED in the button lights up. Switching off

The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ter is illuminated when the low beams are ment or switch on the drive-ready state.
switched on.
After the drive-ready state is switched on, the
automatic headlight control will be activated.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve as Low beams
a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐
ing conditions. Switching on
For example, the sensors are unable to detect Press the button on the light switch ele‐
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch ment.
the lights on manually.
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state
is switched on.
Parking lights, low beams The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
and roadside parking lights ter lights up.
Press the button again to switch on the low

General information beams when the standby state is switched on.
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is Switching off
automatically switched off after a period of time.
Depending on the country variant, the low beams
can be switched off in the low speed range.
Parking lights
Press the button on the light switch ele‐
General information ment.
The parking lights can only be switched on in the
low speed range. Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside
Switching on parking light can be switched on.
Button Function
ment.
Right roadside parking light on.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
Left roadside parking light off.
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐ Switching off the roadside parking light:
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and
it would then be impossible to switch on drive- Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ready state. ment or switch on the drive-ready state.
177
CONTROLS Lights
Welcome lights Pathway lighting

General information General information
The exterior lighting is switched on automatically For the illumination of the vehicle’s surroundings
when approaching or unlocking the vehicle. De‐ after exiting the vehicle, the exterior lighting can
pending on the equipment, the exterior lighting be switched on for a defined period of time.
of the vehicle can be set individually.
Activating
Activating/deactivating After switching off the drive-ready state, briefly
1. "CAR" push the indicator lever forward.
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting" Setting the duration
▷ "Welcome and goodbye" 2. "Settings"
When unlocking the vehicle, individual 3. "Exterior lighting"

light functions are switched on for a lim‐ 4. "Pathway lighting"
ited time. 5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Door handle lights" 6. "OK"
Door handles and the ground in front of
the doors are illuminated for a limited
time. Daytime running lights
▷ "Welcome Light Carpet"
The area next to the vehicle is illuminated General information
for a limited time. The daytime running lights light up when drive-
ready state is switched on.
LED light carpet
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights in front.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. Depending on country specifications:
The light source is located in the position indi‐ "Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving
cated. lights, rear"
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
178
Lights CONTROLS
Adaptive light functions The cornering light is automatically switched on

depending on the steering angle or, where appli‐
cable, the use of turn signals.
Concept When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may
Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐ be automatically switched on regardless of the
tion of the roadway. steering angle.
General information
The adaptive light functions may consist of one Adaptive headlight range
system or multiple systems, depending on the control
equipment version:
▷ Adaptive Light Control. The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐
ances out acceleration and braking processes as
▷ Cornering light.
well as the vehicle load conditions in order to
avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of
Activating the road is optimized.
ment.
High-beam Assistant
The LED in the button lights up.
The adaptive light functions are active when the Concept
drive-ready state is switched on.
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically switches
Adaptive Light Control the high beams on or off depending on the traffic
situation.
General information General information

Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
rameters, the light from the headlight follows the
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐
course of the road.
uation allows. In the low speed range, the high
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive beams are not switched on by the system.
Light Control does not swivel to the opposite
The system responds to light from oncoming
lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.
Cornering light The high beams can be switched on and off

manually at any time.
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering Activating
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a 1. Press the button on the light switch
certain speed. element.
The LED in the button lights up.
179
CONTROLS Lights
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever. Sensitivity of the high-beam
Assistant
General information
The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant can
be adjusted.
Safety information
Warning
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter is illuminated when the low beams are If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐
switched on. ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be
momentarily blinded. There is a risk of accident.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐ If adjustments have been made and the sensi‐
tween low beams and high beams. tivity has been modified, make sure that on‐
coming traffic is not momentarily blinded.
The blue indicator light in the instrument
Switch off the high beams manually if required.
cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
Driving interruption with activated high-beam As‐

sistant: the High-Beam Assistant remains acti‐ The setting can only be performed when the ve‐
vated when driving continues. hicle is stationary. The drive-ready state must be
switched on and the light must be turned off.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off.
Adjusting the sensitivity
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the
button on the turn signal lever. Push the turn signal lever to the front for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds. The system responds more
sensitively.
Deactivating
Resetting the sensitivity

Push the turn signal lever to the front again for
approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-ready
state.
The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant is re‐
set to the factory settings.
Press the button on the turn signal lever. System limits

The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high beams. In situation that require
this, therefore switch off manually.
180
Lights CONTROLS
The system is not fully functional in the following Safety information

situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐
sary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such
as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming The label is in the headlight and is visible from
traffic on highways. the outside.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior Fog lights
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Front fog lights
Laser high beams Concept

The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway.
Concept
The range of the high beams is increased and Functional requirement
ensures an even better illumination of the road.
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lights.
General information
When the high beams are switched-on, starting Switching on/off
with a speed of approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, the la‐
ser high beams in the headlight are automatically Press the button.
switched on in addition to the LED high beams.
Depending on the country variant, further infor‐ The green indicator light in the instru‐
mation can be obtained from the laser label on ment cluster lights up if the front fog
the headlight. lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control is activated, the

low beams will come on automatically when you
switch on the front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
181
CONTROLS Lights
Instrument lighting Switching the interior lights

on/off
Functional requirement Press the button.
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness. To switch off permanently: press the button and
hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Adjusting The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can
be switched on and off independently. The but‐
Adjust the brightness with the
ton is located in the rear roofliner.
thumbwheel.
Switching the reading lights

on/off
Press the button.
Interior lights Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐

ing lights are located next to the interior lights in
General information the front and rear.
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐
ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐ Ambient light
trolled.
General information
Overview Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
Buttons in the vehicle rior.
Switching on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐
cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐
cle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it
will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
1. "CAR"
Interior lights
2. "Settings"
Reading lights 3. "Interior lighting"

4. "Ambient lighting"
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
182
Lights CONTROLS
Selecting the color scheme Bowers & Wilkins Diamond

1. "CAR"
Surround Sound System
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting" General information
4. "Color" Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
5. Select the desired setting. Brightness can be individually set.
If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will be
Setting the brightness switched off.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Switching on/off
3. "Interior lighting" The speaker lighting is switched on when the ve‐
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the ve‐
4. "Brightness"
hicle is locked.
1. "CAR"
Dynamic light 2. "Settings"
Individual actions, for example incoming calls or 3. "Interior lighting"
opened doors, are indicated by light effects. 4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
1. "CAR" The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
2. "Settings" file currently used.
3. "Interior lighting"
Setting the brightness
4. "Dynamic light"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Dimmed while driving 3. "Interior lighting"
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed 4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
when the vehicle is driven in the dark. 5. "Brightness"
1. "CAR" 6. Select the desired setting.
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Dimmed for night driving"
file currently used.
Panoramic glass sunroof,

lighting
If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or the
sun protection is closed, the lighting is switched
off.
183
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag In the rear

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Side airbag
3 Head airbag 6 Knee airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the In the event of a side impact, the side airbag pro‐
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts tects the side of the body in the chest and lap
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ area.
equate protection. Depending on the equipment:
184
Safety CONTROLS
In the event of a side impact, the side airbag in risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as
the rear protects the chest and lap area on the possible when the airbag is triggered.
side of the bodies of the occupants in the outer ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
rear seats. correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in
the floor area and does not support them on
Head airbag the dashboard.
In the event of a side impact, the head airbag ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
protects the head. away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
Ejection Mitigation mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ son.
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants senger side must stay clear - do not attach
through side windows during rollovers or side im‐ adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐
pact events. tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS
devices or mobile phones.
Knee airbag ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of cover panels, do not cover them or modify
a frontal impact. them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
Protective effect the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
General information other objects to the front passenger seat that
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ are not specifically suited for seats with
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents. integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
Information on optimum effect of the ets, over the backrests.
airbags ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
Warning also applies to steering wheel covers, the
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐ dashboard, and the seats.
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag ▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
system cannot provide protection as intended Even when you follow all instructions very
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐ closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
timum protective effect of the airbag system.
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
Customer Relations for further information.
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the
Warnings and information on the airbags are also
found on the sun visors.
185
CONTROLS Safety
Functional readiness of the Strength of the driver's and

airbag system front-seat passenger airbag
Safety information General information

The explosive power that activates driver's/front-
Warning seat passenger airbags very much depends on
the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐ To maintain the accuracy of this function over
jury. Do not touch individual components. the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears on the Control
Display.
Warning
Calibrating the front seats
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the Warning
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐ There is a risk of jamming when moving the
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐ seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
a dealer’s service center or another qualified ment.
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Press the switch and move the respective
When drive-ready state is switched on, seat all the way forward, until it stops.
the warning light in the instrument clus‐
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
ter lights up briefly and thereby indicates
moves forward slightly.
the function readiness of the entire airbag sys‐
tem and the belt tensioners. 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when the
message on the Control Display disappears.
Malfunction
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
▷ Warning light does not come on
the calibration.
when drive-ready state is switched
on. If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
▷ The warning light lights up continuously.
possible.
Have the system checked.
186
Safety CONTROLS
Automatic deactivation of To enable correct recognition of the occupied

seat cushion:
the front-seat passenger ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
airbags other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
Concept
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐
tem is to be installed on it.
ance.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that can
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
push against the seat from below.
senger's side are activated or deactivated.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
General information
Indicator light for the front-seat
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐ passenger airbags
structions for children on the front passenger The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
seat, see Children. airbag in the roofliner indicates the operating
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
Safety information The light indicates whether the airbags are either
activated or deactivated.
Warning After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
briefly lights up and then indicates whether the
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
airbags are either activated or deactivated.
function, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐ ▷ The indicator light lights up
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be when a child is properly
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries seated in a child restraint sys‐
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐ tem or when the seat is
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area. empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
Malfunction of the automatic ▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for
deactivation system instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐
When transporting older children and adults, the cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐
front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated bags on the front passenger side are acti‐
in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐ vated.
cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags
lights up.
Detected child restraint systems
In this case, change the sitting position so that
The system generally detects children seated in
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
and the indicator light goes out.
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐
the person sit in the rear. ter installing a child restraint system, make sure
187
CONTROLS Safety
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐

ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child Warning
restraint system has been detected and the Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
Intelligent Safety manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
Concept style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the and actively intervene where appropriate.
driver assistance systems.
General information Warning

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐ Due to system limits, individual functions can
ligent Safety consists of one or more systems malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
that can help prevent an imminent collision. Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
▷ Front collision mitigation.
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
▷ Evasion Assistant.
▷ Intersection collision warning.
▷ Person warning with City braking function. Overview
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐
Button in the vehicle
tection.
▷ Lane departure warning.
▷ Blind spot collision warning.
▷ Side collision mitigation.
Safety information
Warning
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility Intelligent Safety
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Switching on/off
propriate. Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
188
Safety CONTROLS
Button Status Front collision mitigation

Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on. Concept
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ The system may prevent some accidents. In the
gent Safety systems are switched off event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐
or currently unavailable. pact speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
Safety systems are switched off.
ently, if needed.
Press the button.

General information
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐
tem is displayed.
tem is controlled by the following sensors:
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.
all systems are now switched on.
▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ The system issues a two-phase warning of a
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
ual settings are activated and stored for the above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn‐
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting ings may vary with the current driving situation.
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐
are activated. tentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐ tem reactions.
ing settings are switched between: Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are Attention Camera in the instrument cluster cap‐
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the tures the driver’s field of vision. Additionally, the
sub-functions, for instance setting for warning system checks for visual impairments. Field of vi‐
time. sion and visibility also affect the timing of the
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are warnings.
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ Safety information
vidually switched off.
Warning
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
switched off. and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
propriate.
189
CONTROLS Safety
Camera
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
manner that is not consistent with their normal
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
Warning
clean and clear.
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a With radar sensor
Overview
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of

the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Switching on/off
Intelligent Safety
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on manually
Press the button.
tem is displayed.
190
Safety CONTROLS
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the ▷ "Early"

equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ ▷ "Medium"
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting The selected time is stored for the driver profile
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu currently used.
are activated.
Warning with braking function
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐ Display
tween: A warning symbol appears in the instrument
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐
subfunctions. nent.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off. Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic

Manual switching off signal sounds: acute warning.
Press and hold this button. Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Prewarning
Button Status This warning is provided, for instance when there
is impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Safety systems are switched on.
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ as warranted.
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable. Acute warning with braking function
Button does not light up: all Intelligent An acute warning is displayed in case of the im‐
Safety systems are switched off. minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
Setting the warning time speed.
1. "CAR" Intervene in the case of an acute warning. De‐

pending on the driving situation and the equip‐
2. "Settings"
ment version, the acute warning may be accom‐
3. "Driver Assistance" panied by a brief activation of the braking
4. "Safety and Warnings" system.
5. "Front Collision Mitigation" With the warning time setting "Late" the brief ac‐
tivation of the braking system is omitted.
191
CONTROLS Safety
If an acute warning is provided, the system may er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
also provide assistance, such as through braking, tem’s operation and limitations.
when there is risk of collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
Detection range
Brake intervention
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a
warning is active, the maximum braking force is
used when the brake is applied. The brake pedal
must be applied sufficiently quickly and force‐
fully.
The system may also assist in braking if there is
a risk of collision.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop. Only objects that are detected by the system are
taken into account.
City brake function: the brake intervention occurs
to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h. Thus, a system reaction might not come or
With radar sensor: the brake intervention occurs might come late.
to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h. The following situations may not be detected, for
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the instance:
brake intervention occurs as a brief braking pres‐ ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
sure. No automatic delay occurs. them at high speed.
The brake intervention can be interrupted by ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively or sharply decelerating vehicles.
moving the steering wheel.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
limitations of the system and actively intervene Upper speed limit
as warranted. If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
System limits temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to be‐
low this speed, the system is reactivated.
Safety information
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
Warning
lowing situations:
The system is designed to operate in certain
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ ▷ In tight curves.
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
of damage to property. Actively intervene as ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
192
Safety CONTROLS
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ ance around the vehicle. If the system identifies
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ space alongside the vehicle, it supports an eva‐
terior mirror. sive maneuver begun by the driver by safely pro‐
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ viding targeted steering support.
temperatures. Safety information
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button. Warning
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
after vehicle delivery. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
low in the sky. traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
▷ When it is dark outside. propriate.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar

sensors are dirty or covered.
Warning
▷ Depending on the equipment version: after
improperly performed work on the vehicle Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
paint in the area of the radar sensors. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also limit
the function of the radar sensors and may even
cause them to fail.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are Overview
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐ Radar sensors
actions.
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Evasion Assistant
Concept
The system supports the driver in making eva‐
sive maneuvers in certain situations, such as
when obstacles or persons suddenly appear.
General information Front center bumper.

The system issues a warning and intervenes to
support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver is
possible. Sensors monitor and detect the clear‐
193
CONTROLS Safety
Person warning with City braking function, re‐

fer to page 200.
▷ Front collision mitigation is switched on.
Front collision mitigation, refer to page 189.
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
the vehicle.
Switching on/off
Front side bumper. The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Warning with evasion support

If a collision with a detected vehicle or a detected
person is imminent, a warning symbol appears
on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up
Display.
Rear bumper. Symbol Measure

Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
sensors clean and unobstructed. Brake and increase distance.

Camera
signal sounds: acute warning for ob‐
stacles.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.

signal sounds: acute warning for pe‐
destrians.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror Acute warning with evasion support
clean and clear. An acute warning is displayed when there is an
imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle
approaching another object at a high speed.
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. The
▷ Pedestrian warning with braking function is
system is designed to provide assistance by tak‐
switched on.
ing evasive action when there is a risk of collision.
194
Safety CONTROLS
Acute warnings may be provided even when Functional limitations

there has been no prior warning. The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
System limits ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
Safety information ▷ In tight curves.

▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
Warning
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
The system is designed to operate in certain shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ terior mirror.
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
of damage to property. Actively intervene as porarily switched off due to excessively high
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ temperatures.
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
tem’s operation and limitations. via the Start/Stop button.
Detection range
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
improperly performed work on the vehicle
paint in the area of the radar sensors.
The system's detection potential is limited. Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
Only objects that are detected by the system are
taken into account.
cause them to fail.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be detected, for
Intersection collision
example: warning
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed. Concept
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, The system may prevent some accidents with
or sharply decelerating vehicles. cross traffic at intersections and junctions. In the
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. pact speed.
195
CONTROLS Safety
The system sounds a warning in the city speed

range before an imminent collision and activates Warning
brakes independently, if needed. Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
General information to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
The system is controlled by the following sen‐ or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
sors: manner that is not consistent with their normal
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror. use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
▷ Radar sensors on the side in the front and actively intervene where appropriate.
bumper.
▷ Radar sensor in the center in the front
bumper.
Warning
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is‐
sued when a danger of collision with crossing
traffic is detected.
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
The system issues a two-phase warning of a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The timing of
warnings may vary with the current driving situa‐
tion. Overview
The Driver Attention Camera in the instrument
cluster captures the driver’s field of vision. Addi‐ Button in the vehicle
tionally, the system checks for visual impair‐
ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect the
timing of the warnings.
Detection range
Vehicles that cross your direction of travel can be
detected by the system as soon as these vehi‐
cles enter into the detection range of the system.
Safety information Intelligent Safety
Warning
propriate.
196
Safety CONTROLS
Camera Switching on/off
driving off.
Press the button.
tem is displayed.
clean and clear.
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
Radar sensors tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
The radar sensors are located in the front ual settings are activated and stored for the
bumper. driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.

The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
Front side bumper. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
Manual switching off

switched off.
Front center bumper.

Keep the radar sensors clean and unobstructed.
197
CONTROLS Safety
Button Status Symbol Meaning
Button lights up green: all Intelligent Danger of collision with vehicle

Safety systems are switched on. crossing from the right.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐

Danger of collision with vehicle
gent Safety systems are switched off
crossing from the left.
or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent Danger of collision with vehicle for
Safety systems are switched off. which the direction of travel cannot
be determined.
Setting the warning time
Display with prewarning
1. "CAR"
The respective symbol lights up red: prewarning
2. "Settings"
for vehicles that cross your direction of travel.
Intervene yourself, for instance by braking.
4. "Safety and Warnings"
5. "Front Collision Mitigation" Display with acute warning
6. Select the desired setting: The respective symbol flashes red and an acous‐
▷ "Early" tic signal sounds: acute warning when vehicles
cross your direction of travel.
▷ "Medium"
Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if neces‐
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
sary.
The selected time is stored for the driver profile
currently used. Prewarning
For example, a prewarning is displayed when a
Warning with braking function danger of collision with a crossing vehicle is de‐
tected.
Display
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
as warranted.
General information
A warning symbol appears in the instrument Acute warning with braking function
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐
An acute warning is displayed in the event of an
ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐
immediate danger of collision with a crossing ve‐
nent.
hicle.
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. If an
acute warning is provided, the system may pro‐
vide assistance, such as through braking, when
there is risk of collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
198
Safety CONTROLS
Brake intervention Detection range

The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
The system may also assist in braking if there is
a risk of collision.
The vehicle can be decelerated to a standstill.
The brake intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limitations of the system and actively intervene Thus, a system reaction might not come or
as warranted. might come late.
The following situations may not be detected, for

System limits instance:
▷ Crossing vehicles when they are hidden by
Safety information buildings, for instance.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
Warning or sharply decelerating vehicles.
The system is designed to operate in certain ▷ Crossing bicycles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual side appearance.
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ lowing situations:
tem’s operation and limitations. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
Upper speed limit ▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
The system responds to crossing vehicles when
your own speed is below approx. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
50 mph/80 km/h. shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
temperatures.
199
CONTROLS Safety
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because ▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun ▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper.
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside. Detection range
improperly performed work on the vehicle
paint in the area of the radar sensors.
cause them to fail.
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
Warning sensitivity ided into two areas:
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
example the warning time, the more warnings are vehicle.
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐ ▷ Expanded area, arrows 2, to the right and left
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐ of the central area.
actions.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
within the central area. A warning is issued about
Person warning with City pedestrians who are located within the extended
area only if they are moving in the direction of the
braking function central area.
Concept Safety information

The system can help prevent accidents involving
pedestrians and cyclists. In the event of an acci‐
dent, the system may reduce impact speed. Warning
The system sounds a warning in the city speed The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
range before an imminent collision and activates driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
brakes independently, if needed. and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
General information propriate.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk of
collision with pedestrians and cyclists at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Warning
The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐ or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
tem is controlled by the following sensors: manner that is not consistent with their normal
200
Safety CONTROLS
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving With radar sensor

Warning
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Overview Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐

structed.
Switching on/off
driving off.
Press the button.
Intelligent Safety tem is displayed.
Camera
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
are activated.

The camera is installed near the interior mirror. tween:
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
clean and clear. switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
201
CONTROLS Safety
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are The brake intervention can be interrupted by
switched on according to the individual settings. stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ moving the steering wheel.
vidually switched off. The system’s ability to detect objects may be
Manual switching off limitations of the system and actively intervene
Press and hold this button. as warranted.
switched off. System limits
Button Status Safety information

Safety systems are switched on. Warning
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ The system is designed to operate in certain
gent Safety systems are switched off conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
or currently unavailable. tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
Button does not light up: all Intelligent of damage to property. Actively intervene as
Safety systems are switched off. warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
Warning with braking function tem’s operation and limitations.
Display Upper speed limit

If a collision with a pedestrian or a cyclist is immi‐
The system responds to pedestrians and cyclists
nent, a warning symbol appears on the instru‐
when the speed of the vehicle is below approx.
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display.
50 mph/80 km/h.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds. Detection range
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver. Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
Brake intervention The following situations may not be detected, for
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a instance:
warning is active, the maximum braking force is ▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
used when the brake is applied. This requires the ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐
brake pedal to be depressed sufficiently quickly cause of the viewing angle or contour.
and forcefully.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
If there is a risk of collision, the system may also
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
assist with brake intervention.
32 in/80 cm.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop.
202
Safety CONTROLS
Functional limitations trians and animals on the street. The system de‐
The system may not be fully functional or may tects warm objects that are similar in shape to
not be available in the following situations: human beings or animals. If necessary, the ther‐
mal image can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. play.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐ General information
activated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ Thermal image
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
temperatures.
The image shows the heat radiated by objects in
the field of view of the camera.
low in the sky. Warm objects have a light appearance and cold
objects a dark appearance.
▷ When it is dark outside.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature difference between the object and
the background and on the level of heat radiation
▷ Depending on the equipment version: after emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in
improperly performed work on the vehicle temperature to the environment or that radiate
paint in the area of the radar sensors. very little heat are difficult to detect.
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐ For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
pact the function of the radar sensors and may above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient
even cause them to fail. light, the image is only displayed when the low
beams are switched on.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a
Night Vision with fraction of a second.
pedestrian and animal
detection
Concept
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
tion is a night vision system.
An infrared camera scans the area in front of the
vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedes‐
203
CONTROLS Safety
Pedestrian and animal detection Safety information
Warning
propriate.
Object detection and warning only functions in

darkness.
Warning
Objects whose form is similar to people with suf‐
ficient heat radiation are detected.
In addition, the system also detects animals to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
above a certain minimum size, for instance deer. or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
Display on the Control Display with thermal im‐ manner that is not consistent with their normal
age activated: use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
▷ People detected by the system: in light yel‐
low.
▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark yel‐
low. Overview
Range of object detection, with good ambient
conditions: Buttons in the vehicle
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
330 ft/100 m.
▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
490 ft/150 m.
▷ Detection of medium animals: up to approx.
230 ft/70 m.
Environmental influences can limit the availability
of object detection.
If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is Intelligent Safety
located in a residential area, the animal detection
is temporarily switched off.
204
Safety CONTROLS
Adjusting the thermal image

Brightness and contrast can be adjusted, when
the thermal image is switched on.
1. Select brightness or contrast:
▷ "Brightness".
▷ "Contrast".
2. Set the desired value.
Thermal image
Warning function
Display
Camera
Symbol Meaning
Person warning.
Animal warning.
Symbol lights up red. Prewarning.
The camera is automatically heated when the ex‐ Symbol flashes red and a sig‐ Acute warning.
ternal temperatures are low. nal sounds.
When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the
camera objective is cleaned at regular intervals The displayed symbol may vary and shows the
when the windshield washer system is activated. side of the road on which the person or animal
was detected.
Switching on
Warning of people or animals in
Switching on automatically danger
When it is dark outside, the system is automati‐ If a collision with a person or an animal detected
cally active after every driving off. in this way is imminent, a warning symbol ap‐
pears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-
Switching on the thermal image up Display.
The thermal image from the Night Vision camera Although both the shape and the heat radiation
can be displayed on the Control Display in addi‐ are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
tion to the warning function. This function has no
effect on object detection.
Press the button.
The image from the camera is displayed on the

Control Display.
205
CONTROLS Safety
Warning area in front of the vehicle Display in the Head-up Display

The warning is displayed simultaneously in the
Head-up Display and on the instrument cluster.
System limits
Basic limits
lowing situations:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight
The warning area for the person warning con‐ curves.
sists of two parts:
▷ If the camera is soiled or damaged.
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
▷ Expanded area, arrows 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
Limits of pedestrian and animal
With animal warnings, no distinction is made be‐
detection
tween the central or expanded area.
In some situations, it may occur that pedestrians
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
are detected as animals or animals as pedes‐
the direction of the steering angle and changes
trians.
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐
creases, the area becomes, for instance longer Small animals are not detected by the object de‐
and wider. tection function, even if they are clearly visible in
the image.
Limited detection, for instance in the following
Prewarning circumstances:
Prewarning for persons is displayed when a per‐
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially
son is detected in the central area immediately in
covered, especially when their heads are cov‐
front of the vehicle as well as on the left or right
ered.
side in the extended area.
▷ People who are not in an upright position, for
Prewarning for animals is displayed when an ani‐
instance lying down.
mal is detected in the front of the vehicle.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., re‐
If a prewarning is issued, intervene by braking or
cumbent bicycles).
making an evasive maneuver.
▷ After physical damage to the system, for in‐
Acute warning stance after an accident.
Acute warning is displayed if a person or an ani‐

mal is detected in direct proximity in front of the Lane departure warning
vehicle.
If an acute warning is issued, brake or make an
evasive maneuver immediately.
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐
cle is about to run off the road or exit the lane.
206
Safety CONTROLS
General information Functional requirement

This camera-based system warns starting at a The camera must detect the lane markings for
minimum speed. the lane departure warning to be active.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety Overview
systems.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering Button in the vehicle
wheel vibration. The severity of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set in the respective direction be‐
fore leaving the lane.
Depending on the equipment version, if in the
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
marking is crossed, the system may intervene
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐
tion to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the Intelligent Safety
vehicle in the lane.
Safety information Camera
Warning
driver’s personal judgment in assessing road
and traffic safety. There is a risk of accident.
propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐
sponse to a warning.
Warning clean and clear.
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due Switching on/off
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving The lane departure warning activates automati‐
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely cally after departure if the function was switched
and actively intervene where appropriate. on at the end of the last trip.
system is automatically active after every driving
off. The base setting is thereby activated.
207
CONTROLS Safety
Switching on manually Setting the warning time

Press the button. 1. "CAR"
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ 2. "Settings"
tem is displayed. 3. "Driver Assistance"
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, 4. "Safety and Warnings"
all systems are now switched on. 5. "Lane Departure Warning"
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the 6. Select the desired setting:
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ▷ "Early"
ual settings are activated and stored for the ▷ "Medium"
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting ▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu pressed depending on the situation,
are activated. for instance during passing without a turn
signal or when purposely driving over lane
Press the button repeatedly. markings in curves.
The following settings are switched be‐ ▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are file currently used.
subfunctions. Setting the intensity of the steering
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are wheel vibration
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"
5. "Vibration intensity"
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
switched off.
tems and stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent Switch steering intervention on/off

Safety systems are switched on. The steering intervention can be switched on
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ and off separately for blind spot collision warning
gent Safety systems are switched off and lane departure warning.
or currently unavailable. 1. "CAR"
Button does not light up: all Intelligent 2. "Settings"
Safety systems are switched off. 3. "Driver Assistance"
208
Safety CONTROLS
5. "Lane Departure Warning" In addition, a Check Control message is dis‐

6. "Steering intervention" played.
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ The warning signal and Check Control message
file currently used. are an encouragement to pay closer attention to
the lane.
With trailer towing
The symbol illuminates green: at lane
If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐
marking was detected on at least one
ing is activated, for instance during operation
side of the vehicle and warnings can be
with trailer or bicycle rack, no steering interven‐
issued.
tion takes place.
Warning function End of warning

For instance, the warning will be canceled in the
If you leave the lane following situations:
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has ▷ Automatically after a few seconds.
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐ ▷ When returning to your own lane.
cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐
ting. ▷ When braking hard.
When the turn signal is switched on in the corre‐ ▷ When using the turn signal.
sponding direction before changing the lane, a ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
warning is not issued.
System limits
Steering intervention
Depending on the equipment version: if, in the Safety information
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
marking is crossed, the system may intervene Warning
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐
tion to vibrating. The steering intervention helps The system is designed to operate in certain
keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering inter‐ conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
vention can be noticed on the steering wheel tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
and can be manually overridden at any time. Dur‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
ing an active steering intervention, the display in of damage to property. Actively intervene as
the instrument cluster will blink. warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Warning signal
Depending on the equipment version: in the
event of multiple active steering interventions by Functional limitations
the system within 3 minutes without the driver's
intervention at the steering wheel, an acoustic
lowing situations:
warning will sound. A short warning signal will
sound at the second steering intervention. Be‐ ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
ginning with the third steering intervention, an
continuous warning will sound.
209
CONTROLS Safety
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, General information

merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
of you.
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
low in the sky. the area behind and next to the vehicle when
traveling faster than a minimum speed.
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ The minimum speed is country-specific and is
terior mirror. displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
porarily switched off due to excessively high The system indicates whether there are vehicles
temperatures. in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
via the Start/Stop button. The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately Before you change lanes after setting the turn
after vehicle delivery. signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
A Check Control message may be displayed tions described above.
when the system is not fully functional. The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates.
Vehicles with side collision mitigation: at speeds
Blind spot collision warning of up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the system can in‐
tervene with a brief active steering intervention
Concept and help guide the vehicle back into the lane.
Blind spot collision warning detects vehicles in The steering intervention occurs when a mini‐
the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐ mum speed is reached. This minimum speed is
hind in the adjacent lane. A warning is issued in displayed on the Control Display in the menu for
various gradations in these situations. the steering intervention.
Safety information
Warning
210
Safety CONTROLS
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
propriate. sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ Switching on automatically
Blind spot collision warning is automatically acti‐
vated after departure if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
and actively intervene where appropriate. Press the button.
tem is displayed.
Overview
are activated.

Intelligent Safety tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
Radar sensors subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are

The radar sensors are located in the rear switched off.
bumper.
211
CONTROLS Safety
Button Status Vehicles with side collision

mitigation: switching steering
intervention on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ and off separately for blind spot collision warning
gent Safety systems are switched off and lane departure warning.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Setting the warning time
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
1. "CAR"
6. "Steering intervention"
2. "Settings"
rently used.
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection" Warning function
▷ "Early" Light in the exterior mirror
▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late"
▷ "Off": with this setting, no warning is out‐
put.
rently used.
Setting the intensity of the steering

wheel vibration
1. "CAR" Prewarning
2. "Settings" The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates
when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐
proaching from behind.
5. "Vibration intensity" Acute warning
6. Select the desired setting. When the turn signal is switched on while a vehi‐
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ cle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vi‐
tems and stored for the driver profile currently brates briefly and the light in the exterior mirror
used. flashes brightly.
The warning stops when the other vehicle has
left the critical area or the turn signal has been
deactivated.
212
Safety CONTROLS
Vehicles with side collision ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

mitigation much faster than your own.
When there is no response to the vibration of the ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
steering wheel at speeds of up to ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking is ▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
crossed, the system intervenes with a brief active for instance by stickers.
steering intervention. The steering intervention
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The steer‐ ▷ After improperly performed work on the vehi‐
ing intervention can be noticed on the steering cle paint.
wheel and can be manually overridden at any ▷ If cargo protrudes.
time. Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
Flashing of the light pact the function of the radar sensors and may
A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking even cause them to fail.
serves as system self-test. For vehicles with side collision mitigation, the
steering intervention can be limited, for instance
System limits in the following situation:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
Safety information merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
Warning ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ ▷ When lane markings are not white.
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ ▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of damage to property. Actively intervene as of you.
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
tem’s operation and limitations. of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
Upper speed limit shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. terior mirror.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
temporarily. porarily switched off due to excessively high
If the vehicle speed falls below approx. temperatures.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
sponds according to the setting. via the Start/Stop button.
Functional limitations after vehicle delivery.
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ A Check Control message is displayed when the
lowing situations: system is not fully functional.
213
CONTROLS Safety
If the trailer power socket is occupied or trailer brating steering wheel. If necessary, the system
towing is activated, for instance during operation will carry out an active steering intervention.
with trailer or bicycle rack, the system cannot be
switched on. A Check Control message is dis‐
played. Safety information
Displaying warnings Warning

Depending on the selected warning settings, The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
be displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
cess of premature warnings of critical situations. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
propriate.
Side collision mitigation
Concept Warning
The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐ Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
sions. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
General information or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision mitigation with steering inter‐
vention to be active.
Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the
space next to the vehicle from a minimum speed
Overview
of up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is Button in the vehicle
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
The front camera determines the lane marking
positions.
If, for instance, another vehicle is detected next
to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision with
this vehicle, the system helps avoid the collision.
For this purpose, the system issues a warning
with a flashing LED in the exterior mirror and a vi‐
214
Safety CONTROLS
Intelligent Safety Switching on/off
Radar sensors
The side collision mitigation activates automati‐
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers. cally after departure if the function was switched
on at the end of the last trip.
Press the button.
tem is displayed.
Front bumper. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
are activated.

tween:
Rear bumper. "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
sensors clean and unobstructed. subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
Camera

switched off.

clean and clear.
215
CONTROLS Safety
Button Status If necessary, an active steering intervention takes

place to prevent the collision and maintain the
Button lights up green: all Intelligent vehicle within its own lane.
The steering intervention can be noticed on the
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ steering wheel and can be manually overridden
gent Safety systems are switched off at any time.
System limits
Safety information
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration Warning
1. "CAR" The system is designed to operate in certain

2. "Settings" tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
3. "Driver Assistance" spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback" of damage to property. Actively intervene as
5. "Vibration intensity"
6. Select the desired setting. tem’s operation and limitations.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems and stored for the driver profile currently
used. Functional limitations
Warning function lowing situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
Light in the exterior mirror much faster than your own.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ After improperly performed work on the vehi‐
cle paint.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
Acute warning such as in construction areas.
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the exte‐ ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
rior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐ dirt or water.
brates.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
A Check Control message is displayed at the
same time.
of you.
216
Safety CONTROLS
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because General information

low in the sky.
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
temperatures.
via the Start/Stop button. Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately the area behind the vehicle.
after vehicle delivery. When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in certain speed, the system responds as follows:
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐ ▷ Active Protection: when a collision seems to
pact the function of the radar sensors and may be unavoidable, PreCrash functions are trig‐
even cause them to fail. gered.
A Check Control message is displayed when the
system is not fully functional.
Safety information
If the trailer power socket is occupied or trailer
towing is activated, for instance during operation
with trailer or bicycle rack, the system cannot be Warning
switched on. A Check Control message is dis‐ The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
played. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
Rear collision preparation traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Concept
The system reacts to vehicles approaching from
behind. Warning
217
CONTROLS Safety
Overview If equipped with Equipment

Radar sensors Stop Assistant
Concept
If the driver is no longer fit to drive, the system
helps to safely bring the vehicle to a standstill.
General information
The emergency stop function is not triggered
automatically. The emergency stop function can
only be triggered manually by the occupants.
The radar sensors are located in the rear When the system is activated, the vehicle is
bumper. brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar lane guidance.
sensors clean and unobstructed. Depending on the equipment version and na‐
tional market version, the system includes a lane
Switching on/off change function.
With lane change function: on motorways or mo‐
torway-like roads, the system steers the vehicle
driving off.
to the side of the road or shoulder where possi‐
The system is deactivated in the following situa‐ ble. On other roads or under high traffic condi‐
tions: tions, the vehicle is brought to a standstill on the
▷ When driving in reverse. actual road.
▷ If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer
towing is activated, for instance during opera‐ Overview
tion with trailer or bicycle rack.
System limits
lowing situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ When the approaching vehicle approaches
slowly.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. Parking brake

▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered, Functional requirements
▷ The function can be activated at speeds of
▷ If the field of view of the sensors is covered, approx. 6 mph/10 km/h up to approx.
e.g., by garage walls, hedges or snow hills. 155 mph/250 km/h.
218
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Lane changes are executed at speeds of ap‐ ▷ Parking brake is set.

prox. 43 mph/70 km/h up to approx. ▷ Interior lights are switched on.
62 mph/100 km/h.
▷ Central locking system is unlocked.
Activating the emergency stop

Displays in the instrument
function
cluster
Pull the switch for the parking brake briefly
to activate the emergency stop function. Symbol Status
▷ With lane change function: releasing the
Emergency Stop function active.
switch may trigger an automatic lane change.
▷ The system will take control of the vehicle for
a maximum of 2 minutes.
Without lane change function:
▷ The hazard warning system is switched on.
▷ An Emergency Request is triggered. Symbol Status
Green steering wheel symbol:

Canceling the emergency stop When lane markings are detected,
function the system keeps the vehicle in the
lane.
The driver can cancel the emergency stop func‐
tion by actively taking control of the vehicle Gray steering wheel symbol:
throughout the entire process.
Lane guidance is briefly interrupted.
For instance, the emergency stop function will
be canceled in the following situations: Yellow steering wheel symbol:
▷ When steering. Lane marking driven over.
▷ When using the turn signal. When lane markings are detected,
the system keeps the vehicle in the
▷ During acceleration.
lane.
▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys‐
tem. Yellow steering wheel symbol:
▷ When canceling the Emergency Request. The hands are not grasping the
▷ When switching the selector lever position at steering wheel. The system is still
standstill. active.
▷ When the driver's foot remains on the accel‐ Red steering wheel symbol and a
erator pedal after the function has been trig‐ signal sounds:
gered. The hands are not grasping the
▷ When the switch of the parking brake is steering wheel. Interruption of lane
pressed. guidance is imminent.
Red steering wheel symbol and a

At standstill signal sounds:
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the system Lane guidance is switched off.
will carry out the following settings:
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged.
219
CONTROLS Safety
System limits The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends

confirming there are no statutory or regulatory
Use the system only in the event of a driver fail‐
constraints on use of the system in your state or
ure.
country prior to the initial use. In addition, the
The system cannot replace the driving perform‐ laws with respect to use of the system should be
ance of a driver who is fit to drive. verified in regular intervals, especially when bor‐
ders are frequently crossed.
BMW Drive Recorder Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed

about the system. In addition, information about
the system is required when handing off the ve‐
Concept hicle.
The system stores brief video recordings of the
surrounding area of the vehicle, e.g., to docu‐ Functional requirements
ment traffic events. ▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
Additionally, the following parameters are stored ▷ Privacy Policy accepted.
for the trip:
▷ Recording type selected.
▷ Date.
▷ Recording time selected.
▷ Time.
▷ Vehicle speed. Activating/deactivating
▷ GPS coordinates. The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated be‐
fore the first use of the recording function.
General information
1. "Apps"
There are various ways for storing video record‐
2. "Drive Recorder"
ings:
3. Accept Privacy Policy.
▷ Automatic storage of the recording.
4. "Settings"
The function allows the documentation of the
event of an accident. 5. "Recording allowed"
▷ Manual storage of the recording. 6. Select the desired setting.
The function allows the documentation of
traffic situations. Recording functions
The system records up to 20 seconds before
and after the activation of the storage.
Automatic recording
The recording is stored automatically when the
Cameras of the assistance systems are used, for
vehicle sensors detect an accident occurrence.
instance Panorama View.
Manual recording
Data protection
The permissibility of recording and using video Using the button
recordings is contingent upon the statutory regu‐
lations of the country in which the system is to Press and hold this button.
be used. The user is responsible for the use of
the system and compliance with the respective
regulations.
220
Safety CONTROLS
Via iDrive Recording type

1. "Apps" 1. "Apps"
2. "Drive Recorder" 2. "Drive Recorder"
3. "Start recording" 3. "Settings"
To stop the recording: "Cancel". 4. "RECORDING TYPE"
Recording can also be started by selecting the 5. Select the desired setting:
widget on the Control Display. ▷ "Manually"
▷ "Automatically"
Recording playback and
administration ▷ "Manually" and "Automatically"
Stored video recordings can be played back, ex‐

ported and deleted.
Recording time
1. "Apps"
For your own safety, the video recording is only
displayed on the Control Display up to approx. 2. "Drive Recorder"
2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market versions, 3. "Settings"
the video recording is only displayed if the park‐ 4. Select the desired setting:
ing brake is engaged or if the selector lever is in
selector lever position P. ▷ "Before trigger"
Recording time before an event.
1. "Apps"
▷ "After trigger"
2. "Drive Recorder"
Recording time after an event.
3. "Saved recordings"
4. Select desired recording. Cameras
5. Select the desired setting: 1. "Apps"
▷ "Play" 2. "Drive Recorder"
▷ "Pause" 3. "Settings"
▷ "Previous" 4. "Camera selection"
▷ "Next" 5. Select desired camera.
▷ "Export" In case of an accident, the system switches au‐
▷ "Delete" tomatically to "All" cameras.
If a camera change occurred during the record‐ If driver assistance systems are active, their cam‐
ing, different segments of the video can be se‐ era views are selected automatically.
lected.
System limits
Adjusting In the event of serious accidents, it may not be
possible to store recordings if the damage on the
General information vehicle is too great or the power supply was in‐
Different settings can be made. terrupted.
221
CONTROLS Safety
Active Protection Function

When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and
passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
Concept
ened once after driving away.
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
In accident-critical situations, the following indi‐
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or
vidual functions become active as needed:
collision situations.
▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety
General information belts.
Active Protection consists of various PreCrash ▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow

functions, which can vary depending on the gap.
equipment. ▷ Automatic closing of the panoramic glass
The system is used to detect certain critical driv‐ sunroof, including sun protection.
ing situations that might lead to an accident. This ▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort seats in
includes the following critical driving situations: the front: automatic positioning of the back‐
▷ Emergency stop. rest for the front passenger seat.
▷ Severe understeering. After a critical driving situation without an acci‐

dent, the front safety belts are loosened again.
▷ Severe oversteering.
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
Certain functions of several systems can, within stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐
the system limits, lead to Active Protection trig‐ ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
gering: safety belt before continuing on your trip.
▷ Front collision mitigation: automatic brake in‐ All other systems can be restored to the desired
tervention. setting.
▷ Front collision mitigation: Brake Assistant.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐
tection: Brake Assistant. PostCrash – iBrake
▷ Rear collision preparation: detection of immi‐
nent rear collisions. Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can bring
Safety information the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐
vention by the driver in certain situations. This
can reduce the risk of a further collision and the
Warning
consequences thereof.
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
At standstill
limits, critical situation could not be detected
reliably or in time. There is a risk of accident. After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch matically.
propriate. Harder vehicle braking
In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring
the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake
Assistant allows.
222
Safety CONTROLS
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake. ▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
For a brief period, the braking pressure will be behavior.
higher than the braking pressure that is achieved ▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length of
by the automatic braking function. Automatic trip.
braking is interrupted.
▷ Depending on the equipment: attention of
the driver through the Driver Attention Cam‐
Interrupting automatic braking era.
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐ Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system
ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐ is active and can also display a recommendation
sive maneuver. to take a break.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal. Break recommendation
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Adjusting
The fatigue alert is active automatically with each
Fatigue alert switching on of drive-ready state and can thus
display a break recommendation.
General information The break recommendation can also be
The system can detect decreasing alertness or switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous 1. "CAR"
trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it
2. "Settings"
is recommended that the driver takes a break.
Safety information 4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert"
Warning ▷ "Standard": the break recommendation is
made with a defined value.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's ▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation is
physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or issued earlier.
fatigue may not be detected or not be detected ▷ "Off": no break recommendation is made.
in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving Display
style to traffic conditions.
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
Function
During the display, various settings can be se‐
The system is switched on each time drive-ready
lected.
After a break, another recommendation to take a
After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐
break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐
mately 45 minutes.
creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
223
CONTROLS Safety
System limits
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
uations and may issue an incorrect warning or no
warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
224
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and Adaptive brake assistant
options In combination with Active Cruise Control ACC,
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐
tions.
Drive-off assistant
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Concept
served. This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
Driving off
Antilock Braking System
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
ABS 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
delay.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, which increases Depending on the vehicle loading or when a
the active safety. trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Brake assistant
Concept
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically boosts the vehicle braking assis‐ Within the physical limits, the system helps to
tance to the furthest possible extent. It reduces keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
the braking distance to a minimum during an drive power and by braking the individual wheels.
emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the
capabilities provided by the Antilock Brake Sys‐ General information
tem ABS. DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal ditions, for instance:
for the duration of the emergency stop. ▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
225
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Safety information Deactivating/activating DSC
Warning
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
curves.
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust as soon as possible.
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Deactivating DSC
ate. Hold the button down until DSC OFF is
displayed in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated.
Warning
When driving with a roof load, for instance with Activating DSC
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk Press the button.
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐ DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of light go out.
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with
roof load. Display
In the instrument cluster

Overview When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls

the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DSC OFF
226
DTC Dynamic Traction Activating/deactivating DTC

Control Activating DTC
Press the button.
Concept
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
Control where drive power is optimized. lights up.
The system ensures maximum drive power on
unusual road conditions, for instance unplowed
snow covered roads, or loose road surfaces, but Deactivating DTC
with somewhat limited driving stability. Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
General information light go out.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Display
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in
the following situations:
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow- the instrument cluster.
covered roads.
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose Indicator/warning lights
ground.
The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐
▷ When driving with snow chains. vated.
Overview
Automatic program change
Button in the vehicle In certain situations, the Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol DSC is activated automatically:
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion ACC is activated.
▷ On a brake intervention by the Intelligent
Safety systems.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
xDrive
DSC OFF
Concept
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐
cle. The interaction of xDrive and other suspen‐
sion control systems, such as DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control, further optimizes traction and
227
driving dynamics. xDrive variably distributes the Display in the Head-up Display
driving forces to the front and rear axles as de‐
Some of the information can also be displayed in
manded by the driving situation and road surface.
the Head-up Display.
The Driving Dynamics Control is used to change
the all-wheel distribution from traction oriented
to sport oriented. M sport differential
With the xOffroad package, the all-wheel-drive
system is additionally adjusted for the respective The active M differential provides for continu‐
xOffroad drive mode. ously variable locking of the rear axle differential
Because of the needs-based use of the all- depending on the driving situation. This prevents
wheel-drive system, Efficient4x4 yields a reduc‐ spinning of a single rear wheel and thereby pro‐
tion in consumption. vides optimal traction in any driving situation.
The driver is responsible adapting his or her driv‐
Display on the Control Display ing style to the situation.
Display xView display

Automatic Differential
1. "CAR"
Brake
3. "xOFFROAD" The system controls the driving force by auto‐
or matic brake intervention on individual wheels.
"xVIEW" The function works in the same way as a differ‐
The following information is displayed: ential lock and improves traction on a loose sur‐
face, for example. The system detects when a
▷ With a navigation system: compass display
wheel begins to spin and automatically brakes
for the driving direction.
this wheel.
▷ With navigation system: elevation for the cur‐
The driving force is diverted to the wheel with
rent position.
better traction.
▷ With navigation system: destination flag in
As a result, the drive torque is transferred more
compass direction to the destination.
efficiently to the wheels during accelerations.
▷ Pitch attitude with degree indication and per‐
centage.
▷ Transverse gradient with degree indication. HDC Hill Descent Control
▷ Graphic display for the steering angle.
▷ Level adjustment of the two-axle ride level Concept
control. HDC Hill Descent Control is a downhill control
With the xOffroad package, the following addi‐ feature that controls the vehicle speed on steep
tional information can be displayed: downhill grades, for instance when driving on un‐
paved roads.
▷ With Surround View: depending on the
speed, terrain-specific camera perspectives. When the system is active, the vehicle moves at
the speed set by the driver, without the driver
▷ xOffroad drive mode currently active.
having to depress the brake pedal.
▷ Distribution of drive torque to the wheels.
228
While HDC is controlling the speed, the system Display in the instrument cluster
automatically distributes the braking force to the
individual wheels. This improves vehicle drivabil‐ A symbol and the selected de‐
ity and driving stability. If necessary, the Antilock sired speed are displayed.
Braking System prevents the wheels from lock‐ ▷ Indicator green: HDC is active.
ing. The system is actively braking
the vehicle.
General information ▷ Gray display: HDC is on standby.
Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds
below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. Display in the Head-up Display
Speeds can be set between approx. The HDC status can also be displayed in the
2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. Head-up Display.
When the vehicle is moving downhill, the system
reduces the speed to the set value, within the
physical limits.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle
speed
Overview
Using the cruise control rocker
Button in the vehicle switch
The desired speed can be changed using the
cruise control rocker switch on the steering
wheel.
HDC
Activating HDC ▷ Press the rocker switch up: the speed in‐
creases gradually.
Press the button. The LED on the button
▷ Press the rocker switch up and hold: the
lights up.
speed increases while the rocker switch is
Speeds between approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and ap‐ pressed.
prox. 20 mph/30 km/h are adopted as the de‐
▷ Press the rocker switch down: the speed de‐
sired speed.
creases gradually.
Emergency braking function, Active PDC: the
▷ Press the rocker switch down and hold: the
emergency braking function is deactivated.
speed decreases while the rocker switch is
Additional information: pressed.
Emergency brake function, Active PDC, refer to
page 259.
229
Using the brake pedal Tuning

While HDC is controlling the speed, the set de‐ The system offers several different tunings.
sired speed can be reduced by depressing the
brake pedal. Driving mode Integral Active Steering
COMFORT Comfortable, for optimal

Deactivating HDC ECO PRO travel comfort.
Press the button again. The LED goes out.
SPORT Dynamic, for greater agility.
HDC is automatically deactivated above
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. The different tunings are assigned to the differ‐
ent drive modes of the Driving Dynamics Control.
Malfunction Additional information:
If a malfunction occurs, a message is displayed in Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 140.
the instrument cluster.
Using snow chains
In order to guarantee free running of the wheels
Integral Active Steering when operating with snow chains, rear axle
steering of the integral active steering must be
Concept switched off when snow chains are mounted.
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma‐ Additional information:
neuverability and makes a more direct steering Rear axle steering during operation with snow
response possible. chains, refer to page 367.
General information Malfunction

Integral Active Steering is a combination of varia‐ In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel
ble steering ratio and rear axle steering. must be turned further at lower speeds, while the
The steering is more direct because the variable vehicle responds more sensitively to steering
steering ratio amplifies the wheel angle while wheel movements in the higher speed range.
maneuvering. The rear axle steering acts to in‐ The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐
crease maneuverability at low speeds by turning activated.
the rear wheels slightly in the opposite direction
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
to the front wheels.
Have the system checked by a dealer's service
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in
center or another qualified service center or re‐
the same direction as the front wheels. This re‐
pair shop.
sults in, for instance better directional stability
and a more harmonious change of direction.
In critical driving situations, the Integral Active
Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐
poseful steering of the rear wheels before the
driver intervenes, for instance in case of over‐
steering.
230
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems

Vehicle features and Operation
options Switching on
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Press the button on the steering wheel.
It also describes features and functions that are The current speed is accepted as the speed
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due limit.
to the selected options or country versions. This If the system is switched on while the vehicle is
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ stationary or driving at low speeds,
tems. When using these functions and systems, 20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
served.
corresponding speed.
When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐
Speed Limiter namic Stability Control and COMFORT driving
mode may be switched on as well.
Concept Switching off

The system can be used to set a speed limit, for
instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding Press the button on the steering wheel.
speed limits.
The system switches off automatically in the fol‐
General information lowing situations, for example:
The system can limit the speed, starting at a ▷ When the engine is switched off.
value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be ▷ When cruise control is switched on.
driven at any speed below the set speed limit. ▷ When certain programs are activated via the
Driving Dynamics Control.
Overview The displays go out.
Buttons on the steering wheel Interrupting

If the reverse gear is engaged or at idle, the sys‐
Button Function
tem is interrupted when rolling backwards.
System on/off.
Store current speed.

Speed Limit Assist: take over sug‐
gested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Changing the speed limit.
231
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Changing the speed limit Warning when the speed limit is

exceeded
Visual warning
If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐
tor light in the instrument cluster flashes
while the vehicle speed is greater than
the set speed limit.
Acoustic warning
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed limit is set. ▷ If the speed limit is exceeded unintentionally,
a signal sounds.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
resistance point, the speed limit increases or ▷ When the speed limit is reduced to below the
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. vehicle speed while driving, the signal sounds
after some time.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed ▷ When the speed limit is intentionally ex‐
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ceeded by stepping on the accelerator pedal
all the way down, there is no signal.
If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally
exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the ve‐
hicle is not actively braked. Displays in the instrument
When the speed limit is set during a trip to a
cluster
value below the current speed, the vehicle
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit. Display in the speedometer
The current speed can also be stored by press‐ ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
ing a button: tive.
Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted.
▷ No marking: system is
Exceeding the speed limit switched off.
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed
limit, a warning is issued. Indicator light
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally. ▷ The indicator light lights up: the sys‐
There is no warning in this case. tem is switched on.
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to ▷ The indicator light flashes: the set
intentionally exceed the set speed limit. speed limit has been exceeded.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set ▷ Gray indicator light: the system has been in‐
speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated. terrupted.
232
Cruise control
Warning
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
Concept or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐ dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
The system maintains the desired speed. The tervene where appropriate.
system accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
Overview
General information
The system can be activated starting at Buttons on the steering wheel
20 mph/30 km/h.
Button Function
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain condi‐ Cruise control on/off.
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐
pending on the driving mode.
Safety information
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
Warning
Pause cruise control.
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the Store current speed.
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ Speed Limit Assist: take over sug‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust gested speed manually.
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Rocker switch:
ate. Set speed.
Switching cruise control on/off

Warning
The use of the system can lead to an increased Switching on
risk of accidents in the following situations, Depending on the equipment version,
for instance: press the relevant button on the steer‐
▷ On winding roads. ing wheel.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light
conditions, or on a loose road surface. up and the marking on the speedometer is set to
the current speed.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
age to property. Only use the system if driving Cruise control is active. The current speed is
at constant speed is possible. maintained and stored as desired speed.
233
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if When the system is switched on, the current
necessary. speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
Switching off The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
Depending on the equipment version, eter.
press the relevant button on the steer‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
ing wheel. necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is ton.
deleted.
Press the button.
Pausing cruise control

Changing the speed
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
until the desired speed is set.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
Setting the speed
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
resistance point, the desired speed increases
Maintaining and storing the speed
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or
decelerates without pressure on the acceler‐
ator pedal.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted. After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
234
Continuing cruise control System limits

An interrupted cruise control can be continued The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
by calling up the stored speed. The speed may not be maintained on uphill
Make sure that the difference between current grades if the drive power is insufficient.
speed and stored speed is not too large before In ECO PRO drive mode, the vehicle may exceed
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐ or drop below the set desired speed in some sit‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur. uations, for instance on downhill or uphill grades.
Press the button with the system inter‐
rupted.
Active Cruise Control with
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐ Stop & Go function ACC
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
Concept
deleted and cannot be called up again:
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
▷ When the system is switched off.
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on
Displays in the instrument clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes
cluster automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
Display in the speedometer adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The
tive, the marking indicates the speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐
desired speed. lows.
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted, the marking indicates General information
the stored speed. A radar sensor is located in the front bumper and
▷ No marking: system is switched off. a camera on the interior mirror to detect vehicles
driving ahead of you.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
Indicator light control settings may change under certain condi‐
▷ Indicator light green: system is active. tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has pending on the driving mode.
been interrupted. The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
▷ No indicator light: system is switched off. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective
speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
Displays in the Head-up Display then proceeds to drive again within a brief period,
Some system information can also be displayed the system is able to detect this within the given
in the Head-up Display. system limits.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached.
235
Safety information ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving

vehicle.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
Warning
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ where appropriate.
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Overview
ate.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and With steering and traffic jam assistant:
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Cruise control on/off.
ing. With steering and traffic jam assistant:
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Select function.
against rolling away, follow the following: Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
▷ Set the parking brake. tant:
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Cruise control on/off.
Store current speed.
curb.
Speed Limit Assist: take over sug‐
gested speed manually.
wheel chock. With steering and traffic jam assistant:
Warning Continue cruise control with the last

setting.
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐ Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic tant:
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ Continue cruise control with the last
tervene where appropriate. setting.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐

tant:
Warning
Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐
ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐ Increase the distance.
ing situations: Switch distance control on/off.
236
Button Function The maximum speed that can be set is limited

and, e.g., depends on the vehicle and the vehicle
Reduce distance. equipment version.
Switch distance control on/off. The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.
Rocker switch:
Set speed.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Radar sensor
With steering and traffic jam
assistant: Assisted Driving Mode
General information
This button is used to switch the config‐
ured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri‐

marily used function.
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Set function
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed. When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired func‐
tion is selected in the function bar. The function
Camera bar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed at the
bottom of the instrument cluster.
Symbol Function
Cruise control with distance control.
Depending on the equipment ver‐

sion, cruise control with distance
control and steering and traffic jam
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. assistant.
clean and clear.
The selected function is shown in green.
Area of application The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h.
237
Switching on Interrupting automatically

With steering and traffic jam assistant: The system is automatically interrupted in the
1. Press the button on the steering ▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
wheel. ▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
2. If necessary, set the cruise control.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
Without steering and traffic jam assistant:
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened while the vehicle is standing still.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light ▷ If the system has not detected objects for an
up and the marking on the speedometer is set to extended period, for instance on a road with
the current speed. very little traffic without curb or shoulder
Cruise control is active. The current speed is markings.
maintained and stored as desired speed. ▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if for instance by dirt or heavy fog.
necessary. ▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐
hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐
Switching off tem.
To switch off the system while standing, step on
brake pedal at the same time. Setting the speed
Press the button on the steering wheel:
Maintaining and storing the speed
With steering and traffic jam assistant.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐

tant.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is

deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the steering
wheel: Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted. The system will be ac‐
With steering and traffic jam assistant.
tivated.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ The current speed is maintained and stored as
tant. desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
If interrupting the system while stationary, press eter.
on the brake pedal at the same time.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
238
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐ Reduce distance

ton.
Press the button repeatedly until the
Press the button. desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance.

Changing the speed
Increase the distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance.
Automatic adaptation of the

distance
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly ket version: the system can be adjusted so that
until the desired speed is set. the distance is automatically adjusted within the
configured distance level according to the traffic
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the situation or the ambient condition, for instance
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road poor visibility.
is clear. The adjustment of the distance is shown in the
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the display in the instrument cluster.
resistance point, the desired speed increases
1. "CAR"
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
2. "Settings"
the resistance point, the desired speed 3. "Driver Assistance"
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. 4. If necessary, "Driving"
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the 5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
action. 6. "Adjust distance acc. to situation"
Adjusting the distance Continuing cruise control

An interrupted cruise control can be continued
Safety information
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
Warning speed and stored speed is not too large before
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system tional braking or accelerating may occur.
limits, braking can be late. There may be a risk Press the button on the steering wheel with the
of accident or risk of damage to property. Be system interrupted:
aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust
the distance to the traffic and weather condi‐ With steering and traffic jam assistant.
tions and maintain the prescribed safety dis‐
tance, possibly by braking.
239
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ Displays in the instrument

tant. cluster
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
ues. General information
In the following cases, the stored speed value is Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐
deleted and cannot be called up again: plays in the instrument cluster may vary.
▷ When the system is switched off.
Display in the speedometer
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive, the marking indicates the
Changing between cruise control
desired speed.
with/without distance control
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted, the marking indicates
Safety information
the stored speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Warning
The system does not react to traffic driving
ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is
of damage to property. Adjust the desired shown.
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as Symbol Description
needed.
Distance 1
Switch mode of the cruise control

Switching cruise control without distance control
off and on:
Distance 2
▷ Press and hold this button.
▷ Press and hold this button.

With steering and traffic jam assistant: switch on
distance control: Distance 3
Press the button.
Without steering and traffic jam assistant: switch

on distance control:
▷ Press the button.

After switching, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
240
Symbol Description Indicator/warning lights

Distance 4 Symbol Description
This value is set automatically
Vehicle symbol white:
after the system is switched on.
No distance control display, as
the accelerator pedal is being
No distance control display, as pressed.
the accelerator pedal is being Green symbol:
pressed.
A vehicle has been detected
ahead of you.
The vehicle symbol goes out if
Detected vehicle no vehicle in front is detected.
Vehicle symbol flashes green:
Symbol Description Vehicle in front drove off.
Green symbol: Gray symbol:
A vehicle has been detected System interrupted.
ahead of you.
Symbol flashes gray:
The conditions are not adequate
for the system to work.
When the distance to the detected vehicle in‐
creases, the vehicle symbol in the distance dis‐ The system was deactivated but
play will move away. applies the brakes until you ac‐
tively resume control by press‐
If necessary, independent drive-off, such as by ing on the brake pedal or accel‐
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by pressing erator pedal.
the rocker switch.
Vehicle symbol flashes red and a
signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive ma‐
neuver, if necessary.
241
Alternative displays ▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.

▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected.
Symbol Description
Head-Up Display, refer to page 174.
Indicator light green: system is ▷ Distance too short.
active. ▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.
No indicator light: system is
switched off. System limits
Vehicle symbol flashes:
The conditions are not adequate
Detection range
for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but
applies the brakes until you ac‐
tively resume control by press‐
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐
erator pedal.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐

tance bars flash red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
The detection capacity of the system and the
Brake and make an evasive ma‐ automatic braking capacity are limited.
neuver, if necessary.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be
System interrupted. detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the following
situations:
Displays in the Head-up Display ▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road
users.
Desired speed ▷ Depending on the equipment, with red traffic
Some system information can also be displayed lights.
in the Head-up Display. ▷ For cross traffic.
The symbol is displayed when the set ▷ For oncoming traffic.
desired speed is reached.
Distance information
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is
too short.
The distance information is active in the follow‐

ing situations:
242
Merging vehicles
When you approach a curve the system may

briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly merges bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you
into your lane, the system may not be able to au‐ may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After
tomatically restore the selected distance. It may releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐
not be possible to restore the selected distance activated and controls speed independently.
in certain situations, including if you are driving
significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of
you, for instance when rapidly approaching a Driving off
truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reli‐ In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
ably detected, the system requests that the automatically; for example:
driver intervene by braking and carrying out eva‐
▷ On steep uphill grades.
sive maneuvers, if needed.
▷ In front of bumps in the road.
▷ With a heavy trailer.
Cornering
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
orable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
When the desired speed is too high for a curve, tions:
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves ▷ Wet conditions.
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a
curve at an appropriate speed. ▷ Snowfall.
The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐ ▷ Slush.

tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle ▷ Fog.
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐ ▷ Glare.
tected very late.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
stance by braking, steering or evading.
243
Drive power ▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go func‐

The desired speed is also maintained downhill. tion ACC.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill The speed value is suggested as the new de‐
grades if the drive power is insufficient. sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed
In ECO PRO drive mode, the vehicle may exceed value, the corresponding system must be acti‐
or drop below the set desired speed in some sit‐ vated.
uations, for instance on downhill or uphill grades.
Safety information
Malfunction
Warning
Radar sensor The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐ driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
sor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
by damage incurred, for instance during parking. system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐ fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
tem fails. driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
Have the system checked by a dealer's service
ate.
pair shop.
The system may be impaired when the detection
Warning
range of the radar sensor is partially covered
such as by the license plate holder. The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
Camera dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
The function for detecting and responding when
tervene where appropriate.
approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in
the following situations:
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately Overview
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A Buttons on the steering wheel
Check Control message is displayed.
Button Function
Speed Limit Assist Apply suggested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Concept
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit, this
new speed value can be applied for the following Switching on/off
systems: 1. "CAR"
▷ Speed Limiter. 2. "Settings"
▷ Cruise control. 3. "Driver Assistance"
244
4. If necessary, "Driving" Adapt to route

5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
6. "Speed limits" Concept
7. Select the desired setting: The system can be configured so that the vehi‐
cle adapts the speed automatically to the route.
▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limit
can be applied manually. For instance, the speed will be reduced in the
following situations, if necessary:
▷ "Show anticipation": detected speed lim‐
its are displayed in the instrument cluster ▷ Before making turns.
without being applied. ▷ Before a traffic circle.
▷ "Off": Speed Limit Assist will be switched ▷ Before a curve.
off.
Adjustment
Displays in the instrument 1. "CAR"
cluster 2. "Settings"
A message is indicated in the instrument cluster 3. "Driver Assistance"
when the system and cruise control are acti‐
4. If necessary, "Driving"
vated.
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
Symbol Function
6. "Adjust to route"
Depending on the equipment ver‐
sion, the indicator light illuminates System limits
green, together with the symbol for
Speed Limit Assist is based on the Speed Limit
a cruise control system:
Info system.
Speed Limit Assist is active and
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.
detected speed limits can be ap‐
plied manually for the displayed Upcoming speed limits can only be applied for
system. the Active Cruise Control ACC.
The system may not respond at all or with limita‐
Detected change of a speed limit
tions to the route when the navigation system is
with immediate effect.
unable to clearly identify the position of the vehi‐
cle.
Indicator light illuminates green:
the detected speed limit can be Additional information:
applied with the SET button. System limits of Speed Limit Information, refer to
After it has been applied, a green page 170.
checkmark is displayed.
Steering assistant
Manual adoption
A detected speed limit can be applied to cruise Concept
control manually.
The system assists the driver in keeping the ve‐
When the SET icon lights up, press the hicle within the lane. For this purpose, the sys‐
button. tem executes supporting steering movements,
for instance when driving in a curve.
245
General information
The system determines the position of the lane
markings and the vehicle driving ahead using five
radar sensors and a camera.
Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐
self according to the lane markings or vehicles in
front.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched. Front center bumper.
Safety information
Warning
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
Front side bumper.
ate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Steering and traffic jam assistant on/

off. Rear bumper.
Switch function on. Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
246
Camera Switching on/off
Assisted Driving Mode
General information
This button is used to switch the config‐
ured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri‐

marily used function.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror Set function
clean and clear. When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired func‐
Functional requirements tion is selected in the function bar. The function
bar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed at the
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
bottom of the instrument cluster.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane mark‐ Symbol Function
ing on both sides is detected.
Cruise control with distance control.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane marking
on both sides or a vehicle driving ahead is de‐
tected. Depending on the equipment ver‐
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim. sion, cruise control with distance
▷ Wide curves. control and steering and traffic jam
assistant.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
▷ Turn signal switched off.
▷ The sensor system calibration process is
The selected function is shown in green.
complete.
▷ Cruise control with distance control active.
rently used.
▷ Safety belt on the driver's side fastened.
▷ Approach Control Warning active. Switching on
▷ Pedestrian Warning active.
1. Press the button on the steering
▷ Side Collision Warning active.
wheel.
2. Adjust the steering and traffic jam

assistant if necessary.
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
247
System activates automatically as soon as all Displays in the instrument

function conditions are fulfilled. cluster
Steering wheel symbol lights up green.
The system is active. Symbol Description
Gray steering wheel symbol:

With the system switched on, the person warn‐
ing with City braking function and the side colli‐ The system is on standby.
sion mitigation are active.
Green steering wheel symbol:
Switching off The system is activated.

The system supports the driver
Press the button on the steering wheel.
in keeping the vehicle within the
lane.
The indicator goes out.
Yellow flashing steering wheel
The system does not perform supportive steer‐
symbol:
ing wheel movements.
Lane marking driven over.
Interrupting automatically The steering wheel vibrates
The system is automatically interrupted in the where applicable.
following situations, for example: Yellow steering wheel symbol
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h. and a signal sounds, if applica‐
▷ When the steering wheel is released. ble:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes. System interruption is imminent.
▷ When you manipulate steering. Steering wheel symbol flashes

▷ When leaving own lane. red, signal sounds:
▷ When the turn signal is switched on. System is switching off.
▷ When the lane is too narrow. Yellow steering wheel symbol:
▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is de‐ The hands are not grasping the
tected and there is no vehicle driving in front. steering wheel. The system is
▷ When Active Cruise Control ACC is inter‐ still active.
rupted. Red steering wheel symbol and
▷ If the safety belt on the driver's side is unfas‐ a signal sounds:
tened. The hands are not grasping the
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray. steering wheel. System interrup‐
tion is imminent.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering. The system reduces the speed
to a standstill if applicable.
System activates automatically as soon as all
It is possible that the system will
function conditions are fulfilled.
not execute any supporting
steering movements.
248
Alternative displays Symbol Description

Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐
Yellow steering wheel symbol:
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are
displayed as follows: The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. The system is
Symbol Description still active.
Gray steering wheel symbol:
Red steering wheel symbol and
The system is on standby.
a signal sounds:
Green steering wheel symbol: The hands are not grasping the
The system is activated. steering wheel. System interrup‐
tion is imminent.
Depending on equipment, yel‐ It is possible that the system will
low flashing steering wheel sym‐ not execute any supporting
bol: steering movements.
Lane marking driven over. With Active Cruise Control, the
The steering wheel vibrates system may reduce the speed.
where applicable.
Yellow steering wheel symbol Displays on the steering wheel

and a signal sounds, if applica‐
ble:
System interruption is imminent.
Depending on equipment, steer‐

ing wheel symbol flashes red,
signal sounds:
System is switching off.
Green steering wheel symbol

and lane marking symbol: The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate
The system supports the driver analogously to the displays in the instrument
in keeping the vehicle within the cluster:
lane. ▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent.
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
The steering wheel displays can be switched

on/off if required.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
5. "Light elements"
249
Displays in the Head-up Display ▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane mark‐
ings.
All system information can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display. ▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already recognized.
System limits Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
tions:
General information ▷ Wet conditions.
The system cannot be activated or meaningfully ▷ Snowfall.
used in certain situations. ▷ Slush.
▷ Fog.
Safety information
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
Warning
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
The system is designed to operate in certain stance by braking, steering or evading.
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ Driver Attention Camera
of damage to property. Actively intervene as Always monitor the traffic conditions.
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ The Driver Attention Camera detects whether or
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ not the driver is paying attention to the traffic
tem’s operation and limitations. conditions.
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
functional in the following situations:
Hands on the steering wheel
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering wheel by the steering wheel rim.
contact in the following situations:
▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐
▷ Driving with gloves. able sunglasses.
▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
Narrow lanes Extended Traffic Jam

When driving within narrow lanes, the system Assistant
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐
stance in the following situations:
Concept
▷ In construction areas.
Extended Traffic Jam Assistant supports the
▷ Depending on the equipment, with automatic driver with vehicle control in traffic jam situations.
formation of emergency lanes.
Steering support takes place without the driver
▷ Within city limits. actively steering.
Weather General information

The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐ The system uses the sensors of the steering and
orable weather or light conditions: lane control assistant.
250
Safety information Traffic Jam Assistant must be available in the

respective country.
Warning
Switching on
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the As soon as all functional requirements
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the are met, Extended Traffic Jam Assistant
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ will be displayed as an additional symbol
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust in the function bar. The toolbar is dis‐
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the played at the bottom of the instrument
traffic situation closely, be ready to take over cluster.
steering and braking at any time, and actively
Select Extended Traffic Jam Assistant
intervene where appropriate.
with the button on the steering wheel.
State laws differ and the use of this function may The symbol for Extended Traffic Jam Assistant
violate the law. Before use, check your state and is shown in green.
local laws. Two green LED lights are illuminated on the
Additionally, the notices for the Steering and steering wheel.
Lane Control Assistant apply. The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
Additional information: shown in green.
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to The system begins to assist the driver with vehi‐
page 245. cle control.
Functional requirements Displays in the instrument

▷ The functional requirements of the steering cluster
and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled.
Functional requirements, refer to page 247. Symbol Description
▷ The steering and traffic jam assistant is ac‐ Indicator light green: system is
tive. active.
▷ The function is only available on certain street
types, e.g. freeways. Indicator light white: system is
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐ ready.
clists.
Gray indicator light: the system
▷ Sufficient lane width. has been interrupted.
▷ Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead
are detected.
▷ Speed less than approx. 40 mph/60 km/h. Alternative displays
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru‐ Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐
ment cluster detects that the driver is paying plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are
attention to the traffic. displayed as follows:
▷ When traveling to countries outside of the

country of origin of the vehicle, Extended
251
Indicator Description Safety information

light
Indicator light green: system is Warning

active. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
Displays on the steering wheel system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
ate.
Additionally, the notices for the Steering and

Lane Control Assistant apply.
The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate page 245.
analogously to the displays in the instrument
cluster: Functional requirements
▷ Green: the system is active. ▷ The functional requirements of the steering
▷ Yellow: system will be interrupted. and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled.
▷ Red: system will be deactivated. Functional requirements, refer to page 247.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐
clists and with physical barriers to oncoming
System limits
traffic, such as crash barriers.
The limits of the Steering and Lane Control As‐
▷ Lane markings have been detected.
sistant system apply.
▷ Maximum speed approx. 110 mph, 180 km/h.
▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.
Depending on the
equipment version: Switch lane change assist on/off
Automatic Lane Change 1. "CAR"
Assistant 2. "Settings"
Concept 4. If necessary, "Driving"

5. "Steering Assistance"
The system additionally supports the driver when
changing lanes on multilane roads. 6. "Automatic Lane Change"
General information Changing lanes

The system uses the sensors of the steering and 1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits
lane control assistant. changing lanes.
252
2. Press the turn indicator lever in the required Displays in the instrument
direction to the pressure point for signaling cluster
briefly.
Steering support in the required direction can Symbol Description
be detected a short time later.
Green steering wheel symbol.
Green arrow symbol for lane-
changing.
The system carries out a lane
change.
Green steering wheel symbol.

Gray line for lane marking on the
appropriate side.
The system detected the lane
After the lane change, the system helps keep the
change request. Lane change
vehicle in the new lane.
not currently possible.
Canceling a lane change Depending on country specifica‐

The lane change can be canceled by steering tions:
movement into the opposite direction. Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray arrow symbol for lane-
changing.
Lane change not possible; func‐
tional requirements not met.
Alternative displays
Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are
displayed as follows:
253
Symbol Description Depending on the

Green steering wheel symbol. equipment version: lane
Gray line for lane marking on the change with active
appropriate side.
Green arrow symbol for lane-
guidance
changing.
The system carries out a lane
Concept
change. The system assists the driver when lane
changes are necessary to reach a navigation
Green steering wheel symbol. destination.
Gray line for lane marking on the
appropriate side. General information
No arrow symbol for lane- The system uses the sensors of the steering and
changing on the display. lane control assistant.
The system detected the lane
change request. Lane change Safety information
not currently possible.
Depending on country specifica‐ Warning

tions: The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
Green steering wheel symbol. driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
Gray line for lane marking on the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
appropriate side. system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
Gray arrow symbol for lane-
changing.
Lane change not possible; func‐ ate.
tional requirements not met.
Additionally, the notices for the Active Cruise
System limits Control and the Steering and Lane Control As‐
sistant apply.
The limits of the Steering and Lane Control As‐
sistant system apply. Additional information:
Active Cruise Control, refer to page 235.
page 245.
▷ Active Cruise Control is activated.
▷ Driving on a highway or highway-like road.
▷ Lane markings on the side of the desired lane
change detected.
▷ Navigation system: guidance is activated.
254
▷ Adaptation to route details is activated. 5. "Speed Limit Assistance"

▷ The function must be available in the country 6. "Adjust to route"
in which the vehicle is driven.
System limits
Changing lanes The limits of the Active Cruise Control and
1. One or more lane changes are required to Steering and Lane Control Assistant systems ap‐
reach a navigation destination. ply.
The system prepares for this lane change.
For this purpose, the system determines a
suitable opening in the traffic flow on the next PDC Park Distance Control
lane.
2. When a gap is detected, the speed is Concept
adapted so that the vehicle remains at the PDC is a support when parking. Objects that you
level of the opening. are approaching slowly in front of or behind the
3. A Check Control message indicates a lane vehicle are indicated by signal tones and a dis‐
change suggestion. play on the Control Display.
4. When the traffic situation permits a lane Depending on the equipment version: obstacles
change, the driver can steer the vehicle into at the side of the vehicle that are detected by the
the next lane. side ultrasonic sensors may also be reported by
When equipped with Automatic Lane Change the side parking aid.
Assistant: after the Check Control message
has been displayed, a lane change can be ini‐ General information
tiated by operating the turn signal. The ultrasound sensors for distance measure‐
ments are located in the bumpers and possibly
Display in the instrument cluster on the sides of the vehicle.
The suggestion for the lane change is displayed The range, depending on obstacles and environ‐
and a green checkmark indicates the active func‐ mental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
tion. An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ pending collision at a distance to the object of
ket version, the traffic situation is displayed in the approx. 27 in/70 cm.
Assisted Driving View of the instrument cluster. For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
More information: Assisted Driving View, refer to warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐
page 157. ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Activate adaptation to route Safety information

details
1. "CAR" Warning
2. "Settings" The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
3. "Driver Assistance" driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
4. If necessary, "Driving"
255
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic Switching on/off

ate. Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Warning
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance the engine is running.
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐
▷ Depending on the equipment version: while
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a
approaching detected obstacles if the speed
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
activation distance depends on the situation
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
in question.
is not yet active.
You may switch automatic activation when ob‐
stacles are detected on and off.
Overview 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC Activation"
6. "Automatic PDC Activation"
rently used.
Depending on equipment, an additional camera
view is also switched on.
Park assistance button Automatic deactivation during

forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
Ultrasound sensors
distance or speed is exceeded.
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, Switch the system back on, if needed.
for instance in the bumpers.
Press the park assistance button.
Functional requirements ▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐ ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
ers, bicycle racks or similar. The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
assistance button.
256
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐ Visual warning

tem cannot be switched off manually if the re‐
verse gear is engaged.
Warning
Signal tones
General information
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is The approach of the vehicle to an object is
detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
tone sounds from the left rear speaker. farther away are already displayed on the Control
The shorter the distance to the object, the Display before a signal sounds.
shorter the intervals.
The display appears as soon as PDC is activated.
When the distance to a detected object is less
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is The range of the sensors is represented in the
sounded. colors green, yellow and red when obstacles are
detected.
When there are objects in front of and behind the
vehicle at the same time, with a distance smaller Lanes are faded in for better estimation of the re‐
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating constant quired space.
tone will sound. When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
The intermittent tone and constant tone are played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
switched off if the selector lever position P is en‐ different view with obstacle markings as needed:
gaged. 1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed.
The intermittent tone is switched off after a short 2. For instance "Park. sensors only"
time when the vehicle is stationary.
Cross traffic warning: depending on the equip‐
Volume ment, it is warned in the PDC display against ve‐
hicles approaching in the front or rear from the
The PDC signal tone volume can be adjusted. side.
1. "CAR" Additional information:
2. "Settings" Cross traffic warning, refer to page 278.
4. "Parking and Maneuvering" System limits
5. "Volume PDC signal"
Safety information
6. Set the desired value.
Warning
rently used.
257
of damage to property. Actively intervene as ▷ With small and low objects, for instance
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ boxes.
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ ▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
tem’s operation and limitations. the lane.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
Trailer towing foam material.
With a trailer, a trailer power socket in use or ▷ With plants and bushes.
when trailer towing is activated, the rear PDC ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
functions will be switched off. curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
White symbol is displayed.
sounds.
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the range of the sensors is shown as a
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
shaded area on the Control Display.
system.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement False warnings

The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐ The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐
following situations: cle within the detection range:
▷ For small children and animals. ▷ In heavy rain.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
coats. ice.
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound, ▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
for instance from passing vehicles or loud ▷ On rough road surfaces.
machines.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
or out of position.
smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high rages.
relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall,
▷ In automatic car washes.
cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles. ▷ When the trailer hitch cover is not on straight.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
▷ With moving objects.
cleaners or neon lights.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
To prevent false alarms, switch off automatic
ledges.
Park Distance Control PDC activation on obsta‐
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and cle detection, for instance in automatic car
smooth surfaces. washes.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences. Malfunction
▷ For objects with porous surfaces. A Check Control message is displayed.
258
White symbol is displayed, and the range Safety information

of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display.
Warning
PDC Park Distance Control has failed. Have the The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
system checked by a dealer's service center or driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
another qualified service center or repair shop. traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
Depending on equipment tively intervene where appropriate.
version: emergency brake
Additionally, the Safety Instructions for the PDC
function, Active PDC Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking
Assistant apply.
Concept Additional information:
The emergency braking function of PDC initiates ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
an emergency braking in case of acute risk of page 255.
collision.
▷ Parking assistant, refer to page 271.
General information
Temporary switching off
This function may not be available. Contact your
The emergency brake function can be switched
authorized dealer’s service center or another
off temporarily:
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when Confirm the message on the Control Display.
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future. During continued driving in this surrounding sit‐
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐ uation, no further emergency braking will occur.
vented under all circumstances.
The function is available below walking speed Settings
when driving in reverse or rolling backward. It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle will
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the be protected by the system.
brake intervention. 1. "CAR"
After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐ 2. "Settings"
ing toward an obstacle is possible. Proceed with
caution. To move forward, lightly press the accel‐
erator pedal and release as needed. 4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer, the 5. "Active PDC with braking interv."
vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possible at 6. Select the desired setting.
any time. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of the rently used.
Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking As‐
sistant. System limits
The limits of the systems of the Park Distance
Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply.
259
The system cannot be used in the following sit‐ Display

uations, for example:
▷ When Hill Descent Control is active, the
emergency braking function is deactivated.
Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to page 228.
▷ When driving with a trailer.
If required, deactivate the system via iDrive
where applicable.
With Parking Assistant: To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle

markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐
side parking aid cle.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐
Concept stacles.
The system warns of obstacles on the side of ▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles
the vehicle. were detected.
▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the
General information vehicle was not yet captured.
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of the
Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking As‐
sistant. Limits of the side parking aid
The system only displays stationary obstacles
Safety information that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
Warning
moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the markings are shown in black after a certain time.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. tured.
The side parking aid is not available when the
trailer socket is occupied or trailer towing is acti‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
vated.
Additionally, the Safety Instructions for the PDC Additionally, the limits of the systems of the Park
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking Distance Control PDC and the Parking Assistant
Assistant apply. apply.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
page 255.
260
Without Surround View: Camera

rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
Additionally, assistance functions can be shown
in the display, e.g., help lines. The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
Safety information The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Switching on/off
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Switching on automatically
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch The system is switched on automatically if selec‐
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐ tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
tively intervene where appropriate. is running.
Automatic deactivation during

Overview
forward travel
Depending on the vehicle The system switches off when a certain driving
equipment: button in the vehicle
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Depending on the vehicle

equipment: switching on/off
manually
▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Park assistance button The parking assistance functions are shown on
261
Switching the view via iDrive Parking aid lines

If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive: Pathway lines
1. If necessary, tilt the controller to the side.

2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
open. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and
trailers that are not connected to a trailer Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
power socket can restrict the visibility range quired when parking and maneuvering on level
of the camera. roads.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and
Display on the Control Display are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
movements.
Function bars
The assistance functions can be activated man‐ Turning radius lines
ually via the function bars on the sides of the
Control Display.
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
2. With corresponding equipment:
"Camera image"
3. ▷ "Parking aid lines".
Pathway lines and turning radius lines are
displayed.
▷ "Obstacle mark.". Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the on the camera image together with pathway
obstacles detected by PDC Park Distance lines.
Control are displayed by markings. Turning radius lines show the course of the
Zoom on trailer hitch: smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
2. "Trailer hitch".
A zoomed image of the trailer hitch is shown.
Parking using pathway and turning radius
More than one assistance function can be active lines
at the same time.
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐
dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐
ing space.
262
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where Setting brightness and contrast
the green pathway line covers the corre‐ via iDrive
sponding turning radius line.
With the rearview camera switched on:
Obstacle marking 1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
2. "Camera image"
3. To perform the desired setting:
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
System limits
Deactivated camera
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles When the camera is deactivated, for instance
behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park when the tailgate is open, the camera image is
Distance Control sensors. displayed hatched in gray.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera. Detection of objects
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance objects such as ledges may not be detected by
Control. the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
sistance functions also consider data from the
Zoom on trailer hitch PDC Park Distance Control.
To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.
trol chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
With Parking Assistant

Plus: Surround View
Two static circle segments show the distance Concept

between the trailer and the trailer hitch. The system provides assistance in parking and
A docking line dependent on the steering angle maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
helps with aiming for the trailer with the trailer shown on the Control Display.
hitch.
When zooming in, remember that the view may General information
no longer show certain obstacles. Several cameras capture the area from different
selectable perspectives.
263
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐ Overview

played:
▷ Automatic camera perspective: the system Buttons in the vehicle
shows the camera perspective suitable for
the respective driving situation.
▷ Rearview camera: for representing the areas
behind the vehicle.
▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view: for repre‐
senting the areas on the sides of the vehicle.
▷ Unobstructed camera perspective, movable
via iDrive.
▷ Panorama View: to present cross traffic, for
instance at junctions and driveways, depend‐ Park assistance button
ing on the currently engaged gear.
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround‐ Panorama View
ings or a part of it is depicted.
Additionally, assistance functions are shown in
the display, e.g., help lines. Cameras
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Some assistance functions can be manually acti‐
vated.
The following assistance functions are automati‐
cally displayed:
▷ Side parking aid.
▷ Door opening angle.
Front camera
Safety information
Warning
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
tively intervene where appropriate.
Rearview camera
264
Display on the Control Display
Overview
One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐

terior mirror housing.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on the

camera lenses. If required, clean the camera 1 Function bar, left
lenses. 2 Camera image
3 Side view
Switching on/off
4 Automatic camera perspective
Switching on automatically 5 Movable unobstructed camera perspective
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐ 6 Function bar, right
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine 7 Rearview camera
is running.
8 Selection window
The camera perspective suitable for the respec‐
tive driving situation is displayed.
Function bar on the left
The left function bar can be used for the direct
Switching on/off, refer to page 256.
selection of various views via iDrive. Move the
Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ "Car wash".
▷ "Parking": around the vehicle.
▷ "3D view": available camera.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ "Trailer hitch".
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera cannot be switched off if Side view
the reverse gear is engaged.
The side view can be selected for the right or left
vehicle side.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel This view helps when positioning the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side by
The system switches off when a certain driving
displaying the side surroundings.
The side view looks from rear to front and in case
Switch the system back on, if needed.
of danger, focuses automatically on possible ob‐
stacles.
265
Automatic camera perspective ▷ "Parking aid lines".

The automatic camera perspective shows a ▷ "Obstacle mark.".
steering-dependent view in the respective driv‐ ▷ "Settings": apply settings, for instance to
ing direction. use the activation points for Panorama View.
This perspective adapts to the respective driving
situation. Rearview camera
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view This view shows the picture of the rearview cam‐
changes to a fixed display of the area in front or era.
at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary,
changes to a side view. Selection window
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic The individual camera perspectives can be se‐
camera perspective is closed and the system lected in the selection window via iDrive.
uses a fixed perspective of the rearview camera.
If necessary, manually select the automatic cam‐ Parking aid lines
era perspective when reverse gear is engaged.
The automatic camera perspective will be re‐ Pathway lines
tained for the current parking maneuver.
Movable unobstructed camera

perspective
With selection of the movable camera perspec‐
tive, a circle appears on the Control Display.
By turning the Controller or via touch function,
specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐
lected.
The current perspective is marked with a camera Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
symbol. quired when parking and maneuvering on level
To leave the function, move the Controller side‐ roads.
ways and select another camera function. Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and
With xOffroad package: when an xOffroad driving are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
mode is activated, terrain-specific views will be movements.
displayed.
Function bar on the right

Assistance functions can be activated and set‐
tings can be entered via the right function bar via
iDrive. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
▷ "Autom. Parking".
▷ "Back-up Assistant".
▷ "Camera image":
▷ "Brightness".
▷ "Contrast".
266
Turning radius lines The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings

match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control.
Car wash view
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed

on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road. The car wash view assists when entering a car
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the wash by displaying the floor and the vehicle's
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle. own track.
Parking using pathway and turning radius Zoom on trailer hitch

lines To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐ zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.
dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐
ing space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
Two static circle segments show the distance

between the trailer and the trailer hitch.
A docking line dependent on the steering angle
helps with aiming for the trailer with the trailer
hitch.
When zooming in, remember that the view may
no longer show certain obstacles.
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the
PDC Park Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the camera
image.
267
Side parking aid
Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
Display
The maximum opening angle of the doors is dis‐

played in selector lever position P.
As soon as the vehicle begins moving, the open‐

ing angles are replaced by parking aid lines.
Limits of the display

The vehicle's surroundings are displayed with
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle distorted image for technical reasons.
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐ Even if the symbols for the door opening angles
cle. do not cross other objects on the Control Dis‐
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected. play, the following needs to be noted when park‐
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐ ing next to other objects:
stacles. Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
Limits of the side parking aid Control Display.
The system only displays stationary obstacles

that were previously detected by sensors while
Panorama View
passing them.
Concept
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
moves later on. For this reason, at standstill, the
markings are not shown anymore in the display
after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle
must be newly captured.
Door opening angle
Concept
If obstacle marking is activated, the system indi‐
cates fixed obstacles that obstruct the opening The system provides an early look at cross traffic
angles of the doors. at blind driveways and intersections.
The system does not provide a warning of ap‐
proaching traffic. General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected rel‐
268
atively late from the driver's seat. The cameras in Storing activation points
the front and rear capture the sideways traffic 1. Drive to the position at which the system is to
area to improve the view. be switched on, and stop.
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the front
and rear end of the vehicle. 2. Press the button.
The camera image shows different levels of dis‐ 3. Move the Controller to the right.
tortion in some areas and is thus not suitable for 4. "Activation point"
distance estimations.
The current position is displayed.
Depending on the equipment version, the func‐
5. "Save activation point"
tion can only be used when driving forward.
Activation points are, if possible, stored with
Display on the Control Display town/city and street address, or else with the
GPS coordinates.
Press the button when the engine is run‐
ning. Using activation points
Depending on the driving direction, the image of The use of activation points can be switched on
the respective camera is displayed: and off.
▷ "Front": front camera image.
▷ "Rear": rear camera image. 1. Press the button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, cross traf‐ 2. Move the Controller to the right.
fic warning can additionally warn of approaching 3. "Settings"
vehicles using radar sensors. 4. "Panorama View, GPS-based"
Additional information: 5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 278. when set activation points are reached."
With navigation system: activation Displaying activation points

points
Concept 2. Move the Controller to the right.
Positions where Panorama View should switch 3. "Manage points"
on automatically can be stored as activation A list of all activation points is displayed.
points provided that a GPS signal is received.
Renaming or deleting activation points
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored. 1. Press the button.
Activation points can be used when driving for‐ 2. Move the Controller to the right.
ward for the front camera. 3. "Manage points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
4. Select an activation point as needed.
▷ "Rename"
269
▷ "Delete activation point" The objects displayed on the Control Display

▷ "Delete all activation points" may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
Setting brightness and contrast Additional information:
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 255.
Surround View or Panorama View switched on.
Malfunction
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Control
2. "Camera image"
Display.
A yellow symbol is displayed and the re‐
▷ "Brightness" cording range of the malfunctioning cam‐
▷ "Contrast" era is displayed in black on the Control
Display.
The system can be used only to a limited extent
in the following situations: With Parking Assistant
▷ In poor light. Plus: Remote 3D View
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ With a door open. Concept
▷ With the tailgate open. The BMW Connected app and the pictures of
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in. the Surround View cameras in combination with
Gray hatched areas with symbol, for instance the corresponding equipment enable the display
open door, in the camera image mark areas that of the vehicle’s surroundings on a mobile device.
are currently not displayed. The function displays a momentary view of the
situation.
System limits
Non-visible areas ▷ Data transmission must be activated.
Because of the camera angle, the areas under Data protection, refer to page 64.
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras. ▷ BMW Connected App must be installed on
the mobile device.
Detection of objects
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: an activated driver
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding profile with an existing ConnectedDrive ac‐
objects such as ledges may not be detected by count is required.
the system.
Driver profiles, refer to page 65.
Some assistance functions also consider data
from the PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol chapter.
270
Switching the function on/off ▷ When other camera functions are being per‐
formed in the vehicle.
Switching on/off with other ▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walking
functions speed.
1. "CAR" ▷ It may not be possible to use the function in
2. "Settings" every country.
3. "General settings" ▷ For reasons of data protection, the function

can only be used three times within two
4. "Data privacy" hours.
▷ "All services incl. analysis"
▷ "All vehicle services"
With Parking Assistant:
Parking Assistant
Switching on/off individually
Concept
Pre-adjustment
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Select services individually"
6. "Connected App and cust. portal"
7. "Remote 3D View"
The system supports the driver in the following
Switching on/off situations:
1. "CAR" ▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel
2. "Settings" parking.
3. "General settings" ▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the road,
4. "Data privacy" diagonal parking. The system orients itself
with the middle of the parking space during
5. "Individual selection"
diagonal parking.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
driving out of parallel parking spaces.
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
General information
▷ In poor light.
▷ In case of soiled cameras. Handling
▷ With a door or the tailgate open. Dark fields in Parking assistant handling is divided into three
the display indicate areas that are not re‐ steps:
corded by the system. ▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in. ▷ Parking space search.
271
▷ Parking.
System status and instructions on required ac‐ NOTICE
tions are displayed on the Control Display. The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to
both sides of the vehicle. property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
The safety information of the PDC Park Distance
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
Control applies in addition.
ble parking line and takes control of the following
functions during the parking operation: Additional information:
▷ Steering. PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 255.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
Overview
▷ Changing gears.
The parking operation is automatic. Button in the vehicle
Safety information
Warning
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic Park assistance button
ate.
Ultrasound sensors
Warning
If the trailer hitch is used, the driver assistance
system can cause damage due to covered sen‐
sors. There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. The driver assistance sys‐
tem should not be used during trailer towing or
if the trailer hitch is used, for instance bicycle
rack.
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows,
and the ultrasound sensors in the bumpers, the
parking spaces are measured and the distances
to obstacles determined.
272
Functional requirements The current status of the parking space search is

indicated on the Control Display.
Ultrasound sensors Parking assistant is activated automatically.
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers. Switching on with reverse gear
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. 1. Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space
For measuring parking spaces search is indicated on the Control Display.
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 2. If necessary, activate: "Autom. Parking"
22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: Switching on via iDrive
5 ft/1.5 m. Display of the rearview camera or PDC view
must be active.
Suitable parking space
General information:
2. Activate the parking assistant on the Control
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
Display: "Autom. Parking"
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum Display on the Control Display
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road: System activated/deactivated
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your
vehicle's length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m. Sym‐ Meaning
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. bol
Diagonal parking: Gray: the system is not available.

▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's White: the system is available but not
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m. activated.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length. System is activated.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
Parking space search is active.
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical
limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐ The parking procedure is active. The
mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces. system takes over the steering.
For the parking operation

▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.
Switching on with the button

The LED lights up.
273
Parking space search and system The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
status rently used.
Signal tones of the PDC Park

Distance Control
During an automatic parking operation, no inter‐
mittent tone will sound from the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control.
A continuous tone sounds when the distance to
a detected object is less than approx. 8 in‐
ches/20 cm.
▷ Parking assistant is activated and parking
space search is active. Parking using the parking
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking assistant
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐
hicle symbol. When Park Assistant is active, Parking
suitable parking spaces are highlighted and 1. Switching on and activating the parking assis‐
an acoustic signal sounds. tant.
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly For this, engage the reverse gear or press the
detected, the system automatically adjusts parking assist button and activate the system
the suitable parking method. In the case of on the Control Display, if needed.
parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐
nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In Parking assistant is activated.
this case, the desired parking method must 2. Pass the row of parked vehicles forward at a
be selected manually. speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and
▷ The parking procedure is active. The sys‐ at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
tem takes over the steering. The status of the parking space search and
▷ Parking space search is always active when‐ possible parking spaces are displayed on the
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and Control Display.
straight, even if the system is deactivated. 3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the
When the system is deactivated, the displays parking operation: select the parking space
on the Control Display are shown in gray. on the Control Display.
The system takes over the steering.
Switching signal tone for 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
suitable parking spaces on/off play.
1. "CAR" At the end of the parking operation, the P se‐
2. "Settings" lector lever position is set.
3. "Driver Assistance" The end of the parking operation is indicated
on the Control Display.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
5. "Automatic Parking"
needed.
6. "Alert if parking space detected"
274
Interrupting manually Switching off

The parking assistant can be interrupted at any The system can be switched off manually:
time:
▷ Press the park assistance button.
▷ "Autom. Parking": select the symbol on System limits

Safety information
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
Warning
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
surfaces. of damage to property. Actively intervene as
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
overcome, such as curbs. er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐ tem’s operation and limitations.
pear.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays No parking assistance
clearances that are too small.
The parking assistant does not offer assistance
▷ When a maximum number of parking at‐ in the following situations:
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex‐
ceeded.
▷ When towing a trailer.
▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display. ▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
▷ If the tailgate is open.
▷ If doors are open.
▷ When setting the parking brake. lowing situations:
▷ During acceleration. ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an roads.
extended period while the vehicle is station‐ ▷ On slippery ground.
ary.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
A Check Control message is displayed. parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
Resuming
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
An interrupted parking procedure can be contin‐
parking space.
ued, if needed.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
Reactivate the parking assistant and follow the
of a port.
instructions on the Control Display.
275
▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may be drive out of the parking space without further
detected or suitable parking spaces may not steering movements.
be detected at all.
Safety information
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐ Warning
urements can run into physical limits.
The limits of the ultrasonic measurement of the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
Park Distance Control PDC apply. traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
Additional information: system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 255. fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
Malfunction closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer's service center or another
Warning
qualified service center or repair shop.
Depending on the sors. There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. The driver assistance sys‐
equipment version: driving tem should not be used during trailer towing or
out of a parking space if the trailer hitch is used, for instance bicycle
rack.
using the parking assistant
Additionally, the Safety Instructions for the PDC
Concept Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking
The system makes driving out of parallel parking Assistant apply.
spaces easier. Additional information:
General information page 255.
The parking assistant calculates an optimal line Functional requirements
for pulling out of a parking space and takes con‐
▷ The vehicle was parked manually and objects
trol of the following functions during the maneu‐
in front of and behind the car are detected.
ver:
The distance to a detected curb is at least
▷ Steering. 6 inches/15 cm.
▷ Accelerating and braking. ▷ The vehicle was parked using the parking as‐
▷ Changing gears. sistant and an object is detected in front of
the vehicle.
The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the
vehicle reaches a position in which the driver can ▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m lon‐
ger than your vehicle.
276
▷ The vehicle has been parked in reverse. General information

The system takes control of the steering when
Driving out of parking spaces driving in reverse along the stored route.
1. Switch on drive-ready state. The driver controls driving the vehicle via accel‐
2. Steptronic transmission: erator pedal and brake.
Press the park assistance button or shift into The Reversing Assistant uses the control ele‐
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary to ments and sensors of the PDC Park Distance
switch on the parking assistant. Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant.
3. Tilt the controller to the right and activate the Additional information:
parking assistant on the Control Display: ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
"Autom. Parking" page 255.
4. On the Control Display, confirm the required ▷ Parking assistant, refer to page 271.
direction for driving out of the parking space if
necessary.
Safety information
5. Steptronic transmission:
The system takes control of the maneuver. A
Warning
message will be displayed at the end of the
maneuver. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
6. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
driving out of the parking space and drive off
as usual.
The parking assistant is switched off auto‐ driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
matically. closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
System limits
The limits of the systems of the Park Distance
Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply. Warning
With Parking Assistant: sors. There may be a risk of accident or risk of
Reversing Assistant damage to property. The driver assistance sys‐
tem should not be used during trailer towing or
if the trailer hitch is used, for instance bicycle
Concept rack.
The system supports the driver when driving in
reverse, for instance when driving out of tight or Additionally, the Safety Instructions for the PDC
confusing parking or street situations. Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking
The vehicle stores the driving movements of the Assistant apply.
last route. This stored route can be driven back Additional information:
with automated steering.
page 255.
277
Functional requirements ▷ During activation or intervention by driving

control systems or assist systems.
▷ Drive forward without interruption to store the
route. ▷ After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
▷ A maximum of 165 ft/50 m will be stored.
▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐
▷ To store the route, do not exceed a driving
versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐
speed of 22 mph/36 km/h.
ing angle.
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is activated.
▷ When the display on the Control Display is
cross-faded with messages, e.g., due to in‐
Driving back with automated coming calls.
steering
1. Press the park assistance button or shift into System limits
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary ▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you
and the drive-ready state is switched on. encounter an obstacle, stop immediately and
2. Move the Controller to the right. take over control of the vehicle.
3. "Back-up Assistant" ▷ The maximum speed for driving in reverse is
The system takes over the steering. limited to approximately 6 mph/9 km/h.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Display If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warning
where required. is issued and the function may be canceled.
5. Take your hands off the steering wheel and ▷ Additionally, the limits of the systems of the
carefully drive off with the accelerator pedal Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking
and the brake. Assistant apply.
When driving in reverse, pay attention to the Different influences can lead to side deviations
vehicle's surroundings, and if you encounter when driving back on the stored route. For exam‐
an obstacle, stop immediately and take over ple, this includes the following factors:
control of the vehicle. Follow the instructions ▷ Steering movements when the vehicle is sta‐
on the PDC Park Distance Control. tionary while storing the distance covered.
6. Stop no later than when normal traffic is ▷ The speed is not adapted to the distance
reached and take control of the vehicle, such traveled.
as by shifting to a forward gear. ▷ Road characteristics, such as gradients or in‐
At the end of the stored route, a signal will clines.
sound and a request will be displayed, also
with the instruction to take control of the ve‐
hicle. Cross traffic warning
Terminating the system Concept
The system automatically cancels in situations At blind driveways or when driving out of diago‐
such as the following: nal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic is
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or detected sooner by the system than is possible
takes over steering. from the driver's seat.
▷ When engaging a forward gear.
278
General information Park assistance button
Radar sensors
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor

the area behind the vehicle.
The system indicates approaching traffic.
The radar sensors are located in the rear
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the traffic bumper.
area in front of the vehicle is monitored as well.
Two additional radar sensors are located in the
front bumpers.
Safety information
Warning
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Depending on the vehicle equipment, two addi‐
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch tional radar sensors are located in the front
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ bumpers.
propriate.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
Overview
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the system
With the button
1. Press the park assistance button.

3. "Settings"
4. "Cross Traffic Warning"
5. "Activate function"
279
Via iDrive Light in the exterior mirror

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
5. "Cross Traffic Warning"
6. "Activate function"
If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐ The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as are detected by the rear sensors and your own
PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View is vehicle is moving backwards.
active and a gear is engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is Display in the PDC Park Distance
switched on. Control view
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front
system is switched on when a forward gear is
engaged.
Switching off automatically

The system is automatically switched off in the
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷ When a certain driving distance is exceeded.
▷ With an active parking operation of the park‐ In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐
ing assistant. spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles
are detected by the sensors.
Warning
Display in the camera view
General information
The respective display is called up on the Con‐
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the
light in the exterior mirror may flash.
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the

camera view flashes red, if vehicles are detected
by the sensors.
280
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your

own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐
nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐
spective direction.
System limits
lowing situations:
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is very
high.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
▷ If the field of view of the sensors is covered,
e.g., by garage walls, hedges or snow hills.
▷ When crossing objects move at a very slow
speed.
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the
sensors, that hide cross traffic.
If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐
ing is activated, for instance during operation
with trailer or bicycle rack, cross traffic warning is
not available for the area behind the vehicle.
281
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and ▷ With the rocker switch in the center con‐
sole.
options ▷ With the BMW display key.
▷ With the button in the lower section of the
tailgate.
It also describes features and functions that are The vehicle will adjust according to the se‐
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due lected driving mode at drive-off.
to the selected options or country versions. This ▷ Sport level:
Lowest driving level for driving at higher
speeds.
served. ▷ Normal level:
Standard level for normal roads and speeds.
▷ High level 1:
Chassis components Slightly elevated vehicle level for easy terrain
at reduced speed.
The chassis components are optimized for the
vehicle and its scope of application and thereby If necessary, the vehicle will be lowered at
ensure the best possible Driving Dynamics. higher speeds.
▷ High level 2:
Highest driving level for terrains with major
Two-axle ride level control uneven surfaces in the lowest speed range.
If necessary, the vehicle will be lowered at
Concept higher speeds.
Air suspension ensures best possible driving Level adjustment takes place when all doors are
comfort under all load conditions. Due to a varia‐ closed.
ble adjustment of the front and rear axles, the
damping is adjusted to the vehicle state. Safety information
General information
Warning
Regardless of the load, the vehicle will be main‐
tained at the configured vehicle level. Adjusting the vehicle height may result in trap‐
ped body parts or damaged vehicle parts.
Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
level can be set to five levels.
property. When adjusting the vehicle height,
▷ Entry level: make sure that the areas of movement around
Lowest vehicle level setting. the vehicle and at the wheel housing are free.
The entry level can be set when the vehicle is
stationary with the following features:
282
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Overview ▷ LED on the rocker switch flashes fast: the se‐

lected level is not possible at this time.
Rocker switch in the vehicle ▷ All LEDs on the rocker switch are flashing:
system is initializing. The selected level will
be adjusted after the initialization where re‐
quired.
Automatic
While driving
In the SPORT driving mode, SPORT+ driving
mode or at higher speeds, the vehicle lowers it‐
self automatically.
Setting the level When a set vehicle level is exited due to the
speed, the vehicle level will be adjusted accord‐
With the rocker switch in the center ing to the selected driving mode.
console
In the event of a flat tire
When a loss of the tire inflation pressure is de‐
tected on a wheel, the wheel load will be reduced
automatically to increase the possible range of
travel. In this situation, only the normal level is
available.
With the BMW display key
Concept
Up The vehicle level can be adjusted with the BMW
display key when the vehicle is stationary, for in‐
Push the rocker switch forward.
stance for easier loading or as an entry aid.
In the low speed range, the vehicle is raised to
next higher level when the rocker switch is Setting the level
pressed.
1. Apply parking brake and switch drive-ready
state off using the Start/Stop button.
Down
2. Closing the doors.
Pull the rocker switch backward.
3. If necessary, switch on the display on the
The vehicle will lower by one level.
BMW display key and cancel the display lock.
Display BMW display key, refer to page 82.
▷ LED on the rocker switch lights up: display of 4. On the BMW display key, change to the fol‐
the current level. lowing menu: "Entry level".
▷ LED on the rocker switch is flashing: adjust‐ 5. "Height control"
ment procedure active. The vehicle raises or 6. ▷ "Lower": tap the button. The vehicle low‐
lowers itself. ers itself to the entry level.
283
For safety reasons, lowering is only possi‐ prevent overheating and is temporarily un‐
ble from the normal level or the Sport available or operates with a delay. Let the
level. system cool, if needed.
▷ "Raise": tap the button. The vehicle will The rapidly flashing LED on the rocker switch
raise itself from the entry level according indicates that the system is unavailable.
to the selected drive mode. ▷ If the load is increased, the highest driving
level may be locked or automatically exited in
Terminating the adjustment procedure order to protect the system.
An adjustment procedure that was started on the ▷ When the trailer power socket is in use or
BMW display key can be terminated with the when trailer towing is activated, only the nor‐
BMW display key. mal level is available.
"Cancel": tap the button. The vehicle raises or
lowers itself back to the starting level. Wheel change
Before a wheel change, deactivate the system:
With the button in the lower tailgate
Press the rocker switch forward or pull it back‐
When the tailgate is opened, the vehicle ward for approx. 7 seconds. After the rocker
can be lowered to the entry level and switch is released, the LED indicator on the
raised again by pressing the button. The flashing rocker switch will go out.
of the LED in the button indicates the level
Activating the system: press the rocker switch
change.
forward or pull it backward for approx. 7 seconds.
During the raising procedure, the vehicle raises After the rocker switch is released, the LED indi‐
itself from the entry level to the level that was se‐ cator will reactivate.
lected last or the normal level.
Malfunction
Terminating the adjustment procedure A Check Control message is displayed. The sys‐
An adjustment procedure that was started with tem is impaired. Vehicle handling may be altered
the button in the lower tailgate can be terminated and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced.
with this button. Visit the nearest dealer's service center or an‐
Press the button again. The vehicle raises or other qualified service center or repair shop.
lowers itself back to the starting level.
Long periods when vehicle is
System limits parked
▷ It may not be possible to change the level During long periods when the vehicle is parked, it
during dynamic driving. can lower itself. This is not a malfunction.
▷ It may not be possible to change the level if When the drive-ready state is switched on with
the axles are limited. the doors closed, the vehicle is raised to the nor‐
mal level automatically.
▷ It may only be possible to lift the vehicle level
while the engine is running. Depending on the state of the vehicle, raising to
normal level may take several minutes.
▷ If the state of charge of the vehicle battery is
too low, a level change may not be possible.
▷ If level adjustment is activated frequently in
quick succession, the system switches off to
284
xOffroad package Overview
Button and rocker switch in the

Concept center console
The xOffroad package supports the driver when
driving away from unpaved roads or with reduced
traction. The system offers four different xOff‐
road driving modes for selection.
xOffroad drive modes and levels

The xOffroad drive modes can be selected
based on the ground conditions.
When an xOffroad drive mode is switched on, in‐
dividual systems in the vehicle are set to the best 1 Switch the xOffroad driving mode on/off.
possible traction and driving stability.
2 Set the xOffroad driving mode.
With the two-axle ride level control, the vehicle
level is set for the corresponding xOffroad drive
mode. Switching on
xOffroad drive mode Level Press button 1 or rocker switch 2 forward or pull
back. The xOffroad driving mode "xGRAVEL" is
"xGRAVEL" High level 1 switched on. The LED on the button lights up.
The driving mode is displayed in the instrument
"xSAND" High level 1
cluster.
"xROCKS" High level 2 The effective speed range is displayed in the
"xSNOW" Normal level. speedometer with a line below the scale.
Setting the xOffroad driving

General information
mode
The system optimizes the driving behavior and
the traction on unpaved surfaces within the
physical limits.
It is operated with the button and rocker switch
in the center console.
Observe the information in the chapter Driving
tips for driving on poor roads.
Driving on poor roads, refer to page 332.
Push the rocker switch forward or pull it back re‐
peatedly until the desired xOffroad driving mode
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
285
xOffroad driving modes in detail ▷ Antilock Braking System: the response be‐
havior is adjusted.
All driving modes ▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control: the response
When the xOffroad driving modes are switched behavior is adjusted.
on, the following vehicle settings will be applied: ▷ Two-axle ride level control: high level 1 is set.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function is switched off.
▷ Transmission and accelerator pedal: the shift‐
"xROCKS"
ing behavior and response to the accelerator Setting for: "Optimized vehicle setting for heavy
pedal are adjusted. terrain with strong irregularities. For maximum
traction, deactivate DSC."
▷ The all-wheel-drive system is set to the best
possible traction. When switching on, the following additional vehi‐
cle settings are carried out, for example:
▷ Display on the Control Display: the power dis‐
tribution on the wheels can also be displayed ▷ Antilock Braking System: the response be‐
in the xOffroad display. havior is adjusted.
With the proper equipment, additional terrain- ▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control: the response
specific camera perspectives can be se‐ behavior is adjusted.
lected. ▷ Two-axle ride level control: high level 2 is set.
▷ Head-Up Display: in addition to the speed
limit, the compass and the values for inclina‐ "xSNOW"
tion angles and tilt angles will also be dis‐ Setting for: "Optimized vehicle setting for
played in the Head-up Display. assured handling on slippery road."
When switching on, the following additional vehi‐
"xGRAVEL" cle settings are carried out, for example:
This drive mode is active every time the xOffroad ▷ Two-axle ride level control: normal level is set.
drive modes are switched on.
▷ Steptronic transmission: the shift behavior is
Setting for: "Optimized vehicle setting for easy set to gentle gear changes. The vehicle
terrain." drives off in second gear.
When switching on, the following additional vehi‐ ▷ Accelerator pedal: the characteristic of the
cle settings are carried out, for example: accelerator pedal is optimized for gentle driv‐
▷ Antilock Braking System: the response be‐ ing behavior.
havior is adjusted.
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control: the response Manual switching off
behavior is adjusted. Press button 1. The LED on the button goes out.
▷ Two-axle ride level control: high level 1 is set. The last driving mode that was set through the
Driving Dynamics Control will be activated.
"xSAND"
Setting for: "Optimized vehicle setting for heavy Display on the Control Display
terrain with loose surface. For maximum traction,
deactivate DSC." Display xView display
When switching on, the following additional vehi‐ 1. "CAR"
cle settings are carried out, for example: 2. "Driving information"
286
3. "xOFFROAD"
Active roll stabilization
or
"xVIEW" Concept
The following information is displayed: The system reduces the lateral tilt of the vehicle
▷ With a navigation system: compass display that occurs during rapid driving in curves or dur‐
for the driving direction. ing quick evasive maneuvers.
▷ With navigation system: elevation for the cur‐
rent position. General information
▷ With navigation system: destination flag in The lateral tilt of the vehicle is balanced out by
compass direction to the destination. permanent adjustment on the front and rear
▷ Pitch attitude with degree indication and per‐ axles. The vehicle is thus always stabilized.
centage. Agility and driving comfort are increased under all
▷ Transverse gradient with degree indication. driving conditions.
▷ Graphic display for the steering angle.

Tuning
▷ Level adjustment of the two-axle ride level
control. The system offers different settings ranging from
comfortable travel to dynamic driving.
With the xOffroad package, the following addi‐
tional information can be displayed: The settings are assigned to the different drive
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ With Surround View: depending on the
speed, terrain-specific camera perspectives. Additional information:
▷ xOffroad drive mode currently active. Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 140.
▷ Distribution of drive torque to the wheels.

Adaptive M chassis
System limits
The xOffroad properties may be reduced at Concept
higher speeds where required.
The Adaptive M chassis is a controllable chassis.
This system reduces undesirable vehicle motion
Adaptive chassis when using a dynamic driving style or traveling
on uneven road surfaces.
Concept
General information
This system reduces undesirable vehicle motion
when using a dynamic driving style or traveling The driving dynamics and driving comfort are en‐
on uneven road surfaces. hanced depending on the road surface condition
and driving style.
General information Depending on the equipment, the rear axle lock

differential will be adjusted for the traction condi‐
The driving dynamics and driving comfort are en‐
tions as needed.
hanced depending on the road surface condition
and driving style.
287
Tuning Depending on the equipment, the rear axle lock

differential will be adjusted for the traction condi‐
The system offers different shock absorber set‐
tions as needed.
tings ranging from comfortable travel to dynamic
driving.
The damping settings are assigned to the differ‐ Performance Control
ent drive modes of the Driving Dynamics Control.
Additional information: Performance Control enhances the agility of the
Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 140. vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked
individually when a sporty driving style is used.
Adaptive M Chassis
Professional Engine sound
Concept Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
The Adaptive M Suspension Professional is an ket version, you may be able to configure the
actively controlled sport chassis/suspension. The sound of the engine.
system increases driving comfort and minimizes
1. "CAR"
the lateral tilt when driving around curves.
2. "Settings"
The Adaptive M Suspension Professional en‐
compasses the following systems: 3. "General settings"
▷ Sport suspension. 4. "Engine sound"
▷ Adaptive chassis. 5. Select the desired setting.
▷ Active roll stabilization. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
General information
For active control, this system uses the available
information, for instance from the navigation sys‐
tem or the Driving style analysis.
This information influences the control of the fol‐
lowing systems, especially in ADAPTIVE driving
mode:
▷ Adaptive chassis.
▷ Active roll stabilization.
This further increases the agility and comfort of
the vehicle.
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ample.
288
Climate control CONTROLS
Climate control
Vehicle features and Automatic climate control
options
Overview
cific and optional features offered with the series. Buttons in the vehicle
served.
Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the Climate control functions
following components:
Button Function
▷ Emission tested passenger compartment.
▷ Microfilter. Temperature.
▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐
perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode. Maximum cooling.
▷ Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter. AUTO program.
▷ Ionization.
Recirculated-air mode.
▷ Fragrancing.
▷ Automatic recirculated-air control AUC.
Air flow, manual.
▷ Parked-car ventilation.
Intensity AUTO program.
Defrost and defog the wind‐

shield.
Rear window defroster.
289
CONTROLS Climate control
Button Function Switching off

▷ Complete system:
Seat and armrest heating, refer
to page 127. Press and hold the button on the
driver's side until the control panel
or switches off.
Active seat ventilation, refer to ▷ On the front passenger side:
page 128. Press and hold the lower button on
Climate control operation. the front passenger side.
Open Climate menu, such as for

the following settings: upper
Temperature
body temperature adjustment,
parked-car ventilation. Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
Some of the functions can also be used via temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
voice, e.g., temperature. using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Opening the Climate menu
Adjusting
Press the button on the upper side.
Using the button:
The Climate menu is displayed. Press the upper or lower button side to
set the desired temperature.
For example, the following climate control func‐
tions can be accessed via the Climate menu: Via iDrive:
▷ Fragrance.
1. "CAR"
▷ Air quality.
2. "Settings"
▷ Heating/ventilation.
▷ Parked-car ventilation/heating
4. "Heating/ventilation"
Individual settings can be entered for some of
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
the climate functions, e.g., switching on/off, in‐
tensity. 6. "Temperature:"
7. Set the desired temperature.
Switching on/off 8. "OK"
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
Switching on ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
Press any button except for the following: control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
▷ Menu/Climate Cont. set temperature.
▷ Rear window defroster.

Temperature of the ventilation
▷ Lower air flow button side.
▷ Seat heating. General information
▷ Seat ventilation. The temperature of the ventilation in the upper
body region can be adjusted.
290
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g. Air conditioning is switched on automatically with
colder toward blue, warmer toward red. the AUTO program.
The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body When using the automatic climate control, con‐
region heats or cools noticeably, depending on densation water develops and collects under‐
the adjusted temperature. neath the vehicle.
This does not change the set interior tempera‐
ture for the driver and front passenger. Maximum cooling
Adjusting Concept
1. "CAR" The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
2. "Settings" timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the
drive-ready state switched on.
4. "Heating/ventilation" General information
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" The function is available with external tempera‐
6. "Temperature adjustment" tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
7. Set the desired temperature. drive-ready state switched on.
Air conditioning Switching on/off

Press the button.
Concept The LED is illuminated when the sys‐
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐ tem is switched on.
humidified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again. Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
drive-ready state switched on. The air flow can be adjusted with the program
active.
Switching on/off
AUTO program
Using the button:
Press the button on the lower side. Concept
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats
Via iDrive: the car's interior automatically.
1. "CAR" The air distribution and temperature are control‐
led automatically depending on the temperature
2. "Settings"
in the car's interior and the desired temperature
3. "Climate control" setting including the selected intensity of the air
4. "Heating/ventilation" flow.
5. "A/C"
Depending on the weather, the windshield and Switching on/off
the side windows may fog up briefly when drive- Using the button:
ready state is switched on. Press the button.
291
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO program The selected intensity is shown on the climate
switched on. control display.
Via iDrive:
Automatic recirculated-air
1. "CAR" control AUC
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control" Concept
4. "Heating/ventilation" The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐
ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air.
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" The outside air supply is shut off and the interior
6. "Automatic" air is recirculated.
Depending on the selected settings and outside
influences, the air is directed to the windshield, General information
side windows, upper body, and into the floor If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐
area. tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
Air conditioning is switched on automatically with automatically.
the AUTO program. If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐
Point the side vents toward the side windows. ously flows into the car's interior.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐ ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
densation as much as possible. fogging increases.
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐
cally, when manual air distribution is set. Switching on/off
1. "CAR"
Intensity 2. "Settings"
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐ 3. "Climate control"
sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic
4. "Air quality"
control for the air mass.
5. "Automatic"
Using the button:
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
Press the lower or upper side of the culated-air mode or defog the windows.
button: decrease or increase intensity.
Via iDrive: Recirculated-air mode

1. "CAR" Concept
2. "Settings" You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
3. "Climate control" in the immediate environment by temporarily
4. "Heating/ventilation" suspending the supply of outside air. The system
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
6. "Level" Adjusting
7. Set the desired intensity. Using the button:
292
Press the button. The air flow may be reduced automatically to

The LED is illuminated when recircu‐ save battery power.
lated-air mode is switched on. The supply of out‐
side air is shut off. Manual air distribution
When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh
air is directed into the vehicle's interior. Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
Via iDrive: justed manually.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Adjusting
3. "Climate control" Press the button repeatedly to select a
program:
4. "Air quality"
5. Select the desired setting: ▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
▷ "Air recirculation" ▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ "Fresh air" ▷ Floor area.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air ▷ Windows and floor area.
mode switches off automatically after a certain ▷ Windows.
amount of time, depending on the environmental
▷ Windows and upper body.
conditions.
▷ Upper body region.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐
fogging increases. mate control display.
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐

culated-air mode or defog the windows. SYNC program
Air flow, manual Concept

Depending on the equipment, the following set‐
Concept tings of the driver's side can be transferred to the
front-passenger side and the rear:
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually. ▷ Temperature.
▷ Air flow.
General information ▷ Air distribution.
To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO ▷ AUTO program.
program first.
Switching on/off
Adjusting 1. "CAR"
Press the lower or upper side of the 2. "Settings"
button: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the climate 4. "Synchronize"
control display.
293
The program is switched off automatically if the

settings on the front passenger side or in the
Ventilation
rear are changed.
Concept
Defrosting windshield and The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
remove condensation justed.
Concept Adjusting the ventilation

Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
the windshield and the front side windows. General information
The air flow directions can be adjusted for direct
Switching on/off or indirect ventilation.
Press the button. Open the vents and position them to ensure ef‐
fective climate control.
The LED is illuminated when the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Direct ventilation
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the The air flow is directed towards the passengers.
system switched on. The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending
If there is window condensation, press on the adjusted temperature.
the button on the driver's side or switch
on air conditioning to utilize the condensation Indirect ventilation
sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the wind‐ The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐
shield. gers. The car's interior is warmed or cooled indi‐
rectly, depending on the set temperature.
Rear window defroster

Front ventilation
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The function is operational when the
drive-ready state is switched on.
The rear window defroster switches off automat‐
ically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
incoming air. row 1.
The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐ ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
eous pollutants from the outside air that enters of the vents, arrow 2.
the vehicle.
Have this combined filter changed during vehicle
maintenance.
294
Ventilation in rear, center
▷ Button for switching on the fan, arrow 1. The

LED lights up.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
▷ Thumbwheel for the activation of the heat
row 1.
and distribution of the air, arrow 2.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
Turn toward the front: activate the heater and
of the vents, arrow 2.
distribute the air in the floor area.
▷ Thumbwheel for varying the temperature, ar‐
Turn toward the rear: distribute the air in the
row 3.
storage area between the seats.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer. The heater is not ready for operation without
switching on the fan. After the heater is switched
off, the fan can be used to circulate the interior
Ventilation in the rear, on the air, for instance at high temperatures. To do this,
side switch on the fan, arrow 1, and turn the thumb‐
wheel toward the rear, arrow 2.
Rear automatic climate

control
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 2.
Heating and ventilation, third row

of seats
The air in the area of the third row of seats can
be heated or circulated. The vents are located in
the storage area between the seats and in the
floor area of the third row of seats.
295
Climate control functions Temperature

Button Function Concept
Temperature. The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
Maximum cooling.
and then keeps it constant.
AUTO program. Adjusting

Using the button:
Air flow, manual.
Press the upper or lower button side to
set the desired temperature.
Via iDrive:
Seat heating, refer to page 127. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching on/off
Via iDrive 5. "Second row of seats"
1. "CAR" 6. "Temp. left:" or "Temp. right:"
2. "Settings" 7. Set the desired temperature.
3. "Climate control" The selected temperature is shown on the cli‐
mate control display.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
5. "Second row of seats"
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
6. "Activate heating/cooling" control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
The rear automatic climate control is not ready set temperature.
for operation if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting the Maximum cooling
windows and removing condensation is active.
Concept
Using the button: switching on
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
Press any button except for the following: timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the
▷ Lower air flow button side. drive-ready state switched on.
▷ Seat heating.
General information
Using the button: switching off The function is available with external tempera‐
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
Press and hold the bottom of the but‐
drive-ready state switched on.
ton.
296
Switching on/off Via iDrive:
Press the button. 1. "CAR"

The LED is illuminated when the sys‐ 2. "Settings"
tem is switched on. 3. "Climate control"
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ 4. "Heating/ventilation"
gion. The vents need to be open for this. 5. "Second row of seats"
6. "Level"
AUTO program 7. Set the desired intensity.
Concept The air flow and air distribution are automatically

regulated depending on the selected intensity.
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are con‐
trolled automatically. The selected intensity is shown on the climate
control display.
Switching on/off
Air flow, manual
Using the button:
Press the button. Concept
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
program switched on. manually.
Via iDrive:
General information
1. "CAR" To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO
2. "Settings" program first.
Adjusting
5. "Second row of seats" Press the lower or upper side of the
button: decrease or increase air flow.
6. "Automatic"
Depending on the selected temperature, the The selected air flow is shown on the climate
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is control display.
directed to the upper body and into the floor
area. Manual air distribution
Intensity Concept
With the AUTO program activated, the automatic The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
intensity control can be changed: justed manually.
Using the button:
Adjusting
Press the lower or upper side of the
button: decrease or increase intensity. Press the lower or upper side of the
button to select a program:
▷ Upper body region.
297
▷ Upper body region and floor area. hicle battery. The system will be available
▷ Floor area. again after the engine is started or after a
short trip.
Locking the control elements ▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
Concept ▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
The control elements of the rear automatic cli‐
mate control can be locked. Switching on/off directly
Activating/deactivating General information

1. "CAR" There are different ways to switch the system on
2. "Settings" or off.
3. "Climate control" The system switches off automatically after a

certain period of time. The system continues to
4. "Heating/ventilation" run for some time after being switched off.
5. "Second row of seats"
6. "Disable controller" Using the button
General information
Parked-car ventilation When the vehicle is in standby state, the parked-
car ventilation can be switched on or off via the
Concept automatic climate control buttons.
The car's interior can be cooled or heated before
Switching on
driving off with the parked-car ventilation. De‐
pending on set temperature and ambient tem‐ Press any button except:
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or possi‐ ▷ Rear window defroster.
bly heated using the residual engine heat. ▷ Lower air flow button side.
▷ Seat heating.
General information
▷ Seat ventilation.
The system can be switched on and off directly
or via a preset departure time. ▷ Menu.
The activation time is determined based on the Switching off

external temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure time. Press and hold the bottom button.
Functional requirements The system switches off after leaving and lock‐
ing the vehicle.
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
Via iDrive
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
1. "CAR"
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit 2. "Settings"
the maximum activation time to save the ve‐ 3. "Climate control"
298
4. "Pre-heating/ventilation" On the desired weekdays, the system will be

5. "Start now" switched on promptly before the set depar‐
ture time.
Via BMW display key The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷ Set departure times.
Switching on
▷ Activate departure times.
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between
key.
setting/activating the departure time and the
2. "Preconditioning setting" planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol. riod of time for the climate control.
4. "Activate now"
Setting the departure time
5. "Start"
Via iDrive
Switching off
1. "CAR"
key. 2. "Settings"
2. "Preconditioning setting" 3. "Climate control"
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol. 4. "Pre-heating/ventilation"
4. "Stop" 5. "Departure schedule"

6. Select the desired departure time.
Display 7. Set the departure time.
8. Select day of the week, if needed.
Symbol Description
9. "OK"
Symbol on the climate con‐
trol display. Via BMW display key
Flashing: the parked-car 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
ventilation is switched on. key.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
Departure time 3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
Concept
5. Set the departure time.
Different departure times can be set to ensure a
comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at 6. Select day of the week, if needed.
the time of departure. 7. "OK"
▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
set. Activating the departure time
The system is switched on once.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
If a departure time is to influence the switching
of the week can be set.
on of parked-car ventilation, the respective de‐
parture time must be activated first.
299
Via iDrive Safety information

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" DANGER
3. "Climate control" If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
4. "Pre-heating/ventilation" sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pollute
5. "Departure schedule" the area in and around the vehicle or enter into
6. Activate the desired departure time. tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas or areas with insufficient ventila‐
Via BMW display key tion, exhaust gases can also accumulate
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life.
key. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suffi‐
2. "Preconditioning setting" cient ventilation. Do not switch on stationary cli‐
mate control in enclosed areas or areas with in‐
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
sufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed garages.
4. Tap on the symbol.
5. Activate the desired departure time.
Warning
Display
When stationary climate control is in operation,
, Symbol on the climate control display high temperatures can occur underneath the
signals an activated departure time. body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas
system. If combustible materials, such as
leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts
Stationary climate control of the exhaust gas system, these materials can
through Remote Engine ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact with
Start hot vehicle parts during stationary climate con‐
trol operation, e.g. leaves, grass, gas, gasoline,
Concept oil or other combustible objects.
Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's
interior prior to departure to a comfortable tem‐
perature. The system automatically cools, vents,
and heats depending on the interior, external, ▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and set temperature. Snow and ice may be re‐ and not in drive-ready state.
moved more easily. ▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
The system starts the engine automatically and ▷ For reasons of safety, the system can only be
allows it to run for a limited period of time. switched on twice consecutively. The system
will be available again as soon as the drive-
ready state is activated and deactivated
again.
▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
▷ Hood is closed.
300
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time For reasons of safety, the system can only be
are set correctly. switched on twice consecutively. The system will
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out. be available again as soon as the drive-ready
state is activated and deactivated again.
Enabling the automatic engine
Via iDrive
start function
1. "CAR"
The automatic engine start must be enabled be‐
fore using the system. 2. "Settings"
Otherwise, the engine cannot switch on auto‐ 3. "Climate control"

matically to climatize the car's interior. 4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
Via iDrive: 5. "Start now"
1. "CAR"
Via vehicle key
2. "Settings"
The system can be switched on and off using
3. "Climate control" the vehicle key.
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
Press the button on the vehicle key three
5. If necessary, "Remote Engine Start" times within 1 second.
6. "Starting engine for clim. control" After operating the vehicle key, it will take ap‐
7. Confirm the disclaimer. proximately 3 seconds until the engine is
switched on.
Confirmation signals from the To switch off the system, press the button again
vehicle three times.
The activation of the system is confirmed by
flashing twice. Via BMW display key
The parking lights are switched on as long as the Switching on:
system is switched on.
key.
Switching on/off directly
General information 3. Tap on the symbol.
There are different ways to switch the system on 4. "Activate now"
or off: 5. "Start"
▷ Via iDrive. Switching off:
▷ With the vehicle key.
▷ Via BMW display key. key.
The system can also be switched off directly as 2. "Preconditioning setting"
follows: pressing the Start/Stop button, without
operating the brake pedal.
4. "Stop"
The system switches off automatically after ap‐
prox. 15 minutes.
301
Display For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8.
Symbol Description Setting the departure time

Symbol on the BMW display Via iDrive
key for automatic climate
control. 1. "CAR"
The symbol flashes while 2. "Settings"

Remote Engine Start is run‐ 3. "Climate control"
ning. 4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
Climatization for the requested 6. Set the departure time.
departure time 7. Select day of the week, if needed.
General information Via BMW display key

Scheduled departure times can be set up in the 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
system to ensure a comfortable interior tempera‐ key.
ture in the vehicle at the time of departure.
▷ One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set.
The system is switched on once.
5. Set the departure time.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week of the scheduled departure can 6. Select day of the week, if needed.
be set. 7. "OK"
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷ Set departure times. Activating the departure time
▷ Activate departure times. Functional requirement
The climate control function will start approxi‐ If a requested departure time is to influence the
mately 10 minutes before the set departure time switching on of the system, the respective de‐
and continue for approximately 5 more minutes parture time must be activated first.
after the departure time.
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between Via iDrive
setting/activating the departure time and the 1. "CAR"
planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐
riod of time for the climate control. 2. "Settings"
For reasons of safety, the system can only be 3. "Climate control"

switched on once. The system will be available 4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
again as soon as the drive-ready state is acti‐ 5. Activate the desired departure time.
vated and deactivated again.
, The symbol on the automatic climate
Observe the information about the intended use control signals an activated departure time
of the vehicle.
302
Via BMW display key ▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occupants,

1. Switch on the display of the BMW display for instance fatigue.
key. BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW
2. "Preconditioning setting" fragrance cartridges.
3. Tap on the symbol. The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not
suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty,
4. Activating the desired departure time:
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge.
Tap on the symbol.
The symbol on the automatic climate Safety information
control signals an activated departure time.
Warning
Refilled genuine BMW fragrance cartridges can
Symbol Description cause the emission of harmful substances, mal‐
functions, and damage to the system. There is
The engine runs for the purpose a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
of operating the stationary cli‐ not refill genuine fragrance cartridges. When a
mate control. The vehicle is not cartridge is empty, replace it with a new fra‐
ready to drive. grance cartridge.
Opening the Climate menu

Ambient air package Press the button on the upper side.
Concept The Climate comfort menu is displayed.

The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean Individual settings can be entered for some of
and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐ the climate control functions.
grances.
Ionization is used to clean the air from sus‐ Ionization
pended particles. Together with the selected fra‐
grance, ionization contributes to well-being and Concept
relaxation while driving.
Ionization cleans the car's interior air of sus‐
pended particles.
General information
Two different fragrances can be selected in the Switching on/off
vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possible 1. "CAR"
by replacing the fragrance cartridges.
2. "Settings"
The following criteria can influence the percep‐
tion of scents in the car's interior: 3. "Climate control"
▷ Automatic climate control settings. 4. "Air quality"
▷ Temperature and air humidity. 5. "Ionization"
▷ Time of day and season.
303
Fragrancing 3. "Climate control"

4. "Fragrance"
General information 5. "Level"
Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to avoid 6. Select the desired setting.
a habituation effect.
Highest intensity at Level 3.
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow
switching between the fragrances. Display
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove The illustrations on the Control Display show the
compartment. actual filling level of the fragrance cartridges.
To ensure a pleasant fragrance inside of the ve‐
hicle when starting the trip, fragrancing can occur 1. "CAR"
prior to the trip. The system is automatically 2. "Settings"
switched on with the parked-car ventilation if fra‐ 3. "Climate control"
grancing was switched on at the end of the last
4. "Fragrance"
trip.
When an empty fragrance cartridge is indicated,
Functional requirements the cartridge still contains a fluid carrying the fra‐
grance. However, it is not sufficient for fragranc‐
▷ The fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled. ing.
▷ The interior temperature is be‐ When the fragrance cartridges are empty, a
tween 41 ℉/+5 ℃ and 104 ℉/+40 ℃. Check Control message is displayed once.
▷ Open the vents to allow the fragrance to flow
out. Inserting fragrance cartridges
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
Selecting the fragrance compartment.
The car's interior is fragranced depending on the
selected fragrance. 1. Open the glove compartment.
Two different fragrances can be selected in the Front passenger side glove compartment, re‐
vehicle. fer to page 318.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
1. "CAR"
The cartridge holder slides down.
2. "Settings"
4. "Fragrance"
5. Select the desired fragrance.
rently used.
Switching fragrancing on/off,

adjusting intensity
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
304
3. Remove the cover of the fragrance cartridge. 6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐
Hold the cover on the top to slide it from the sure into the cartridge holder. The cartridge
fragrance cartridge. snaps lightly into place.
4. Insert the removed cover on the back side of 7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it engages.
the fragrance cartridge. Make sure that no objects press against the
cartridge holder from below, otherwise the
function of the ambient air package could be
impacted.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge

The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
compartment.
5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the 1. Open the glove compartment.
chip faces away from the cartridge holder. Front passenger side glove compartment, re‐
fer to page 318.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the

holder.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance
indicated on the Control Display.
305
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐

grance indicated on the Control Display.
4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the

holder.
Recycling
Empty fragrance cartridges can be taken
to a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop for
recycling.
306
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The operation of remote-controlled systems
cific and optional features offered with the series. with the integrated universal remote control,
It also describes features and functions that are such as the garage door, may result in injury,
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
to the selected options or country versions. This garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ damage to property. Make sure that the area of
tems. When using these functions and systems, movement of the respective system is clear
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ during programming and operation. Also follow
served. the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
Integrated Universal
Remote Control Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the owner's manual of the system to
Concept
be controlled, the system is generally
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the compatible with the integrated Universal Remote
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of Control.
remote-controlled systems such as garage door
Additional questions are answered by:
drives, barriers, or lighting systems.
▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified
General information service center or repair shop.
The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐ ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
Corporation.
interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the
particular system is required in order to program
the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐
sible operation.
307
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Control elements on the interior Canada: if programming with the hand-held

mirror transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6. ▷ The LED lights up green: programming
completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not
complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
▷ Buttons, arrow 1. 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
▷ LED, arrow 2. cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming. If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
Programming systems.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
General information onds: programming not completed.
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be Repeat steps 3 to 6.
fully charged at the time of programming to en‐
To program other functions on other buttons, re‐
sure an optimal range of the integrated universal
peat steps 3 to 5.
remote control.
1. Switch on standby state. Special feature of the rolling code
2. Initial setup: wireless system
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐ led system after repeated programming, please
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes check if the system to be controlled features a
green rapidly. This erases all programming of rolling code radio system.
the buttons on the interior mirror. Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will integrated Universal Remote Control and the
slowly begin flashing orange. system also have to be synchronized.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system Please read the owner's manual to find out how
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm to synchronize the system.
away from the buttons on the interior mirror. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
The required distance depends on the hand- person.
held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
308
Synchronizing the universal remote control with ▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
the system: transmitter was detected but program‐
ming is not complete.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system. Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
mirror as described.
gramming procedure.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
If the integrated universal remote control
on the system being programmed, e.g. at the
remains nonoperational, continue with the
garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds
special features for change code wireless
for the next step.
systems.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
onds: programming not completed.
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step
up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐ Repeat steps 3 to 6.
zation. Once synchronization is complete, the If the programming procedure is not completed,
programmed function will be carried out. the previous programming will remain un‐
changed.
Reprogramming individual
buttons Operation
1. Switch on standby state.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be Warning
programmed. The operation of remote-controlled systems
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror with the integrated universal remote control,
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐ such as the garage door, may result in injury,
lease the button. for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm
movement of the respective system is clear
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.
during programming and operation. Also follow
The required distance depends on the hand-
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
held transmitter.
mitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter. The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
Canada: if programming with the hand-held erated using the button on the interior mirror
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ while the drive-ready or standby state is
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and switched on. To do this, hold down the button
release the hand-held transmitter button for within receiving range of the system until the
2 seconds. function is activated. The interior mirror LED
6. The LED can light up in different ways. stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
mitted.
▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐
ming procedure is completed.
Deleting stored functions
Release the button.
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually.
309
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐

terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
Ashtray
10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes green rapidly. Front center console
Opening
Sun visor 1. Press onto the cover.
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the
2. The ashtray is located in a cup holder. Fold
side.
the ashtray cover upward.
3. Move it back to the desired position.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐
sor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind
a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror
lighting switches on.
Emptying
1. Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of
the cup holder.
310
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise to open it. Front center console
3. Empty the container. Press onto the cover.

Always empty the ashtray with the container
open to prevent contamination of the lid.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
Warning
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot A cigarette lighter is located between the cup
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. holders in one of the marked positions.
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette
lighter falls down or is held against the objects.
There is a risk of fire and injuries. There is a risk
Rear center console
of damage to property. Take hold of the ciga‐
rette lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil‐
dren do not use the cigarette lighter.
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket. The cigarette lighter is located in the socket.
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
311
Sockets Front center console
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Press onto the cover.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
A socket is located between the cup holders in
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
one of the marked positions.
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
of unfolding. Pull off the cover.
Rear center console

NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
work with high voltages and currents, which
means that the 12 volt electrical system can be
overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Only connect battery chargers
for the vehicle battery to the starting aid termi‐
nals in the engine compartment.
A socket is located in the center console.

NOTICE
Pull off the cover.
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
312
In the cargo area In the center console
NOTICE
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large
USB connectors, may block or damage the
cover when it is being opened or closed. There
is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the cover is clear
while opening and closing it.
A socket is located on the right side in the cargo

area. Unfold the cover.
USB port
General information
Follow the information regarding the connection
of mobile devices to the USB port in the section
on USB connections.
USB connections, refer to page 76.
In the center armrest
A USB port is located in the center console.
A USB port is located in the center armrest.

Properties:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A. If the vehicle is equipped with thermo-cup hold‐
ers, a USB port is located in the center console.
Properties:
313
▷ USB port Type A. Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be

▷ For charging mobile devices and for data maintained in every direction when operating the
transfer. device.
▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
Wireless charging tray

Concept
The wireless charging tray enables the following
functions to be performed without cables:
▷ Charging the rechargeable battery of a mo‐ Mounting position of the product.
bile phone with Qi capability and of other mo‐
bile devices, which support the Qi standard.
▷ Charging the BMW Display key. Safety information
▷ Connect the mobile phone to the external an‐
tenna. Warning
Depending on the country, this provides for When charging a device that meets the Qi
better network reception and a consistent re‐ standard in the wireless charging tray, any
production quality. metal objects located between the device and
the tray can become very hot. Placing storage
General information devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards,
cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal
When inserting the mobile phone, make sure
transmission, between the device and the tray
there are no objects between it and the wireless
may impair the card function. There is a risk of
charging tray.
injury and risk of damage to property. When
During charging, the surface of the tray and the charging mobile devices, make sure there are
mobile phone may become warm. Higher tem‐ no objects between the device and the tray.
peratures may lead to a reduction in the charge
current through the mobile phone, and in iso‐
lated cases the charging process is paused tem‐
NOTICE
porarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the
mobile phone owner's manual. The tray is intended for mobile phones up to a
particular size. Forceful inserting of the mobile
The charge indicator shows on the Control
phone into the tray can damage the tray or the
Display whether a mobile phone with Qi capabil‐
mobile phone. There is a risk of damage to
ity is being charged.
property. Observe the maximum dimensions for
mobile phones. Do not force the mobile phone
NOTE into the tray.
This device has been tested for human exposure
limits and found compliant at a minimum dis‐
tance of 2 in/5 cm during operation. Overview
Tray across in the center console:
314
Operation
Inserting the mobile phone

The mobile phone must not exceed the maxi‐
mum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1 x
0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm.
1. Open the tray cover.
2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray
1 LED with the display facing up.
2 Storage area 3. Close the tray cover.
Tray on the left in the center console:

Removing the mobile phone
1. Open the tray cover.
2. Remove the mobile phone.
LED displays
Color Meaning
Blue The mobile phone is charging.

The blue LED stays illuminated once
1 LED the inserted mobile phone with Qi ca‐
2 Storage area pability is fully charged.
Orange The mobile phone is not charging.

Functional requirements Temperature on the mobile phone
▷ The mobile phone must compatibly support possibly too high or foreign object in
the required Qi standard. charging tray.
If the mobile phone does not support the Qi Red The mobile phone is not charging.
standard, the mobile phone can be charged
Contact a dealer’s service center or
using a special Qi-compatible charging case.
another qualified service center or re‐
▷ Standby state is switched on. pair shop.
▷ Observe the maximum dimensions of the
mobile phone. Forgotten warning
▷ Use only protective jackets and covers up to
a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm; other‐ General information
wise, the charging function may be impaired.
If the vehicle is equipped with the forgotten
▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located in warning function, a warning can be output if a
the center of the tray. mobile phone with Qi capability was forgotten in
the wireless charging tray when leaving the vehi‐
cle.
315
The forgotten warning is displayed in the instru‐ ▷ Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to register
ment cluster. their signal boosters by calling their toll-free
number.
Activating ▷ T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mo‐
1. "CAR" bile.com/BoosterRegistration); (https://saqat.t-
2. "Settings" mobile.com/sites/SignalBooster#).
3. "General settings" ▷ Verizon’s online registration link: (http://

www.verizonwireless.com/wcms/consumer/
4. "Wireless charging tray" register-signal-booster.html).
5. Activate reminder. ▷ AT&T online registration link (https://
securec45.securewebsession.com/attsignal‐
System limits booster.com/).
At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in ▷ U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://
the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile www.uscellular.com/uscellular/support/fcc-
phone may be limited and some functions may booster-registration.jsp).
no longer work.
Before use you must register your booster de‐
vice with your wireless provider.
LTE-Compensator - Information
If you should be requested by the FCC to cease
and User Manual operating your booster you are not allowed to in‐
Your car is equipped with a wireless charging sert your mobile phone in the charging tray any‐
tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and more unless the booster is permanently deacti‐
connect it to the mobile network. To ensure the vated by your local BMW dealer.
best possible connection a signal booster (LTE- You must not remove the booster from the car
Compensator) is used in conjunction with the nor use it with any other than the preinstalled
WCA. The following paragraphs refer to this coupling device or antenna. Any modification of
booster: the existing antenna or coupling device as well as
This is a CONSUMER device. the use of other antennas or coupling devices
BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE‐ will cause the cease of the booster´s operating li‐
VICE with your wireless provider and have your cense.
provider's consent. Most wireless providers con‐ The booster device fulfills the network protection
sent to the use of Compensators. Some provid‐ standards as required by the FCC, such as inter‐
ers may not consent to the use of this device on modulation limits, oscillation detection and gain
their network. If you are unsure, contact your limits.
provider. You MUST operate this device with ap‐ Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive
proved antennas and cables as specified by the
manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed at Model Number: LTECOMPB0
least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You Part Number: 6803145-01
MUST cease operating this device immediately if FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0
requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless
service provider. Warning E911 location informa‐
tion may not be provided or may be inaccurate
for calls served by using this device.
Please observe additionally the following infor‐
mation
316
BMW Travel & Comfort

System
General information
USB ports and fixtures for attaching special ac‐
cessories, for instance coat hangers, are located
on the backrests of the front seats.
Properties of the USB ports:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging of mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
Further information is available from a dealer's
or repair shop.
Overview
The fixtures are located behind the marked cov‐

ers.
Installing special accessories

1. Slide the cover to the side.
2. Install the special accessories, refer to Instal‐

lation Instructions.
317
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and Front passenger side glove
options compartment
Safety information
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Warning
to the selected options or country versions. This Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, partment can be thrown into the car's interior
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
served. cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐
ment immediately after using it.
General information Opening
The vehicle interior contains multiple storage
compartments for stowing objects.
Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown about the car's interior while Pull the handle.
driving, for instance in the event of an accident,
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of
injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ Closing
terior.
Fold cover closed.
Locking
NOTICE
The glove compartment can be locked with an
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐ integrated key. This prevents access to the glove
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to compartment.
property. Do not use anti-slip pads.
After the glove compartment is locked, the vehi‐
cle key can be handed over without the
318
Storage compartments CONTROLS
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is Safety information

parked by valet parking.
Warning
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
Driver's side glove can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
compartment risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not use any breakable objects while driving.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
Safety information
compartments.
Warning
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
Storage compartment in
partment can be thrown into the car's interior the center console
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is
Opening
a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐
ment immediately after using it.
Opening
Closing
Pull the cover on the handle bar back.
Pull the handle.
Closing Storage compartment in

Fold cover closed. the rear center console
The back of the center console contains one or
Compartments in the doors two storage compartments.
General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
319
Center armrest, front Opening
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up,

arrow 2.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Press the button.

Front cup holder
Closing
Safety information
Press cover down until it engages.
Warning
Rear center armrest Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
General information the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled
A storage compartment is located in the center liquids can distract from the traffic conditions
armrest between the seats. and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
Folding down risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.
Do not transport hot beverages.
Fold the center armrest forward.
320
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Opening
NOTICE
When the thermo-cup holder is switched on
and the cover is closed, the thermo-cup holder
can overheat. There is a risk of damage to
property. Switch the thermo-cup holder off be‐
fore closing the cover.
NOTICE
Press onto the cover. Temperature sensitive items may be damaged
by the hot metal insert of the thermo-cup
holder. There is a risk of damage to property.
Use suitable containers only.
Switching on
Press the button for keeping cool or
warm once each.
▷ Blue LED lights up: keep drinks cool.

Two cup holders are located in the center con‐ ▷ Red LED lights up: keep drinks warm.
sole.
Switching off
Closing Press the button repeatedly until the
Pull the cover on the handle bar back. LEDs go out.
Maintaining the drink

temperature Rear cup holder
General information Safety information
When equipped with thermo-cup holder, drinks
can be kept cool or warm. Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
Safety information
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
Warning evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled
Contact with the hot metal insert of the liquids can distract from the traffic conditions
thermo-cup holder can cause burn injuries. and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage
There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the metal the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
insert when the thermo-cup holder is switched risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
on. not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
321
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Third row of seats

Do not transport hot beverages.
NOTICE
With an open cup holder, the center armrest
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage to property. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.
The cup holders are located between the seats

Second row of seats of the third row of seats.
General information
The cup holder can be adjusted for three differ‐
ent container sizes.
Clothes hooks
Opening General information

The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear.
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident. When suspending clothing articles
Fold the center armrest forward. from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will
Press the button and fold out the cup holder not obstruct the driver's view.
fully.
Reducing the size Warning

To make it smaller, the cup holder can be folded Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a
in in 2 steps. risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and
Enlarging risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
To make a smaller cup holder bigger, first fold it
from the clothes hooks.
in completely. Then fold the cup holder out again
fully.
Closing
Fold in the cup holder fully, until it engages.
322
Cargo area CONTROLS
Cargo area
Vehicle features and
Warning
options Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ NOTICE
served. Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Loading
Safety information Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
Warning
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐ XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
age them internally and cause a sudden drop in
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐
hicle.
bility, lengthening the braking distances and
changing the steering response. There is a risk 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
capacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐ 4. The resulting figure equals the available
mitted gross weight. amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
Warning sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
can be thrown about the car's interior while 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
driving, for instance in the event of an accident, and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of weight may not safely exceed the available
injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ Step 4.
terior. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐
323
CONTROLS Cargo area
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how

this reduces the available cargo and luggage
Lashing eyes in the cargo
load capacity of your vehicle. area
Load General information
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,
tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Lashing eyes
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for
securing cargo.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
The front lashing eyes are located under covers.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible,
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear
passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos‐
Anti-slip rails
sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear passenger seat backrests. When the rear Concept
seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer
safety belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to
stow large cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the
backrests.
▷ Use the cargo area partition net to protect oc‐
cupants. Make sure that objects cannot pen‐
etrate the cargo area partition net.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with ratchet The system prevents slipping of the cargo in the
straps or with a cargo net or draw straps. cargo area.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps. General information
Observe information and notes on loading.
324
Cargo area CONTROLS
The system will be activated automatically when

one of the following conditions is met:
Net
▷ Tailgate is closed. Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
▷ Inclination of the vehicle by more than ap‐ right side.
proximately 13 %.
Storage compartment on
Load, refer to page 323.
the left side
Multi-function hook General information
A storage compartment is located on the left
General information side in the cargo area.
A multi-function hook is located on the left and
right side in the cargo area. Opening
Safety information
Warning
Improper use of the multi-function hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
property. Only hang lightweight objects,
such as shopping bags, from the multi-function Press the button, arrow 1, and open the cover,
hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the arrow 2.
cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.
Folding down
under the cargo floor panel
General information
There are storage compartments beneath the
cargo floor panel.
Press on the multi-function hook and turn until it

engages.
325
CONTROLS Cargo area
Opening
Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior;
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked
Fold up the cargo floor panel. Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
Closing ment or improper installation of the child seat.
Push the cargo floor panel downward. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
Enlarging the cargo area backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
Concept and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down straints or remove them.
the rear seat backrests.
General information Warning

The rear seat backrest of the second seat row is
Once the rear seat backrest has been folded
divided at a ratio of 40–20–40. The side rear seat
down, the locking bracket protrudes into the
backrests and the center section can be folded
car's interior. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
down separately.
erty. When the rear seat backrest is folded
The rear seat backrests can be folded down from down, pay attention to the protruding locking
the rear or from the cargo area. bracket and keep this area unobstructed.
Depending on the equipment version, the rear
seat backrests can be folded down either man‐
ually or electrically. NOTICE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
Safety information down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
Warning movement of the rear backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.
Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐
rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
ment of the rear backrest and the of the head
restraint is clear prior to folding down.
326
Cargo area CONTROLS
Manual reclining of the backrest Electric reclining of the backrest
From the rear From the rear
Pull the lever and fold the rear seat backrest for‐ Pull the switch and fold the rear seat backrest
ward. forward.
From the cargo area From the cargo area
Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area to Press the switch in the cargo area.
release the rear seat backrest. ▷ Upper switch: the left and center rear seat
▷ Left lever: fold down the left and middle rear backrests fold forward.
seat backrest. ▷ Lower switch: the right rear seat backrest
▷ Right lever: fold down the right rear seat folds forward.
backrest.
Folding back the backrest

Folding back the backrest
Return the rear seat backrest to the seat position From the rear
and engage it. The red marking behind the lever Press the corresponding switch. The rear seat
disappears completely. backrest sets itself upright.
From the cargo area

Pull the corresponding switch. The rear seat
backrest sets itself upright.
327
CONTROLS Cargo area
Folding down the center section age to property. Make sure the cargo cover is
securely engaged in the brackets.
Closing
Fold down the center armrest and pull on the

strap.
Pull out the cargo cover, arrow 1, and hook both

Cargo cover sides into the brackets, arrow 2.
Safety information
Removing
The cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐
Warning gage.
can be thrown about the car's interior while
driving, for instance in the event of an accident,
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐
terior.
Press the release button, arrow 1, and pull the

Warning
cargo cover out toward the rear, arrow 2.
A cargo cover that snaps back quickly can jam
body parts or cause damage. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Do not let Stowing
the cargo cover snap back into place.
General information
The cargo cover can be stowed in the storage
Warning compartment under the cargo floor panel.
An incorrectly inserted cargo cover can be
thrown about the car's interior, such as in the Without third seat row
event of an accident or a braking or evasive ma‐ 1. Open the storage compartment on the left
neuver. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam‐ side.
328
Cargo area CONTROLS
Storage compartment on the left side, refer Installing

to page 325.
Slide the cover forward horizontally into the two
2. Fold up the cargo floor panel. side brackets. Make sure that the cover audibly
3. Turn the cargo cover forward with the handle. engages on both sides.
4. Stow the cargo cover on the left and lower it
on the right side.
Electric cargo cover
Make sure the cargo cover is positioned cor‐
rectly in the right bracket.
Concept
The electric cargo cover opens and closes auto‐
matically with the tailgate. The cargo cover can
be lowered below the cargo floor panel to stow
bulky items or luggage.
General information
Items in the range of movement are detected.
The cargo cover stops automatically to prevent
5. Push the cargo floor down and close the stor‐ damage.
age compartment on the left side.
Safety information
With third seat row
1. Open the storage compartment on the left Warning
side. Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
Storage compartment on the left side, refer tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
to page 325. can be thrown about the car's interior while
2. Fold up the cargo floor panel. driving, for instance in the event of an accident,
3. Stow the cargo cover on the left and lower it
on the right side.
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐
Make sure the cargo cover is positioned cor‐ terior.
rectly in the right bracket.
Warning
Pinching of body parts may occur during opera‐
tion of the electric cargo cover. Items in the
range of movement may damage the cargo
cover. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
ment of the electric cargo cover is clear during
opening and closing. In addition, make sure that
4. Push the cargo floor down and close the stor‐ the area of movement of the cover in the cargo
age compartment on the left side. floor is clear during lowering.
329
CONTROLS Cargo area
Switching between automatic and base

NOTICE position.
Items on the storage shelf may damage it.
Lowering or raising the cargo cover.
deposit any objects on the cargo cover.
Opening the cargo cover

When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is
NOTICE
opened up to the automatic position.
The manual operation of the electric cargo
To open the cargo cover completely up to the
cover by hand may damage the cover. There is
base position:
a risk of damage to property. Use the buttons in
the cargo area for operation. Press the button.
Overview Closing the cargo cover

Press the button.
Positions of the cargo cover
The cargo cover will be closed up to the auto‐
matic position.
When the tailgate is closed, the cargo cover will
be closed completely.
The cargo cover will not be closed automatically
when it is in the base position while the tailgate is
closing.
▷ Automatic position, arrow 1. Lowering the cargo cover

▷ Base position, arrow 2. The cargo cover can be lowered to stow bulky
luggage.
Buttons in the vehicle Press the button.
The cargo cover is lowered below the cargo floor

panel.
Raising the cargo cover

The cargo cover is raised to the base
position.
The buttons of the cargo cover are located in the
cargo area on the left side. The cargo cover is raised to the base
position and closes up to the automatic posi‐
tion.
330
Cargo area CONTROLS
Malfunctions The cargo cover moves to the different positions.

The initialization is finished when a signal
▷ If the closing force exceeds a certain value
sounds.
when closing the cargo cover, for example
due to items in the range of motion, the cover If the button is released prematurely, the cargo
will disengage from the mounting. The cargo cover will stop. The initialization is terminated.
cover stops in the guide rail. Press and hold the button to restart the initializa‐
tion.
To restore the functionality, close the cargo

cover by hand, arrow 1, until it engages in the
mounting, arrow 2.
▷ Excessive or insufficient ambient tempera‐
tures may lead to the deactivation of the
cargo cover. When the temperature is within
normal range again, such as by switching on
the air conditioner, the function will be re‐
stored.
▷ The function will be deactivated when the
system can no longer detect the position of
the cargo cover. An initialization is required.
Initializing
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Drive-ready state is activated.
▷ The area of movement of the cargo cover is
clear.
▷ External temperature is above 41 ℉/5 ℃.
Initializing the system

Press and hold the button until the initiali‐
zation is finished.
331
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
options
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
cific and optional features offered with the series. Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
It also describes features and functions that are speed:
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
to the selected options or country versions. This 100 mph/160 km/h.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstan‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, ces.
served.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
Breaking-in period increased.
Tires
General information
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
Moving parts need to begin working together
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
smoothly.
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
The following instructions will help you to ach‐ time.
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Drive conservatively for the first
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control. 200 miles/300 km.
Safety information Brake system

Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
Warning effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Due to new parts and components, safety and Drive moderately during this break-in period.
driver assistance systems can react with a de‐
lay. There is a risk of accident. After installing Following part replacement
new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conser‐ Observe the break-in procedures again, if com‐
vatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐ ponents mentioned above are replaced.
serve the break-in procedures of the respective
parts and components.
Driving on poor roads
Concept
Because of its greater ground clearance, the ve‐
hicle can be driven on a variety of road types and
qualities.
332
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
All-wheel drive can help improve forward mo‐

mentum.
General driving notes
Safety information Closing the tailgate
Safety information
NOTICE
Objects in unpaved areas, for instance stones
Warning
or branches, can damage the vehicle. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not drive on An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and
unpaved terrain. can endanger occupants and other traffic par‐
ticipants or damage the vehicle in the event of
an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In
When driving on poor roads addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's in‐
terior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
For your own safety, for the safety of passengers
to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.
and of the vehicle, heed the following points:
▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
driving. Driving with the tailgate open
▷ Do not take risks when driving. If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface condi‐ avoided:
tions. The steeper and more uneven the road ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
surface, the slower the speed should be.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill
▷ Drive moderately.
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to near
the MAX mark.
Hot exhaust gas system
▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent
Control HDC.
Warning
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in con‐
tact with the ground. High temperatures can occur underneath the
body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas
The ground clearance is no more than 7.8 in‐
system, while driving. Contact with the exhaust
ches/20 cm and can vary according to the ve‐
gas system can cause burns. There is a risk of
hicle's load.
injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas sys‐
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the tem, including the exhaust pipe.
accelerator pedal sufficiently so that driving
stability control systems can distribute the
driving force to the wheels. Activate DTC Dy‐
namic Traction Control if available. Warning
If combustible materials, such as leaves or
After a trip on poor roads grass, come in contact with hot parts of the ex‐
haust gas system, these materials can ignite.
After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and tires
There is a risk of fire and injuries. Do not re‐
for damage to maintain driving safety. Clear
move the heat shields installed and never apply
heavy soiling from the body.
undercoating to them. Make sure that no com‐
bustible materials can come in contact with hot
333
vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or during Safety information

parking.
NOTICE
Mobile communication devices When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐
in the vehicle ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐
ment, the electrical system or the transmission.
There is a risk of damage to property. When
Warning driving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐ mum indicated water level and the maximum
fluence one another. There is radiation due to speed for driving through water.
the transmission operations of mobile phones.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. If possible, in the car's interior use Braking safely
only mobile phones with direct connections to
an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual General information
interference and deflect the radiation from the The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking
car's interior. System ABS as a standard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐
quire such.
Hydroplaning
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
form between the tires and road surface.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning.
hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock Brak‐
It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of
ing System ABS is in its active mode.
contact between the tires and the road surface,
ultimately undermining your ability to steer and In certain braking situations, the perforated brake
brake the vehicle. discs can emit functional noises. However, func‐
tional noises have no effect on the performance
Driving through water and operational reliability of the brake.
General information Objects in the area around the

pedals
When driving through water, follow the following:
▷ Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function.
Warning
▷ Drive through calm water only.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
than maximum 19.6 inches/50 cm.
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
334
curely fastened again after they were removed,

for instance for cleaning. Warning
In idle state or with the engine switched off,
safety functions, for instance engine braking ef‐
Pedal feel when driving off
fect, braking assistance and steering assis‐
After turning on the drive-ready state from the tance, may not be available. There is a risk of
idle state, the pedal may feel unusual, short accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state or
pedal distance. After the brake pedal has been with the engine switched off.
fully released, the pedal will feel as usual again.
Driving in wet conditions Brake disc corrosion

When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gen‐ Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
tly press the brake pedal every few miles. on the brake pads are increased by the following
Ensure that this action does not endanger other circumstances:
traffic. ▷ Low mileage.
The heat generated during braking dries brake ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
discs and brake pads and protects them against used at all.
corrosion. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
In this way braking efficiency will be available ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
when you need it. agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a
Hills pulsating effect on the brakes in their response -
generally this cannot be corrected.
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear Condensation water under the
that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the
brakes may overheat and reduce brake effi‐
parked vehicle
ciency. When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops and collects under‐
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
neath the vehicle.
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
Flag bracket
Safety information
Safety information
Warning
NOTICE
Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brakes wearing out and At high speeds, a mounted flag can cause
possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of damage to the vehicle, the flag bracket, and the
accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the flag itself. There is a risk of damage to property.
brake system. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph / 130 km/h.
Remove flag before trips at high speeds.
335
Overview Mounting
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
The flag bracket is located on the side of the ve‐ steering response.
hicle.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
Mounting ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
1. Remove the protective cap. and the approved gross vehicle weight.
2. Insert flag horizontally. ▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
3. Turn the flag clockwise by 90° to lock the tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
flag. roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
Roof-mounted luggage loading area.
rack ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
General information ▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
Installation only possible with roof rack. using ratchet straps.
Roof racks are available as special accessories. ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
Safety information ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐
tion and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Warning
When driving with a roof load, for instance with
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐ Driving on racetracks
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐
tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of Warning
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with or motor sport type competition. There is a risk
roof load. of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport
or motor sport type competitions.
336
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during

racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This
wear is not covered by the warranty.
337
DRIVING TIPS Trailer towing
Trailer towing
Vehicle features and Loading
options Distribute cargo as evenly as possible on the
cargo area.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Stow the load as low and close to the trailer axle
cific and optional features offered with the series. as possible. A low center of gravity in the trailer
It also describes features and functions that are increases the driving safety of the entire vehicle-
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due trailer combination.
to the selected options or country versions. This Do not exceed the approved gross vehicle
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ weight of the trailer and the permissible trailer
tems. When using these functions and systems, load of the vehicle. The smaller value applies in
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ each case.
served.
Tire inflation pressure
General information Note the tire inflation pressure of the vehicle and
trailer.
The permissible trailer loads, axle loads, drawbar For the vehicle, the tire inflation pressure for
node weights, and the permissible gross vehicle higher loads applies.
weight are specified in the technical data. For the trailer, the specifications of the manufac‐
The vehicle is equipped with an enhanced sus‐ turer apply.
pension system on the rear axle and, depending Additional information:
on the vehicle type, with a more powerful cooling Tire inflation pressure specifications, refer to
system. page 350.
When the trailer power socket is in use, the vehi‐
cle will be raised or lowered to the normal level Flat Tire Monitor FTM
automatically. The adjustment to the normal level
After correcting the tire inflation pressure or
can occur when the trailer power socket is plug‐
hitching/unhitching a trailer, initialize the Flat Tire
ged in or when driving off.
Monitor.
Before driving Run-flat tires, refer to page 374.
Drawbar nose weight Tire pressure monitor

The maximum load of the towing vehicle is low‐ After correcting the tire inflation pressure or
ered by the weight of the trailer hitch and the hitching/unhitching a trailer, reset the Tire Pres‐
drawbar nose weight. The drawbar nose weight sure Monitor.
increases the vehicle weight. Do not exceed the Additional information:
approved gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐ Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 367.
hicle.
338
Trailer towing DRIVING TIPS
Exterior mirrors Safety information

Exterior mirrors, which allow the driver to see
both rear corners of the trailer, are available as Warning
special accessories from a dealer’s service cen‐
Depending on the design and loading of trail‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
ers, they may begin swinging at speeds ex‐
shop.
ceeding approx. 50 mph/80 km/h. There may
be a risk of accident or risk of damage to prop‐
Power consumption erty.
Adapt your speed when driving with a trailer.
General information
Immediately brake in the case of swinging. Ap‐
Before starting to drive, check the function of the ply necessary steering corrections as carefully
trailer tail lights. as possible.
Keep the activation times of the electronic sys‐
tems/power consumers short when towing a
camper to save the vehicle battery power. Warning
The tire inflation pressure must be adjusted to
Trailer tail lights
the increased axle load in trailer towing. Driving
▷ Turn signals/brake lights: 54 watts per side. with too low tire inflation pressure can damage
▷ Rear lights: 100 watts in total. the tires. There may be a risk of accident or risk
▷ Backup light: 54 watts in total. of damage to property. Do not exceed a speed
of 60 mph / 100 km/h. Increase the tire inflation
pressure of the towing vehicle by 0.2 bar. Note
Towing a trailer the maximum possible tire inflation pressure in‐
dicated on the tire.
General information
If the trailer socket is occupied, some driver as‐ Uphill grades
sistance systems are unavailable, or available to a
limited extent. A Check Control message is dis‐ General information
played where applicable. In the interest of safety and to avoid hindering
When driving with a trailer or load carrier and the the smooth flow of traffic, the towing of trailers is
trailer socket not occupied, some driver assis‐ permissible on uphill grades up to 12 %.
tance systems may have functional limitations or If higher trailer loads are approved at a later point
may malfunction. in time, the gradient limit is 8 %.
To prevent malfunctions, activate trailer towing.
When the trailer socket is occupied or trailer tow‐ Starting on uphill grades
ing is activated, some driver assistance systems The parking brake is automatically released
are unavailable, or available to a limited extent. A when the accelerator pedal is activated.
Check Control message is displayed where ap‐
In order to prevent rolling back during starting,
plicable.
use the parking brake.
Activating trailer towing, refer to page 340. 1. Pull and release switch before starting
off.
339
DRIVING TIPS Trailer towing
The parking brake is set. ▷ When the power consumption of a trailer is

2. Step on the accelerator pedal sufficiently to too low, for instance due to tail lights in LED
drive off. technology, to be detected by the system.
Hills
Activating trailer towing
A vehicle-trailer combination has the tendency to
swing more readily on hills.
Concept
Manually shift down to the next-lowest gear be‐
fore driving on a hill and drive downhill slowly. When driving with a trailer or load carrier and the
trailer socket not in use, some driver assistance
systems may have functional limitations or may
Trailer stabilization control malfunction. To prevent malfunctions, activate
trailer towing.
Concept Activating
This system supports the driver in stopping the
1. "CAR"
swinging of a trailer.
2. "Settings"
The trailer stabilization control detects swinging
and automatically brakes the vehicle quickly to 3. "General settings"
leave the critical speed range and stabilize the 4. "Trailer mode"
vehicle-trailer combination. 5. "Trailer mode"
General information
If the trailer power socket is in use but a trailer Mount for trailer hitch
has not been hitched, the system can become
active in certain driving situations, such as when General information
using a bicycle rack with lighting.
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h while a trailer is being
towed and the trailer power socket is in use.
System limits
The system cannot intervene or not intervene in
time in the following situations, for instance: The mount for the trailer hitch is located on the
▷ If a trailer jackknifes suddenly, for instance on rear of the vehicle.
slippery roads or loose surfaces. Information on suitable trailer hitches is found on
▷ If a trailer with a high center of gravity tilts, be‐ the underside of the mount, see arrow.
fore swinging is detected. Follow the Maintenance Instructions, refer to
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐ page 409.
vated or has malfunctioned.
340
Trailer towing DRIVING TIPS
Safety information Fittings for trailer safety chain
Warning
During driving operation, high temperatures can
occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance
caused by the exhaust gas system. Contact
with the hot components can cause burns.
There is a risk of injury. Do not touch hot com‐
ponents. Do not perform work in the vicinity of
hot components until after they have cooled
down. There are two fittings on the mount for the trailer
hitch for securing the trailer safety chain.
Removing the cover Secure the trailer safety chain to the fittings for
increased safety when driving with a trailer.
Ensure that the trailer safety chain can move
freely and is not dragging on the ground.
Brake Controller
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a Brake Controller installed by a dealer's
Pull the cover out of the back of the mount, and or repair shop.
stow it in the vehicle.
Information on installing a Brake Controller can
be obtained from a dealer's service center or an‐
Trailer connector other qualified service center or repair shop.
The socket is located to the left of the mount for

the trailer hitch.
341
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and Close the windows and glass
sunroof
options
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ results in increased air resistance and raises fuel
cific and optional features offered with the series. consumption.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Tires
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ General information
tems. When using these functions and systems, Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ instance tire size may influence consumption.
served.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Reducing fuel consumption
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
General information ing on a long trip.
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
the reduction of consumption and emission val‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
ues. tire wear.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Observe the correct tire inflation pressure as well
ferent factors. as the ECO tire inflation pressure, where applica‐
Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐ ble.
ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐ Additional information:
fluence fuel consumption and the environmental
Tire inflation pressure specifications, refer to
impact.
page 350.
Remove unnecessary cargo

Drive away without delay
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
Remove attached parts following away, but at moderate engine speeds.
use This is the quickest way of warming the cold en‐
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear gine up to operating temperature.
luggage racks which are no longer required fol‐
lowing use. Look well ahead when driving
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐ Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
namics and increase the fuel consumption. consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
342
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle Switch off these functions if they are not needed.
driving ahead of you. The ECO PRO drive mode supports the energy
conserving use of comfort features. These func‐
Avoid high engine speeds tions are automatically deactivated partially or
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐ completely.
sumption and reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐ Have maintenance carried out
cator. Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW
Use coasting conditions recommends that maintenance work be per‐
formed by a BMW service center.
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem.
For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐
ator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. ECO PRO
Switch off the engine during
Concept
longer stops
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
consumption. For this purpose, the engine con‐
Switching off the engine
trol and comfort features, for instance the climate
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐ control output, are adjusted.
stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
Steptronic transmission: under certain conditions
traffic congestion.
the engine is automatically decoupled from the
transmission in the D selector lever position. The
Auto Start/Stop function vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle auto‐ to reduce consumption. The D selector lever po‐
matically switches off the engine during a stop. sition remains engaged.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ PRO tips, can be displayed to assist with a fuel-
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐ efficient driving style.
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds
The achieved extended range is displayed in the
of switching off the engine.
instrument cluster as bonus range.
In addition, fuel consumption is also determined
by other factors, such as driving style, road con‐ General information
ditions, maintenance or environmental factors.
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and
Switch off any functions that are EfficientDynamics displays:
not currently needed
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
▷ ECO PRO seat climate control.
dow defroster require a lot of energy and in‐
crease fuel consumption, especially in city and ▷ ECO PRO climate control.
stop-and-go traffic. ▷ ECO PRO light and sight.
343
▷ ECO PRO limit An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of

▷ Coasting driving condition. the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ Driving style analysis. ▷ "Notification at:"

Set the desired speed for the ECO PRO
Overview speed.
Activating/deactivating ECO PRO

functions
The following ECO PRO functions can be acti‐
vated/deactivated:
▷ "Coasting"
▷ "ECO PRO seat heating"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO light and sight"
Button
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Activating ECO PRO
Coasting
Press the button. ECO PRO is displayed
Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging or
in the instrument cluster.
switching off the engine and coasting with the
engine idling.
Configuring ECO PRO
INDIVIDUAL ECO PRO seat climate control
The activation of ECO PRO will reduce the out‐
Via the Driving Dynamics Control put of the seat heating.
1. Activate ECO PRO.
ECO PRO climate control
2. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
Climate control is set to be efficient.
Via iDrive This means, it is possible to deviate slightly from
the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's
1. "CAR"
interior more slowly, to economize on consump‐
2. "Settings" tion.
3. "Driving mode"
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" ECO PRO light and sight
5. Select the desired setting. The output of exterior mirror heating and rear
window defroster is reduced.
rently used.
Resetting the settings
ECO PRO limit Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
▷ "ECO PRO speed": activate ECO PRO
speed. "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
344
Display in the instrument cluster If the acceleration is inefficient, the area between
the average consumption and the current con‐
General information sumption is colored red.
When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the In addition, the following information is displayed,
display switches to a special configuration. depending on the situation:
▷ Depending on the equipment: the total dis‐
ECO PRO bonus range tance driven while coasting.
A modified driving style helps you ▷ The total time that the engine has been
extend your driving distance. switched off during automatic engine stops.
The range extension can be dis‐ ▷ A gear shift indicator recommending the use
played as the bonus range in the of a more efficient gear.
instrument cluster.
The efficiency display includes the bonus range. Indications on the Control
If the bonus range appears in gray, the current
Display
driving style is inefficient.
General information
The display turns blue as soon as all conditions
for efficient driving are met. Information about the current effectiveness of
the ECO PRO functions can be displayed as en‐
The intervals for resetting the bonus range de‐ ergy flow.
pend on the settings of the trip data.
Displaying energy flow information
Consumption display 1. "CAR"
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: 2. "Driving information"
3. "Energy flow"
The following functions are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Coasting.
Engine-Off / Coasting
A pointer in the consumption display informs
about the current driving style: Concept
▷ The current consumption in relation to the Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐
average consumption is displayed. cally decoupled from the transmission in the D
▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the selector lever position. The vehicle continues
energy recovered by coasting or when brak‐ traveling with the engine idling to reduce con‐
ing. sumption. Selector lever position D remains en‐
gaged. This driving condition is referred to as
▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 2: display when
coasting.
accelerating.
Under certain conditions, the engine will not be
operated at idle while coasting but switched off
345
automatically in vehicles with Mild-Hybrid tech‐ Activating/deactivating coasting via

nology. When the engine is switched off, the shift paddles
tachometer points to READY in the instrument
1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right
cluster. The vehicle continues to coast without
shift paddle.
consuming fuel. This driving condition is referred
to as engine-off coasting. 2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right
shift paddle again.
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is de‐
pressed, the engine is automatically coupled to To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
the transmission again.
Display
General information
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐
ing mode. The coasting distance traveled is indicated
in coasting mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control. Indications on the Control Display
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use The coasting mode is displayed under energy
the function often and supports the efficient ef‐ flow while driving.
fect of coasting. The distance traveled in coasting mode is dis‐
played in the trip data.
The Coast and/or Engine-off Coast function is
available in the speed range from approx.
16 mph/25 km/h to .
The function is active if the following conditions
are met:
▷ The accelerator pedal is not depressed or the
accelerator pedal is released.
▷ Brake pedal not depressed or only slightly
Color code blue: coasting mode.
depressed.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
D. Displaying energy flow information
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating 1. "CAR"
temperature. 2. "Driving information"
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, 3. "Energy flow"
ACC, not activated.
System limits
Operation via shift paddles The function is not available under one of the fol‐
lowing conditions.
Concept ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
The coasting driving condition can be influenced
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
with the shift paddles.
steep uphill or downhill grades.
346
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or The more efficient the driving style, the more
vehicle electrical system drawing excessive bars are displayed in color and the faster the bo‐
current. nus range increases.
▷ Trailer towing. In contrast, a reduced number of bars will be dis‐
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control activated played with an inefficient driving style.
Driving style analysis

Concept
The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving style
and save some fuel.
General information
The current trip is assessed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by ad‐
justing your driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range
in the instrument cluster and on the Control Dis‐
play.
This function is available in ECO PRO drive
mode.
Calling up the Driving style

analysis
1. "CAR"
3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the Control Display

The display of the Driving style analysis shows
the efficiency of the Driving style.
347
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
options
NOTICE
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ With a driving range of less than
cific and optional features offered with the series. 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
It also describes features and functions that are sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
to the selected options or country versions. This property. Refuel promptly.
NOTICE
served.
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the
fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted
Follow the following when surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel.
Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There
refueling is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation prior to refuel‐ Fuel cap
ing.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely
Opening
into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle
during refueling causes: 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐
ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning
light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.
Fuel quality, refer to page 386.
348
Refueling MOBILITY
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service
pair shop.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to

the fuel filler flap.
Closing
Warning
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐
med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐
not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can
escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Pay attention that the retaining
strap is not jammed or crushed when closing
the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to un‐
lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with
an electrical fault.
349
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and Tire inflation pressure
specifications
options
In the tire inflation pressure table
cific and optional features offered with the series. The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
It also describes features and functions that are page 350, contains all tire inflation pressure
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
to the selected options or country versions. This ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
served. please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Tire inflation pressure ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
On the Control Display

General information
The current tire inflation pressure values and the
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure intended tire inflation pressure values for the
influence the following: mounted tires can be displayed on the Control
▷ The service life of the tires. Display.
▷ Road safety. To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the
▷ Driving comfort. tire sizes must be stored in the system and must
have been set for the mounted tires.
▷ Fuel consumption.
The current tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
cated on each tire.
Safety information
The reference tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
cated in the lower area of the Control Display.
Warning
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure Checking the tire inflation
may heat up significantly and sustain damage. pressure
This will have a negative impact on aspects of
handling, such as steering and braking re‐
General information
sponse. There is a risk of accident. Regularly
check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐ pressure increases with the tire temperature.
fore a long trip. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-read
by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
350
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Checking using tire inflation Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

pressure specifications in the tire With Tire Pressure Monitor:
inflation pressure table The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied
1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐
levels for the mounted tires. tings have been made.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐
tires, using a pressure gage, for example. sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual Pressure Monitor TPM.
tire inflation pressure deviates from the in‐
tended tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation pressures up to
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed 100 mph/160 km/h
onto the tire valves. For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold ues in the tire inflation pressure table and adjust
tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐ as necessary.
bient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when
the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ A driving distance of max. 1.25 miles/2 km
has not been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least
2 hours after a trip.
Check the tire inflation pressure of the emer‐
gency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and cor‐
These pressure values can also be found on the
rect it as needed.
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Checking using the tire inflation
pressure specifications on the Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Control Display
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Check whether the current tire inflation pres‐
sure levels deviate from the intended tire
pressure value.
5. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual
tire inflation pressure deviates from the in‐
tended tire inflation pressure.
After correcting the tire inflation

pressure
With runflat tires:
351
Tire inflation pressure values up Tire size Pressure specifications

to 100 mph/160 km/h in bar/PSI
Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42

X5 sDrive40i, X5 xDrive40i, with two 21 111 V XL M
rows of seats +S
Tire size Pressure specifications Emergency Speed up to a max. of

in bar/PSI wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
Specifications in
114 M
bar/PSI with cold
tires
X5 sDrive40i, X5 xDrive40i, with
three rows of seats
265/50 R 19 110 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
H XL A/S Tire size Pressure specifications
275/45 R 20 110 in bar/PSI
H XL A/S
Specifications in
255/55 R 18 109 bar/PSI with cold
W XL tires
265/50 R 19 110
H XL M+S
265/50 R 19 110 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
275/45 R 20 110
H XL A/S
V XL M+S
275/45 R 20 110
Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 - H XL A/S
20 110 Y XL
255/55 R 18 109
Rear: 305/40 R - 2.7 / 39 W XL
20 112 Y XL 265/50 R 19 110
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 - H XL M+S
21 107 Y XL 275/45 R 20 110
V XL M+S
Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42
21 111 Y XL Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 -
20 110 Y XL
Front: 275/35 R 2.6 / 38 -
22 104 Y XL Rear: 305/40 R 20 - 2.7 / 39
112 Y XL
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45
22 107 Y XL Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 -
21 107 Y XL
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 -
21 107 V XL M Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 2.9 / 42
+S 111 Y XL
352
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire inflation pressures at max.

in bar/PSI speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 -
21 107 V M+S XL Warning
Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 2.9 / 42 In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess
111 V M+S XL of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if
necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐
ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
X5 M50i table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire
damage and accidents could occur.
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐
Specifications in mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in
bar/PSI with the tire inflation pressure table and adjust as nec‐
cold tires essary.
Tire inflation pressure values

275/45 R 20 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
over 100 mph/160 km/h
110 H XL A/S
275/45 R 20 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 X5 xDrive40i, X5 sDrive40i, with two

110 V XL M+S rows of seats
Front: 275/40 R 2.5 / 36 - Without high-speed tuning feature
21 107 Y XL Tire size Pressure specifications
Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42 in bar/PSI
21 111 Y XL Specifications in
Front: 275/35 R 2.7 / 39 - bar/PSI with cold
22 104 Y XL tires
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45

22 107 Y XL 265/50 R 19 110 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44
H XL A/S
Front: 275/40 R 2.5 / 36 -
21 107 V XL M 275/45 R 20 110
+S H XL A/S
255/55 R 18 109
Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42
W XL
21 111 V XL M
+S 265/50 R 19 110
H XL M+S
Emergency Speed up to a max. of
275/45 R 20 110
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
V XL M+S
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
114 M Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 -
20 110 Y XL
353
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Rear: 305/40 R - 2.7 / 39 Front: 275/45 R 2.8 / 41 -

20 112 Y XL 20 110 Y XL
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 - Rear: 305/40 R - 3.1 / 45

21 107 Y XL 20 112 Y XL
Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42 Front: 275/40 R 2.8 / 41 -

21 111 Y XL 21 107 Y XL
Front: 275/35 R 2.6 / 38 - Rear: 315/35 R - 3.1 / 45

22 104 Y XL 21 111 Y XL
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45 Front: 275/35 R 2.8 / 41 -

22 107 Y XL 22 104 Y XL
Front: 275/40 R 2.6 / 38 - Rear: 315/30 R - 3.3 / 48

21 107 V XL M 22 107 Y XL
+S
Front: 275/40 R 2.8 / 41 -
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.1 / 45 21 107 V XL M
21 111 V XL M +S
+S
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.3 / 48
Emergency Speed up to a max. of 21 111 V XL M
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h +S
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60 Emergency Speed up to a max. of
114 M wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature 114 M
in bar/PSI X5 xDrive40i, X5 sDrive40i, with
Specifications in three rows of seats
bar/PSI with cold Without high-speed tuning feature
tires
265/50 R 19 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44

110 H XL M+S
275/45 R 20 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48

110 V XL M+S
255/55 R 18 2.9 / 42 3.4 / 49

109 W XL
354
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Specifications in Front: 275/45 R 2.9 / 42 -

bar/PSI with cold 20 110 Y XL
tires
Rear: 305/40 R - 3.4 / 49
20 112 Y XL
265/50 R 19 110 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 Front: 275/40 R 2.9 / 42 -
H XL A/S 21 107 Y XL
275/45 R 20 110
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.4 / 49
H XL A/S
21 111 Y XL
255/55 R 18 109
W XL Front: 275/40 R 2.9 / 42 -
21 107 V XL M
265/50 R 19 110
+S
H XL M+S
275/45 R 20 110 Rear: 315/35 R - 3.4 / 49
V XL M+S 21 111 V XL M
+S
Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 -
20 110 Y XL
X5 M50i
Rear: 305/40 R 20 - 2.7 / 39
Without high-speed tuning feature
112 Y XL
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 - in bar/PSI
21 107 Y XL
Specifications in
Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 2.9 / 42
bar/PSI with
111 Y XL
cold tires
Front: 275/40 R 2.6 / 38 -
21 107 V XL M+S
275/45 R 20 2.4 / 35 2.9 / 42
Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 3.1 / 45 110 H XL A/S
111 V XL M+S
275/45 R 20 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44
110 V XL M+S
With high-speed tuning feature
Front: 275/40 R 2.5 / 36 -
21 107 Y XL
in bar/PSI
Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42
Specifications in
21 111 Y XL
bar/PSI with cold
tires Front: 275/35 R 2.7 / 39 -
22 104 Y XL
265/50 R 19 110 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45

H XL M+S 22 107 Y XL
355
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications in

in bar/PSI bar/PSI
Front: 275/40 R 2.7 / 39 - Rear: 315/35 R - 3.3 / 48

21 107 V XL M 21 111 V XL M
+S +S
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.1 / 45 Emergency Speed up to a max. of

21 111 V XL M wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
+S T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
Emergency Speed up to a max. of 114 M
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
114 M Tire identification marks
With high-speed tuning feature Tire size
Tire size Pressure specifications in 245/45 R 18 96 Y
bar/PSI 245: nominal width in mm
Specifications 45: aspect ratio in %

in bar/PSI with R: radial tire code
cold tires 18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
275/45 R 20 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48 Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
110 V XL M+S
Front: 275/40 R 2.8 / 41 -

Maximum tire load
21 107 Y XL Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.1 / 45
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall
21 111 Y XL
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on
Front: 275/35 R 3.1 / 45 - the certification label on the driver door B-pillar.
22 104 Y XL Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.4 / 49
Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and
22 107 Y XL
tire loads, respectively.
Front: 275/40 R 3.0 / 44 -
21 107 V XL M Speed letter
+S
Designation Maximum speed
Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S up to 112 mph/180 km/h
356
Designation Maximum speed Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C
T up to 118 mph/190 km/h
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐
H up to 131 mph/210 km/h eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
V up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W up to 167 mph/270 km/h Treadwear

Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
(Y) above 186 mph/300 km/h under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
Tire Identification Number would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 2120
The relative performance of tires depends upon
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand the actual conditions of their use, however, and
xxx: tire size and tire design may depart significantly from the norm due to
2120: tire age variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Traction
Tire age The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Recommendation Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least on wet pavement as measured under controlled
every 6 years. conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Manufacture date
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
You can find the manufacture date of the tire on
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
the tire's sidewall.
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
Designation Manufacture date planing, or peak traction characteristics.
DOT … 2120 21st week 2020
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
Uniform Tire Quality Grading and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
Quality grades can be found where applicable on generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and when tested under controlled conditions on a
maximum section width. specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature high temperature can cause the material of the
A tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
DOT Quality Grades The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐
ance which all passenger car tires must meet un‐
Treadwear
der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
357
No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels Minimum tread depth
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Warning
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in com‐
bination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure. Wear indicators are distributed around the tire
circumference. These wear indicators have the
legally required minimum height of
RSC – Run-flat tires 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 361, are labeled with
a circular symbol containing the letters RSC The positions of the wear indicators are marked
marked on the sidewall. on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐
tor.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold Tire damage
weather performance than summer tires.
General information
Tire tread Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Summer tires Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
risk of hydroplaning.
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
Winter tires avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for file tires.
winter operation. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
358
▷ Road damage. Wheel and tire combination

▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading. General information
▷ Incorrect tire storage. You can ask the dealer's service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
Safety information
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Warning Safety information

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure,
which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There Warning
is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected
while driving, immediately reduce speed and Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your
stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐
purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐
service center or another qualified service cen‐ erances despite the same official size rating.
ter or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or trans‐ There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐
ported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
but have them replaced. use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
vehicle type.
Warning
Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐ Warning
stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high
speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross- Mounted steel wheels can cause technical
section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the problems, for instance unexpected loosening of
higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐ the lug bolts and damage to the brake discs.
ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐ There is a risk of accident. Do not mount steel
ble, avoid driving over objects or road condi‐ wheels.
tions that may damage tires, or drive over them
slowly and carefully.
Warning
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a
negative impact on the vehicle's handling and
Changing wheels and tires on the function of a variety of systems, such as
the ABS Antilock Braking System or DSC Dy‐
Mounting and wheel balancing namic Stability Control. There is a risk of acci‐
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out dent. To maintain good handling and vehicle
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified response, use only tires with a single tread con‐
service center or repair shop. figuration from a single manufacturer. The
manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that
you use wheels and tires that have been rec‐
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have
359
the original wheel/tire combination remounted Retreaded tires

on the vehicle as soon as possible.
Warning
Warning Retreaded tires can have different tire casing

structures. With advanced age the service life
Unsuitable wheel studs, such as single-section
can be limited. There is a risk of an accident.
wheel studs, may loosen or come off. The
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
wheel may come loose during driving. There is
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
a risk of accident. Use only two-section wheel
studs that have been categorized as suitable
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec‐
for the respective wheel type by the manufac‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
turer of the vehicle.
Winter tires
Recommended tire brands
General information
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
usually do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires

For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐ If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
brands can be identified by a star on the tire then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐
sidewall. mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐
able from a dealer's service center or another
New tires With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing exceed the permissible maximum speed.
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in Changing runflat tires
time.
When changing from run-flat tires to standard
Drive conservatively for the first
tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle contains
200 miles/300 km.
a compact spare tire ("donut") or tire mobility kit.
or repair shop.
360
Rotating wheels between axles General information

The wheels consist of tires that are self-support‐
Warning ing, to a limited degree, and possibly special
rims.
Rotating tires between the axles on vehicles
with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
and rear axles can cause damage to the tires main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
and the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Do of a tire inflation pressure loss.
not rotate the tires between the axles on vehi‐ Follow the instructions for continued driving with
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the a flat tire.
front and rear axles.
Safety information
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐ Warning
tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐ The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat
formation is available from a dealer's service cen‐ tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair stance, reduced lane stability when braking,
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
correct, if needed. ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐
cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
Storing tires speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ Warning
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐
ing to drive with a flat tire. There may be a risk
Storage of accident or risk of damage to property. Do
▷ Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark not exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when
place. driving with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately
brake in the case of swinging. Apply necessary
▷ Always protect tires against all contact with steering corrections as carefully as possible.
oil, grease, and solvents.
▷ Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
▷ Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Run-flat tires
Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving under re‐
stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐
plete loss of tire inflation pressure.
361
Label General information

▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility
System found on the compressor and sealant
container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with ▷ Do not remove foreign bodies that have pe‐
Run-flat System Component RSC. netrated the tire. Remove foreign objects only
when they are visibly protruding from the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
Repairing a flat tire container and apply it to the steering wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the wheel
Safety measures electronics. In this case, have the electronics
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from checked and replaced at the next opportu‐
passing traffic and on solid ground. nity.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. ▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
Overview
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage Storage
the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
The Mobility System is located behind the left
side trim in the cargo area.
Concept Unlock the cover of the left side panel, arrow 1,
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can and fold open, arrow 2.
be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel.
To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the
tires, which seals the damage from the inside.
362
Sealant container ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1. Filling the tire with sealant

▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Safety information
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
DANGER
Compressor
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
1 Sealant container unlocking NOTICE

2 Sealant container holder The compressor can overheat during extended
3 Tire pressure gage operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not run the compressor for more than
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
10 minutes.
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket Filling
8 Connection hose 1. Shake the sealant container.
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
363
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of 5. With the compressor switched off, insert the
the sealant container. Do not kink the hose. connector into the power socket in the vehi‐
cle interior.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on

the compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐ 6. With standby state or drive-ready state
gages audibly. switched on, switch on the compressor.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill
onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel. the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation
pressure of approx. 2.0 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire
inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx.
5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this
point.
Checking and adjusting the tire

inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at
least 2 bar must be reached.
364
Removing and stowing the sealant center or another qualified service center or
container repair shop.
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐ When a tire pressure of at least 2 bar is
tainer from the tire valve. reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure
is reached.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
pressor.
7. Pull the connector out of the power socket in
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suita‐
the vehicle interior.
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
not reached Minimum tire inflation pressure is
1. Pull the connector out of the power socket in
reached
the vehicle interior. 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐
ute the sealant in the tire. 2. Pull the connector out of the power socket in
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem. 3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in
the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Adjustment
1. Stop at a suitable location.
4. Insert the connector into the power socket in
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
5. With standby state or drive-ready state

switched on, switch on the compressor.
When the tire pressure does not reach at
least 2 bar, contact a manufacturer service
365
3. Insert the connector into the power socket in

Snow chains
Safety information
Warning
With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐
ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐
tact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are designated
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
2.0 bar: snow chains.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with
standby state or drive-ready state
switched on, switch on the compressor. Warning
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage
button on the compressor. tires and vehicle components. There may be a
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ risk of accident or risk of damage to property.
pressor from the tire valve. Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket in to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Fine-link snow chains
Continuing the trip The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
of 50 mph/80 km/h. fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor again.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant con‐ available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
tainer of the Mobility System promptly. other qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ Run-flat tires, refer to page 374. Use
▷ Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 367. Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 255/55 R18.
▷ 265/50 R19.
▷ 275/45 R20.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
366
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after 4. "Tire chains"

mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in 5. "Snow chains installed"
incorrect readings.
Starting with the permissible maximum speed
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor after with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h the rear
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in axle steering will be switched on again automati‐
incorrect readings. cally.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control DTC to optimize the
drive power. Tire pressure monitor
Maximum speed with snow Concept
chains The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when four mounted tires. The system warns you if
using snow chains. there is a loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Rear axle steering during General information

operation with snow chains Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐
tion pressure and tire temperature.
General information Using the tire settings in iDrive, the system can
In order to guarantee free running of the wheels automatically compare the specified target pres‐
when operating with snow chains, rear axle sures with the actual tire inflation pressures.
steering of the integral active steering must be If tires are being used that are not specified on
switched off when snow chains are mounted. the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle,
such as tires with special approval, the system
Safety information needs to be actively reset. The system will then
take over the actual tire inflation pressures as the
Warning target pressures.
When rear axle steering is switched on and When operating the system, also note the infor‐
snow chains are mounted, there can be contact mation found in the Tire inflation pressure chap‐
between snow chains and the chassis. There ter.
may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to Additional information:
property. With mounted snow chains, switch off Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 350.
the rear axle steering.
Safety information
Switching off rear axle steering
The rear axle steering is switched off by specify‐ Warning
ing that snow chains are installed. The display of the target pressures is not a
substitute for the tire inflation pressure details
1. "CAR"
on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the tire set‐
2. "Settings" tings can lead to incorrect target tire inflation
3. "General settings" pressure values. In this case, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that the notification of a loss of tire infla‐
367
tion pressure will be reliable. There is a risk of Changing settings

injury and risk of damage to property. Ensure 1. "CAR"
that the tire sizes of the mounted tires are dis‐
played correctly and match the details on the 2. "Vehicle status"
tires and on the vehicle. 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. "Tire settings"
5. "Tire selection"
6. "Manual"
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of 7. "Tire type"
tire inflation pressure is not assured: ▷ "Summer"
▷ Every time a tire or wheel is changed, the ▷ "Winter/All-year"
correct details on the mounted tires must be 8. Select the tire type that is mounted on the
entered in the tire settings. rear axle.
▷ The Tire Pressure Monitor does not activate For tires with special approval:
until after driving for a few minutes:
"Other tires".
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Observe further proceeding in the perform a
▷ After a reset, for tires with special appro‐ reset section.
val.
9. Select the maximum road speed that will be
▷ After changing the tire setting. used with the tires.
▷ For tires with special approval: 10. "Save tire settings"
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset The measurement of the current tire inflation
was performed with the correct tire infla‐ pressure is started. The measurement progress
tion pressure. is displayed.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, a reset was per‐ Status display
formed.
▷ Wheels with wheel electronics. Current status
The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
Tire settings trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐
tive.
General information
1. "CAR"
The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be gath‐
2. "Vehicle status"
ered from the tire inflation pressure details on the
vehicle or directly on the tires. 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The tire details do not need to be re-entered The current status is displayed.
when the tire inflation pressure is corrected.
For summer and winter tires, the tire details en‐ Current tire inflation pressure
tered last are stored. After a tire or wheel re‐ The current tire inflation pressure is displayed for
placement, the settings of the tire sets used last each tire.
can be selected.
368
The current tire inflation pressures may change One to four yellow wheels
during driving operation or depending on the ex‐ A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐
ternal temperature. sure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Current tire temperature Gray wheels

Depending on the model, the current tire tem‐ It may not be possible to identify tire inflation
peratures are displayed. pressure losses.
The current tire temperatures may change while Possible causes:
driving or due to the external temperature.
▷ Malfunction.
Target pressure ▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement,
after confirmation of the tire settings.
The target pressure for the tires on the front and
rear axles is displayed. ▷ For tires with special approval: a reset is per‐
formed for the system.
The specified target pressures take the influence
of driving operation and external temperature on
the tire temperature into account. The appropri‐ For tires with special approval:
ate target pressure is always displayed, inde‐ perform a reset
pendent of the weather situation, tire tempera‐ 1. "CAR"
tures and travel times.
2. "Vehicle status"
The displayed target pressure may change and
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
may differ from the tire inflation pressure details
on the door pillar of the driver's door. The tire in‐ 4. Make sure that correct tire settings have
flation pressure can thus be corrected to the been made.
value of the displayed target pressures. Tire settings, refer to page 368.
The target pressure is immediately adjusted if 5. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive
the vehicle load is changed in the tire settings. off.
6. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".
Tire conditions 7. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐
General information
ing is displayed "Resetting tire pressure…".
Tire and system status are indicated by the color
After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire
of the wheels and a text message on the Control
inflation pressures are accepted as the target tire
Display.
inflation pressures. The reset is completed auto‐
Any existing messages may not be deleted if the matically while driving.
target pressure is not reached after the tire infla‐
After a successfully completed reset, the wheels
tion pressure is corrected.
on the Control Display are shown in green and
the following is displayed: "Reset successful."
All wheels green
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you
▷ The system is active and bases warnings on
continue the reset resumes automatically.
the target pressures.
▷ For tires with special approval: the system is
active and bases warnings on the tire inflation
pressures stored during the last reset.
369
Messages: for tires without In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
special approval sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause

General information
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Safety information Measure

1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
Warning speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire 2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as station, check the tire inflation pressure in all
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires four tires and correct if necessary.
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle If there is a significant loss of tire
is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐ inflation pressure
mation on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires. Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
Message trol Display.
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications, for instance
when the tire has not been suffi‐ Measure
ciently inflated or in the case of a 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
natural steady tire pressure loss. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
Measure 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed. mal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular sym‐
If the tire inflation pressure is too bol containing the letters RSC marked on the
low tire's sidewall.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 361.
Message 3. Read the description on What to do in case of
A yellow warning light is illuminated in a flat tire.
370
Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to Measure

page 372. 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
Messages: for tires with special 2. Perform a system reset.
approval
If the tire inflation pressure is too
General information low
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on. Message
Safety information the instrument cluster.
Warning In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐

sage appears on the Control Display.
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as Symbol Possible cause
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle No reset was performed for the sys‐
is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐ tem. The system issues a warning
mation on run-flat tires and continued driving based on the tire inflation pressures
with these tires. stored during the last reset.
Measure
If a tire inflation pressure check is 1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
required speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
Message 2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas

station, check the tire inflation pressure in all
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐ four tires and correct if necessary.
pears on the Control Display.
3. Reset the system.
Sym‐ Possible cause
bol If there is a significant loss of tire
Inflation was not carried out accord‐ inflation pressure
ing to specifications, e.g., the tire has
not been sufficiently inflated. Message
The system has detected a wheel A yellow warning light is illuminated in

change, but no reset was done. the instrument cluster.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
below the level of the last reset.
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
No reset was performed for the sys‐ trol Display.
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
371
Symbol Possible cause Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
may damage the wheel electronics. Have the
There is a flat tire or a major loss in electronics replaced at the next opportunity.
No reset was performed for the sys‐ Run-flat tires
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures Safety information
stored during the last reset.
Warning
Measure
The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ stance, reduced lane stability when braking,
vers. braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐
mal tires or run-flat tires. cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular sym‐ speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
bol containing the letters RSC marked on the
tire's sidewall.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 361. Warning
3. Read the description on What to do in case of Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐
a flat tire. ing to drive with a flat tire. There may be a risk
of accident or risk of damage to property. Do
Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to
not exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when
page 372.
driving with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately
Actions in the event of a flat tire steering corrections as carefully as possible.
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire. Maximum speed
Check the tire inflation pressure in all four You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
of a flat tire kit.
Continued driving with a flat tire
For tires with special approval: when the tire
inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Follow the following when continuing to drive
Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been re‐ with a damaged tire:
set. In this case, perform the reset. 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
If tire damage cannot be found, contact a vers.
dealer’s service center or another qualified 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by tires at the next opportunity.
changing the wheel.
372
Possible driving range with a These circumstances may cause a warning

depressurized tire when temperatures fall very sharply.
The distance for which it may be possible to Following a temperature-related warning, the tar‐
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle get pressures are displayed on the Control Dis‐
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, play again after a short distance.
external temperature. The driving range may be
less but may also be more if an economical driv‐ Sudden tire pressure loss
ing style is used. The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight damage caused by external circumstances.
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up Failure performing a reset
to 50 miles/80 km.
Tires with special approval: the system will not
function correctly if a reset was not performed,
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
for example a flat tire may be indicated although
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle the tire inflation pressures are correct.
differently, potentially leading to conditions such
as the following: Malfunction
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances. Message
▷ Changed self-steering properties. The yellow warning light flashes and is
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering then illuminated continuously. A Check
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance Control message is displayed. It may not
curbs or potholes. be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Final tire failure Measure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ ▷ A wheel without wheel electronics, such as
cate the final failure of a tire. an emergency wheel, is mounted: have the
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the wheels checked, if needed.
tire could come loose and cause an accident. ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ with the same radio frequency: after leaving
ice center or another qualified service center or the area of the interference, the system auto‐
repair shop. matically becomes active again.
▷ For tires with special approval: the system
System limits was unable to complete the reset. Perform a
system reset again.
Temperature Malfunction: have the system checked.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
temperature. Declaration according to NHTSA/
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐ Monitoring System
tion pressure. Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
tire temperature falls again.
373
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐

cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐ Concept
hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐ on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, tween the individual wheels while driving.
your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐
ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐
nates, you should stop and check your tires as The system does not measure the actual infla‐
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper tion pressure in the tires.
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to Functional requirements
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐ The following conditions must be met for the
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐ system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note tire inflation pressure is not assured:
that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility
tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
tion pressure.
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. ▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a value, an initialization was performed.
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS Status display
malfunction indicator is combined with the low The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor FTM
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a can be displayed, for instance whether the FTM
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐ is active.
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon 1. "CAR"
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ 2. "Vehicle status"
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐
The status is displayed.
tect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement Initialization required
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that An initialization must be performed in the follow‐
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐ ing situations:
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐ justed.
hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
374
Performing initialization In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐

sage appears on the Control Display.
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a flat Symbol Possible cause
tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire
inflation pressures. There is a flat tire or a major loss in
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1. "CAR" Measure
2. "Vehicle status" 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
3. "Flat Tire Monitor" vers.
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
off. mal tires or run-flat tires.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset" Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular sym‐
6. Drive away. bol containing the letters RSC marked on the
The initialization is completed while driving, tire's sidewall.
which can be interrupted at any time. Run-flat tires, refer to page 361.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes. Actions in the event of a flat tire
Messages Normal tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.
General information To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ all four tires, for instance using the tire pres‐
bility Control is switched on, if needed. sure gage of a flat tire kit.
When the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
Safety information is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor FTM may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize the
Warning system.
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as sible, please contact a dealer’s service center
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires or another qualified service center or repair
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of shop.
accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by
is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐ changing the wheel.
mation on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires.
Indication of a flat tire

375
Run-flat tires Possible driving range with a

depressurized tire
Safety information The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
Warning is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions,
external temperature. The driving range may be
The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ ing style is used.
stance, reduced lane stability when braking,
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐ and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
Warning
differently, potentially leading to conditions such
Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐ as the following:
ing to drive with a flat tire. There may be a risk
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
of accident or risk of damage to property. Do
not exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when ▷ Longer braking distances.
driving with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately ▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
steering corrections as carefully as possible.
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
curbs or potholes.
Maximum speed
Final tire failure
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
cate the final failure of a tire.
Continued driving with a flat tire Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the
tire could come loose and cause an accident.
Follow the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire: Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ repair shop.
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. System limits
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four The system could be delayed or malfunction in
tires at the next opportunity. the following situations:
When the tire inflation pressure in all four tires ▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐ check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
tem.
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in
advance.
376
▷ The system has not been initialized.

▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sur‐ Warning
face. The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, provided in order to perform a wheel change in
high lateral acceleration (drifting). the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐
signed for frequent use; for example, changing
▷ When driving with snow chains.
from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐
quently may cause it to become jammed or
Changing wheels/tires damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. Only use the jack to attach
an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a
General information breakdown.
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel
does not always need to be changed immedi‐
ately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure Warning
due to a flat tire.
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip
available as accessories from a dealer’s service away. There is a risk of injury. If possible,
center or another qualified service center or re‐ change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐
pair shop. sistant surface.
Safety information
Warning
DANGER The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle
lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any
all safety measures are observed, there is a risk other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.
of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack
tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the Warning
vehicle and do not start the engine. When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
DANGER slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐ of injury or risk of damage to property. When
hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in‐
jack to bear weight. They have the potential to serted in the jacking point next to the wheel
exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐ housing.
ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place
supports under the vehicle jack.
377
On a slight downhill gradient

Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it.
property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐
ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly
on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐

hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐
Securing the vehicle against
jects, for instance rocks, under the wheels of
rolling both the front and rear axles against the rolling
direction.
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐
tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away Lug bolt lock
when changing a wheel.
Concept
On a level surface The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard
vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close
to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in

front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the
wheel to be changed.
▷ Lug lock bolt, arrow 1.

▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug lock bolt.
378
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug Jacking points for the vehicle
bolt. jack
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt. If nec‐
essary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
lock bolt.
2. Screw on the lug lock bolt. The tightening
torque is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐
ing on the lug bolt.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
Preparing the vehicle cated at the indicated positions.
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground
at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the im‐
mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐
able hazard warning light at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
▷ Deactivate the air suspension level adjust‐
ment.
Two-axle ride level control, refer to page 282.
379
Jacking up the vehicle 3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle
jack crank or lever clockwise.
Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when using
the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐
ply with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the vehicle
jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1,

and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with
your other hand, arrow 2. 4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as
soon as the vehicle jack is under load and
continue turning the vehicle jack crank or
lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐

cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel
to be changed.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands

vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is

with the entire surface on the ground and the
relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm
above ground.
380
Mounting a wheel 5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐
Warning
est dealer's service center or another quali‐
Unsuitable wheel studs, such as single-section fied service center or repair shop.
wheel studs, may loosen or come off. The
wheel may come loose during driving. There is
a risk of accident. Use only two-section wheel Emergency wheel
studs that have been categorized as suitable
for the respective wheel type by the manufac‐
turer of the vehicle. Concept
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required. can be used in place of the wheel with the defec‐
tive tire. The emergency wheel is only intended
1. Unscrew the lug bolts. for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel
2. Remove the wheel. has been replaced.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐ General information
wise pattern until hand-tight. Mount one emergency wheel only.
When non-original light-alloy wheels of the Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐ emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and
companying lug bolts may have to be used as correct it as needed.
well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and Safety information
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
Warning
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise
to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐ The emergency wheel has particular dimen‐
cle. sions. When driving with an emergency wheel,
changed driving properties may occur, for in‐
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.
stance reduced lane stability when braking, lon‐
ger braking distance, and changed self-steering
After the wheel change properties in the limit area. There is a risk of ac‐
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐ cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
ing torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area,
if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐
der the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor again.
381
Overview Inserting the emergency wheel
1. Depending on the vehicle equipment:

press the button. The electric cargo cover
travels up.
2. Fold up the cargo floor panel.
3. Open the lower tailgate.
4. Place the emergency wheel in the storage
well.
5. Position the retaining plate.
The emergency wheel and the wheel change
6. Screw on and tighten the butterfly screw.
tools are located in the cargo area under the
cargo floor panel. 7. Insert the tool holder.
8. Depending on the vehicle equipment: insert
the crossmember and screw it tight with the
Removing the emergency wheel
wingnuts.
1. Depending on the vehicle equipment: 9. Push the cargo floor panel downward.
press the button. The electric cargo cover
travels up.
2. Fold up the cargo floor panel.
3. Depending on the equipment version: re‐
move the crossmember. For this purpose, re‐
move the wingnuts on both sides of the
crossmember.
4. Remove the tool holder from the emergency
wheel.
5. Unscrew the butterfly screw, arrow 1.
6. Remove retaining plate, arrow 2.

7. If necessary, open the lower tailgate.
8. Remove the emergency wheel from the stor‐
age well.
382
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Engine compartment
Overview
Engines with 4 or 6 cylinders
1 Vehicle identification number 5 Oil filler neck

2 Filler neck for washer fluid 6 Coolant reservoir, auxiliary cooling
3 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 7 Coolant reservoir, engine
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
383
MOBILITY Engine compartment
8-cylinder engine
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 5 Coolant reservoir, auxiliary cooling

2 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 6 Oil filler neck
3 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 7 Vehicle identification number
4 Coolant reservoir, engine
Hood
Warning
The engine compartment accommodates mov‐
Safety information ing components. Certain components in the
engine compartment can also move with the
Warning vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator
Improperly executed work in the engine com‐ fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into
partment can damage vehicle components and the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐
impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an ing and hair away from moving parts.
accident and damage to property. Have work in
the engine compartment performed by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service Warning
center or repair shop. There are protruding parts, for instance locking
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk
of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.
384
Engine compartment MOBILITY
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again,

Warning arrow 2.
An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐ Hood can be opened.
ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of acci‐ 3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
dent. Stop immediately and correctly close the
hood. Closing
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening and
closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of hood is clear
during opening and closing.
NOTICE Energetically close the hood from approx.

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the 20 in/50 cm.
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to The hood must engage on both sides.
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
NOTICE
When the hood is closed, it must engage on
both sides. Pressing again can damage the
hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
Open the hood again and then close it energet‐
ically. Avoid pressing again.
Opening
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
385
MOBILITY Operating materials
Operating materials
options
CAUTION
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
cific and optional features offered with the series. harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
It also describes features and functions that are ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due stalling, especially under certain environmental
to the selected options or country versions. This conditions such as high ambient temperature
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ and high altitude, may occur.
tems. When using these functions and systems, If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
served. brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
Fuel recommendation chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
General information may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
Depending on the region, many gas stations sell nance.
fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐
ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier. NOTICE
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
Gasoline wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
General information converter is permanently damaged. There is a
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. the following in the case of gasoline engines:
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ ▷ Leaded gasoline.
taining metal must not be used. ▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, or iron.
i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
dards: ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
386
Operating materials MOBILITY
Engine oil
NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and
the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
General information
erty. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage The engine oil consumption is dependent on
of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel your driving style and driving conditions.
with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐
M100. ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the
following situations, for instance:
NOTICE ▷ Sporty driving style.
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum ▷ Break-in of the engine.
quality can compromise engine function or
▷ Idling of the engine.
cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not fill with fuel that does ▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified
not comply with the minimum quality. as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear on the
Control Display depending on the engine oil
Recommended fuel grade level.
BMW recommends AKI 91.
M Performance model: Safety information
Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated NOTICE
performance and consumption values. An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
Minimum fuel grade property. Immediately add engine oil.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating,
the engine may produce knocking sounds when NOTICE
starting at high external temperatures. This has Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
no effect on the engine life. the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐
ing principles:
387
▷ Monitoring. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible

▷ Detailed measurement. operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, for instance when
General information
taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a
detailed measurement. During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Monitoring
Concept ▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
The engine oil level is monitored electronically ▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N or P
while driving and can be shown on the Control and accelerator pedal not depressed.
Display. ▷ The drive-ready state is switched on by
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible pressing the Start/Stop button.
operating range, a Check Control message is ▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐
displayed. ature.
A red indicator light indicates that the en‐
gine oil pressure is too low. Performing a detailed measurement
1. "CAR"
Functional requirements 2. "Vehicle status"
A current measured value is available after ap‐ 3. "Engine oil level"

prox. 30 minutes of normal driving. 4. "Engine oil measurement"
5. "Start measurement"
Displaying the engine oil level
The engine oil level is checked and displayed via
1. "CAR" a scale.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level" Adding engine oil
The engine oil level is displayed.
General information
System limits Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
When making frequent short-distance trips or played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be pos‐ be added is indicated in the message shown on
sible to calculate a measured value. In this case, the Control Display.
the measured value for the last, sufficiently long Only add suitable types of engine oil.
trip is displayed. Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
state before adding engine oil.
Detailed measurement Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle
is stationary and displayed via a scale.
388
Safety information Opening, refer to page 385.

2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
Warning
Operating materials, for instance oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐
low the instructions on the containers. Avoid
the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes
with operating materials. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the lid.
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐ Engine oil types to add
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil. General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
NOTICE Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐ Safety information
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐ NOTICE
ice center or another qualified service center or Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a
repair shop. risk of damage to property. Do not use oil addi‐
tives.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐ NOTICE
partment.
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in
Additional information: the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐
For an overview, refer to page 383. age to property. When selecting an engine oil,
make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil
Adding engine oil rating.
1. Opening the hood.
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating
standards:
389
Gasoline engine exceed the service intervals indicated in the ve‐

hicle.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+. The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you

have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
BMW Longlife-17 FE+. fied service center or repair shop change the en‐
gine oil.
The BMW Longlife-14 FE+ and BMW Long‐
life-17 FE+ oil ratings are not suitable for the 50i
gasoline engine.
Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not
available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil
with the following oil rating can be added:
Oil rating
API SL.
Coolant
API SM.
API SN. General information

Coolant consists of water and additives.
Viscosity grades Not all commercially available additives are suita‐
ble for the vehicle. Do not mix additives of differ‐
Viscosity grades ent colors. Observe the water - additive mixing
SAE 0W-20. ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable addi‐
tives is available from a dealer’s service center or
SAE 0W-30. another qualified service center or repair shop.
The viscosity grade SAE 0W-20 is not suitable Safety information

for gasoline engine 50i.
More information about suitable oil ratings and
Warning
viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ With the engine hot and the cooling system
fied service center or repair shop. open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling
system with the engine cooled down.
Engine oil change
NOTICE Warning
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion Additives are harmful and incorrect additives
can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐ can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to and risk of damage to property. Do not allow
property. It is recommended that you do not additives to come into contact with skin, eyes
390
or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives Adding coolant

only. 1. Let the engine cool.
Coolant level Opening, refer to page 385.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
General information counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
Depending on the motorization, there are up to sure to dissipate, then open it.
two coolant reservoirs in the engine compart‐ 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
ment. Check and top up the coolant levels on a
5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
regular basis.
the specified level; do not overfill.
The coolant level is indicated using minimum
6. Close the lid.
and maximum markings in the filler neck of the
coolant reservoir. 7. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated
as soon as possible.
Depending on the engine installation, the coolant
reservoir is located on the right side or the left
side of the engine compartment.
Disposal
Additional information: Comply with the relevant environmental
protection regulations when disposing of
For an overview, refer to page 383.
coolant and coolant additives.
Checking the coolant level

1. Let the engine cool.
Washer fluid
Opening, refer to page 385.
General information
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
voir.
sure to dissipate, then open it.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be
the minimum and maximum marks in the filler used.
neck.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
Warning
Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a risk
of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐
6. Close the lid. tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away
from ignition sources. Do not refill operating
391
materials into different bottles. Store operating Overview

materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid
dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage
instructions on the washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐

Warning gine compartment.
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐
tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐
Malfunction
jury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐ trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐
ervoir. correct readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid
for the water-repelling effect on the windows
can lead to damage to the washing system.
add silicon-containing additives to the washer
fluid.
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze can damage the washing
system. There is a risk of damage to property.
Do not mix different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze. Follow the information and
mixing ratios provided on the containers.
392
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle features and General information
options Information on service notifications can be dis‐
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Additional information:
cific and optional features offered with the series. Service notifications, refer to page 168.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Service data in the vehicle key
Information on the service notifications is contin‐
uously stored in the vehicle key. The service
center can read this data out and suggest a
maintenance scope for the vehicle.
served.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle
key with which the vehicle was driven most re‐
BMW maintenance system cently.
The maintenance system provides service notifi‐ Storage periods

cations and thereby provides support in main‐ Storage periods during which the vehicle battery
taining road safety and the operational reliability was disconnected are not taken into account.
of the vehicle.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐ another qualified service center or repair shop
tenance system may vary according to the coun‐ update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐
try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐
and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
separately. Further information is available from a activated-charcoal filter.
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Maintenance Manual and
Condition Based Service Service and Warranty
CBS Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Concept Service Guide Booklet for
Sensors and special algorithms take into account Canadian models
the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses
these to provide maintenance recommendations. Please consult your Maintenance Manual and
The system makes it possible to adapt the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US
amount of maintenance corresponding to your models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
user profile. for Canadian models for additional information on
393
MOBILITY Maintenance
the performance of service and maintenance Position

work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance
and repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnosis There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
General information cle's emissions.
Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger
the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐ Emissions
move any devices connected at the OBD socket
before locking the vehicle. ▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
Safety information vehicle checked as soon as possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
NOTICE
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐
in the engine.
cate component intended to be used in con‐
junction with specialized equipment to check Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐ tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐ engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐ ously damage emission control components,
agnosis for other than its intended purpose, in particular the catalytic converter.
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.
394
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing components
Vehicle features and not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper
blade installed.
options
NOTICE
It also describes features and functions that are Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
to the selected options or country versions. This property. Make sure that the wipers with the
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
tems. When using these functions and systems, the windshield before opening the hood.
served.
Replace front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper
Vehicle tool kit arms.
Fold-away position of the wipers, refer to
page 148.
2. Lift the wiper off of the windshield and hold.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under the

cargo floor panel.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the

Wiper blades wiper blade, arrow 2.
Safety information
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the
wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do
395
MOBILITY Replacing components
4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on un‐ Safety information
til it you hear it snap into the holder.
5. Fold down the wipers.
Warning
Focused laser light can irritate or permanently
Replacing the rear wiper blade
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
The wiper blade is engaged at the end of the injury. The manufacturer of the vehicle recom‐
wiper arm. mends that the work on the lighting system in‐
1. Lift off the wiper fully and pull off the wiper cluding bulb replacement be performed by a
blade, arrow. dealer’s service center or another qualified
Warning
Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not
look directly into the headlights or other light
sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
2. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade

Headlight glass
must engage audibly.
Condensation can form on the inside of the
3. Fold down the wipers.
headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
Lights and bulbs light glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched on,
General information increasing humidity forms, for instance water
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution droplets in the light, have the headlights
to vehicle safety. checked.
All headlights and lights are made using LED or
laser technology.
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐
Vehicle battery
odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐ General information
ventional lasers and are officially designated as The battery is maintenance-free.
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
More information about the battery can be re‐
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends quested from a dealer's service center or another
that you let a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
qualified service center or repair shop perform
the work in case of a malfunction.
396
Safety information ▷ When the inspection glass on the top of the

battery is black.
▷ When the take-off performance is insufficient.
DANGER
The following circumstances can have a negative
Contact with live components can lead to an
effect on the performance of the battery:
electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Do not touch any components that ▷ Frequent short-distance drives.
are under voltage. ▷ The vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Warning Safety information

Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle NOTICE
functions. There is a risk of an accident and
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that
work with high voltages and currents, which
are compatible with your vehicle type should be
means that the 12 volt electrical system can be
installed in your vehicle. Information on com‐
overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of dam‐
patible vehicle batteries is available at your
age to property. Only connect battery chargers
dealer’s service center.
for the vehicle battery to the starting aid termi‐
nals in the engine compartment.
Register the battery to the

vehicle Charging the battery
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends Charge the battery only when the engine is off
that you have a service center or another quali‐ and via the starting aid terminals in the engine
fied service center or repair shop register the ve‐ compartment.
hicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has
With Mild Hybrid technology: charge the battery
been replaced. Once the battery has been regis‐
only when the hood is opened.
tered again, all comfort features will be available
without restriction and any Check Control mes‐ Additional information:
sages displayed which relate to comfort features Starting aid terminals, refer to page 404.
will disappear.
Power failure
Charging the battery After a power loss, some equipment needs to be
newly initialized or individual settings updated, for
General information example:
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently ▷ With Memory function: store the positions
charged to guarantee that the battery remains again.
usable for its full service life.
▷ Time: update.
A discharged battery is indicated by a red ▷ Date: update.
indicator light.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Charge the battery in the following situations:
397
MOBILITY Replacing components
Mild Hybrid technology Removing the cover

1. Turn lid up to the opened lock symbol
Concept arrow 1.
Part of the Mild Hybrid technology is a battery
that works with a voltage of 48 volts. Mild Hybrid
technology can lower the fuel consumption.
Mild Hybrid technology influences the following
functions.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 137.
▷ Engine-Off Coasting, refer to page 345.
2. Remove cover, arrow 2.

Safety information
Information
DANGER A purple cable leads from the battery to the cen‐
Contact with live components can lead to an ter of the vehicle.
electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ Do not replace or work on the battery for the
ger to life. Do not touch any components that Mild Hybrid technology.
are under voltage.
Disposing of old batteries
Overview Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
Maintain the filled battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
The battery for the Mild-Hybrid technology is lo‐
cated under a cover in the engine compartment
General information
on the front passenger side.
The fuses are located at different places in the
vehicle.
Information on the fuse types and locations and
the positions of the fuse boxes is available on the
Internet: www.bmw.com/fusecard.
398
Safety information
Warning
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐
trical lines and components. There is a risk of
fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do
not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop replace the
fuses.
399
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and Warning triangle
options
1. Unlock the cover of the left side panel, ar‐
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ row 1, and fold open, arrow 2.
served.
Hazard warning flashers 2. Take the warning triangle out in the direction
of the car's interior.
The button is located in the center console.

The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐
ard warning flashers are activated.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐
larly and replace any expired items promptly.
400
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Storage Functional requirements

The first-aid kit is located in the left storage com‐ ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
partment of the cargo area. with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐
nectedDrive services.
1. Unlock the cover of the left side panel, ar‐
row 1, and fold open, arrow 2. ▷ Cellular network reception.
Starting manually
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sup‐
port is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis.
1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps"
3. "BMW Assist"
2. If necessary, remove the cargo cover from 4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance"
the storage under the cargo floor panel. A voice connection is established.
Cargo cover, refer to page 328.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
BMW Roadside Assistance transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is trans‐
Concept mitted automatically. It may be necessary to ap‐
Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance if prove this on the Control Display.
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down. Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, Teleservice Help en‐
General information ables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐ BMW Roadside Assistance via wireless trans‐
cle's condition is transmitted to the BMW Road‐ mission.
side Assistance. You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it
There are various ways of contacting BMW through BMW Roadside Assistance.
Roadside Assistance. 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
▷ Via a Check Control message. 2. Set the parking brake.
Supplementary SMS text messages, refer to 3. Control Display is switched on.
page 160.
4. Confirm Teleservice Help.
▷ Calling with a mobile phone.
▷ Via the BMW Connected app.
401
BMW Accident Assistance Starting manually

BMW Accident Assistance can also be con‐
tacted independently of the automatic accident
Concept detection function.
BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con‐
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of an 1. "APPS"
accident. 2. "Installed apps"
3. "BMW Assist"
General information 4. "BMW Accident Assistance"
If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐ Follow the displays on the Control Display. A
ately severe accident, which did not trigger any voice connection is established.
airbags, a Check Control message appears on
the instrument cluster. In addition, a text mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display. Emergency Request
When BMW Accident Assistance is activated,
data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW.
Intelligent emergency call
Functional requirements Concept
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐
quest can be triggered automatically by the sys‐
nectedDrive services.
tem or manually.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Standby state is switched on. General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Starting BMW Accident The Intelligent Assist system establishes a con‐
Assistance nection with the BMW Response Center.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
If an accident is detected cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi‐
automatically tions.
A text message relating to BMW Accident Assis‐
tance appears on the Control Display. Overview
The connection can be established directly:
"Call BMW Accident Assistance"
The Check Control message for BMW Accident
Assistance can also be called up from the stored
Check Control messages for a certain length of
time.
Check Control, refer to page 159.
SOS button.
402
Functional requirements BMW Response Center may still be able to

▷ Standby state is switched on. hear the occupants of the vehicle.
▷ The Assist system is functional. The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
gency Request.
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
emergency call: the SIM card integrated in
the vehicle has been activated. Jump-starting
Automatic triggering
General information
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐ If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
cally initiated immediately after an accident of started using the battery of another vehicle and
corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Noti‐ two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS but‐ fully insulated clamp handles.
ton.
Safety information
Manual triggering
1. Tap the cover. DANGER
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED Contact with live components can lead to an
in the area of the button illuminates green. electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emer‐ ger to life. Do not touch any components that
gency Request has been initiated. are under voltage.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted. Warning
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐
the voice connection has been established. rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk
of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to
ing connection.
the BMW Response Center has been estab‐
lished.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with the occupants of the vehicle and NOTICE
initiates further steps to help. In the case of body contact between the two
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-
Response Center can take further steps to starting. There is a risk of damage to property.
help you under certain circumstances. Make sure that no body contact occurs.
For this purpose, data that serves to deter‐

mine the necessary rescue measures, for in‐ Preparation
stance the current position of the vehicle
1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐
when it can be determined, is transmitted to
cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐
the BMW Response Center.
formation can be found on the battery.
Even if the BMW Response Center is no lon‐
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
ger heard through the loudspeakers, the
403
3. Switch off any electrical consumers in both Starting the engine

vehicles.
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
Starting aid terminals 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐
idle speed.
ment acts as the positive battery terminal.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
A special connection on the body in the engine
started in the usual way.
compartment acts as the negative battery termi‐
nal. If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another at‐
tempt in order to allow the discharged battery
Overview of engine compartment, refer to to recharge.
page 383.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
Open the cover of the positive battery terminal.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Connecting the cables
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers, such as
the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicle. Tow-starting and towing
1. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive Safety information
jumper cable to the positive battery terminal,
or to the corresponding starting aid terminal
Warning
of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of
the cable to the positive battery terminal, or
to the corresponding starting aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative battery terminal,
or to the corresponding engine or body Transporting the vehicle
ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐ General information
ative battery terminal, or to the corresponding The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
engine or body ground of the vehicle to be
started.
Safety information
NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing the
vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of
damage to property. The vehicle should only be
transported on a loading platform.
404
Safety information
NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting Warning
and securing it.
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
There is a risk of damage to property. ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow be possible to control the vehicle's response.
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the
gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is
heavier than the vehicle to be towed.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐
ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance. NOTICE
Additional information: If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 151. rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur.
There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly
Tow truck attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the
tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
The vehicle should only be transported on a around corners.
loading platform. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
secured with an offset.
Towing other vehicles Tow rope

Observe the following notes when using the tow
General information
rope:
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
▷ Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
ing on local regulations.
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify
▷ Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when
the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a
fastening.
warning triangle in the rear window.
▷ Check the fastening of the tow fitting and tow
With Safe Share function: to remove a broken-
rope in regular intervals.
down vehicle from the danger area, tow it for a
short distance at a speed of no more than ▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
6 mph/10 km/h. 30 mph/50 km/h.
405
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of Safety information

3 miles/5 km.
▷ When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure NOTICE
that the tow rope is taut.
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐
Tow fitting ting. There is a risk of damage to property. Fol‐
low the notes on using the tow fitting.
General information
Screw thread for tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried

in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
rear of the vehicle. push it out.
The tow fitting is located beneath the cargo floor
panel.
Tow-starting
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
hicle and screw it all the way in.
Start the engine by jump-starting, if possible.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only. Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐
rected by a dealer’s service center or another
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐
stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐
ting. Additional information:
▷ Check the fastening of the tow fitting in regu‐ Jump-starting, refer to page 403.
lar intervals.
Onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 395.
406
Care MOBILITY
Care
Vehicle features and Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
options
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
cific and optional features offered with the series. ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
It also describes features and functions that are 31.5 in/80 cm.
to the selected options or country versions. This Automatic vehicle washes
tems. When using these functions and systems, Safety information
served.
NOTICE
Improper use of automatic washing systems or
Washing the vehicle car washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
There is a risk of damage to property. Follow
General information the following instructions:
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
in the area below the windshield when the hood those that use soft brushes in order to
is raised. avoid paint damage.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐ ▷ Before driving into the car wash, make
ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the sure that the vehicle is not too large.
vehicle. ▷ Do not drive through a car wash with
guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid
Steam blaster and high-pressure damage to the chassis.
washer ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
Safety information ▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
NOTICE ▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain

sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
When cleaning with high-pressure washers,
tem.
components can be damaged due to the pres‐
sure or temperatures being too high. There is a
risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient
distance and do not spray too long continu‐
ously. Follow the operating instructions for the
high-pressure washer.
407
MOBILITY Care
Driving into a car wash with a dries brake discs and brake pads and protects
Steptronic transmission them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the windows,
Safety information to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and
to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ Vehicle care
gaged when standby state is switched off.
switch standby state off in vehicle washes. Vehicle care products
General information
General information BMW recommends using vehicle care and
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
freely. products are available from a dealer’s service
Some car washes do not permit persons in the center or another qualified service center or re‐
vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the pair shop.
outside when in selector lever position N. A sig‐
nal sounds when an attempt is made to lock the Safety information
vehicle.
Additional information: Warning
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 151. Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health. There is a
Driving out of a car wash risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
Switch on drive-ready state.
structions on the container.
Drive-ready state, refer to page 38.
Vehicle paint
Headlights
General information
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect
water.
the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice extent of your vehicle care to these influences.
scraper.
Corrosive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
After washing the vehicle mediately to prevent the finish from being altered
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes or discolored.
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced. The heat generated during braking
408
Care MOBILITY
Matte finish Caring for special components

Only use cleaning and care products suitable for
vehicles with matte finish. Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
Leather care wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets
cloth or vacuum cleaner. above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe
in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can
and premature degradation of the leather sur‐ destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐
face. nents, such as the brake disc.
To guard against discoloration, such as from After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care them. The heat generated during braking dries
roughly every two months. brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean Chrome surfaces, especially in
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
case of exposure to road salt, with plenty of wa‐
grease will gradually break down the protective
ter and added cleanser as needed.
layer of the leather surface.
Rubber components
Upholstery material care
Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐
General information ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only
water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum
cleaner. Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐ rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
with a suitable interior cleaner. or noises.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐ Fine wood parts
terial vigorously.
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
Safety information cloth.
NOTICE Kenaf
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using suita‐
can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of ble care products.
damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro®
fasteners are closed.
409
MOBILITY Care
Plastic components the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely fastened again after they were removed,
for instance for cleaning.
NOTICE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such The floor mats can be removed from the car's in‐
as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease remov‐ terior for cleaning.
ers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐
There is a risk of damage to property. Clean
crofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
with water, if needed.
in the direction of travel only.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Mount for trailer hitch
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.
Keep the mount clean.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Regularly grease or oil bearings and sliding surfa‐
ces with resin-free greases or oils.
Safety belts
Before using steam cleaners or high pressure
cleaners on the vehicle, remove the ball head
Warning and insert the cover into the mount.
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt
webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety Sensors and camera lenses
belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
safety belts. gent.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and Displays, screens, and protective
thus have a negative impact on safety. glass of the Head-up Display
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
installed belt straps.
NOTICE
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any
they are dry.
kind can damage the surface of displays and
screens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Carpets and floor mats
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Warning
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the NOTICE
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. The surface of displays can be damaged with
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats not use any scratching materials.
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
410
Care MOBILITY
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐

play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
available dish-washing soap.
Long-term vehicle storage

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be taken.
or repair shop.
411
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in the urement method. Detailed values can be found in
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center
for instance due to the selected special equip‐ or another qualified service center or repair shop.
ment, country version or country-specific meas‐
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐
model version, equipment or country-specific stance due to the selected special equipment,
measurement method. tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof
BMW X5
Width with mirrors in/mm 87.3/2,218
Width without mirrors in/mm 78.9/2,004
Height in/mm 68.7-69/1,744-1,753
Length in/mm 194.3/4,936
Wheelbase in/mm 117.1/2,975
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 41.3/12.6
412
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
X5 sDrive40i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,122/2,777
Load lbs/kg 974/442
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,822/1,280
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,589/1,628
X5 xDrive40i
Load lbs/kg 974/442
X5 M50i powered by BMW M
Load lbs/kg 985/447
Trailer towing
X5 sDrive40i
Trailer load without brakes lbs/kg 1,653/750
a) Trailer load with brakes on uphill grades of up to lbs/kg 5,952/2,700

12 % lbs/kg 7,209/3,270
b) Trailer load with brakes on uphill grades of up to
12 %
Maximum drawbar nose weight lbs/kg 551/250
Approved rear axle load, towing vehicle lbs/kg 3,589/1,628
413
REFERENCE Technical data
X5 sDrive40i
Approved gross vehicle weight, towing vehicle lbs/kg 6,122/2,777
a) The trailer load only applies to vehicles with a mount for trailer hitches retrofitted by BMW.
b) The trailer load only applies to vehicles with a factory-installed mount for trailer hitches.
X5 xDrive40i

12 % lbs/kg 7,209/3,270
12 %
X5 M50i powered by BMW M

12 % lbs/kg 7,209/3,270
12 %
414
Technical data REFERENCE
Capacities
BMW X5
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 21.9/83.0
Observe further information on fuel quality, refer

to page 386.
415
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
General information
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐
cle are listed here.
Updates made after the

editorial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after the
editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle had closed:
▷ Operation: driver assistance systems: Speed
Limit Assistant.
▷ Operation: driver assistance systems: lane
change with active guidance: lane change.
▷ Driving tips: things to remember when driv‐
ing: roof-mounted luggage rack.
▷ Mobility: wheels and tires: Tire Pressure
Monitor.
416
Appendix REFERENCE
417
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9 Adjustments, steering wheel 125
Airbags 184
3D View, see Surround View 263 Airbags, indicator and warning light 186
48V technology, see Mild Hybrid technol‐ Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 292
ogy 398 air conditioning, climate 291
Air distribution, manual 293
A Air drying, see air conditioning 291
Air flow, automatic climate control 293
ABS Antilock Braking System 225 Air outlets, see Ventilation 294
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 154 Air pressure, tires 350
Accessories and parts 8 Air quality 289
Accident prevention, see Active Protection 222 Air suspension, see Two-axle ride level con‐
ACC, see Active Cruise Control 235 trol 282
Activated charcoal filter 294 Alarm system 106
Activation, trailer towing 340 Alarm, unintentional 107
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function All-season tires, see Winter tires 360
ACC 235 All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 227
Active damping control, see Adaptive M chassis/ Amazon Alexa Car Integration 51
suspension 287 Ambient air package 303
Active damping control, see Adaptive suspen‐ Ambient light 182
sion 287 Android Auto, connection to the vehicle 75
Active Guard Plus, see Intelligent Safety 188 Android Auto preparation, connection to the ve‐
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 188 hicle 75
Active M Sport differential 228 Android Auto preparation, smartphone integra‐
Active PDC, see Emergency brake function 259 tion 75
Active Protection 222 Animal detection, see Night Vision 203
Active roll stabilization 287 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 391
Active seat ventilation 128 Antilock Braking System ABS 225
Active Steering, integral 230 Anti-slip control, see DSC 225
Active voice processing, voice activation 49 Anti-slip rails 324
Adaptive brake assistant 225 Anti-theft protection, lug bolt lock 378
Adaptive Light Control 179 Apple CarPlay preparation, connection to the ve‐
Adaptive M chassis/suspension 287 hicle 75
Adaptive M suspension Professional 288 Apple CarPlay preparation, smartphone integra‐
ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dynamics Control 142 tion 75
Adaptive suspension 287 Approach control warning with City braking func‐
Additives, engine oil types 389 tion 189
Adjusting contents, iDrive 45 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
Adjusting engine sound 288 tertainment, Communication 6
Adjusting sound of the engine 288 Armrest heating 127
418
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Ashtray 310 Battery, disposing of 398

Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off assis‐ Battery, vehicle 396
tant 225 Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 404
Assistance with breakdown 400 Belts, see Safety belts 119
Assisted Driving Mode, see Steering Assis‐ Beverage holder, see Cup holders 320
tant 245 Blind spot collision warning 210
Assisted Driving Plus 250 Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 109
Assisted Driving View 157 Bluetooth connection 72
AUC Automatic Recirculating Air Control 292 Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ Entertainment, Communication 6
tertainment and Communication 6 BMW Accident Assistance 402
AUTO H button, see Parking brake 142 BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Automatic activation, see Climate control Entertainment and Communication 6
rules 129 BMW Digital Key 89
Automatic climate control 289 BMW display key 82
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 125 BMW display key, malfunction 86
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐ BMW Drive Recorder 220
bags 187 BMW Gesture Control 54
Automatic Differential Brake 228 BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 52
Automatic headlight control 176 BMW maintenance system 393
Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 142 BMW Roadside Assistance 401
Automatic locking 104 Bonus range, ECO PRO 345
Automatic Recirculating Air Control AUC 292 Bottle holder, see Cup holders 320
Automatic tailgate 99 Bracket, flag 335
Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans‐ Brake assistant 225
mission 149 Brake assistant, adaptive 225
Automatic unlocking 104 Brake Controller 341
Automating routines, BMW Intelligent Personal Brake discs, see Brake system 332
Assistant 53 Brake pads, see Brake system 332
AUTO program, automatic climate control 291 Brake system 332
AUTO program, intensity 292 Braking, information 334
Auto Start/Stop function 137 Breakdown assistance 400
Average consumption, see Trip data 171 Breaking in 332
Axle loads, approved 413 Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 223
Brightness, Control Display 62
B Buttons on the steering wheel 32
Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 402
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 115 Button, Start/Stop 137
Backrest, seats 113 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 403
Backrest tilt 114
Backrest tilt, rear seats 117 C
Backrest, width 115
Bad road trips 332 Cable for tow-starting/towing 405
Bandages, see First-aid kit 400 California Proposition 65 Warning 8
Bar for tow-starting/towing 405 Call, gesture control 55
Basic position, rear seats 117
419
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐ Changing wheels 377

gent Safety 188 Changing, wheels and tires 359
Camera lenses, care 410 Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging
Camera, rearview camera, see Surround tray 314
View 263 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless
Camera, rearview camera, without Surround charging tray 314
View 261 Chassis/suspension, electronic, see Adaptive M
Camera, see Surround View 263 chassis/suspension 287
CANCEL button, Active Cruise Control 235 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐
CANCEL button, cruise control 233 ber 12
Can holder, see Cup holders 320 Check Control 159
Care, Head-up Display 410 Checking the engine oil level electronically 387
Care, light-alloy wheels 409 Children, seating position 131
Care of displays, screens 410 Children, transporting safely 131
Care, vehicle 408 Child restraint system LATCH 134
Cargo area 323 Child restraint systems, mounting 132
Cargo area, enlarging 326 Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil‐
Cargo cover 328 dren safely 131
Cargo cover electric 329 Child safety locks 136
Cargo, stowing and securing 324 Child seat, mounting 132
Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo Child seats, see Transporting children
area 324 safely 131
Caring Car, BMW Intelligent Personal Assis‐ Chrome-plated surfaces, care 409
tant 53 Chrome surfaces, care 409
Car key, see Vehicle key 78 Cigarette lighter 311
Carpet, care 410 Cigarette lighter, front 311
CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 75 Cigarette lighter, rear 311
Car seats, see Transporting children safely 131 Cleaning displays, screens 410
Cartridge replacement, see Ambient air pack‐ Cleaning, Head-up Display 410
age 303 Clearance, water 334
Car wash 407 Climate control 289
Car wash lines 407 Climate control rules 129
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐ Closing with the smartphone, see BMW Digital
tem 333 Key 89
CBS Condition Based Service 393 Clothes hooks 322
Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Coasting 345
Entertainment and Communication 6 Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coast‐
Center armrest, front 320 ing 345
Center armrest, rear 320 Coasting with idling engine 345
Center console 35 Combination switch, see Turn signals 145
Central Information Display (CID), see Control Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys‐
Display 43 tem 146
Central locking system 93 Comfort Access 94
Central screen, see Control Display 43 COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 140
Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8 Communication, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
Changing parts 395 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
420
Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 381 Cross traffic warning 278
Comparison of entries, see Entry comparison 41 Cruise control 233
Compartments, doors 319 Cruise control, active with Stop&Go func‐
Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 70 tion 235
Compressor 363 Cruise control, see Active Cruise Control 235
Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for Cruise control with distance control, see Active
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Cruise Control with Stop&Go function 235
Condensation water under the parked vehi‐ Cruise control without distance control, see
cle 335 Cruise control 233
Condensation, windshield 294 Cruising range 168
Condition Based Service CBS 393 Cup holder 320
Confirmation signal from the vehicle 104 Cup holder, front 320
Connected Command, BMW Intelligent Personal Cup holder, rear 321
Assistant 53 Cup holder, third row of seats 322
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐ Current consumption 158
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Customer service, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐
Connecting device 69 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 312
Connecting, mobile devices 69 D
Connections, Screen Mirroring 74
Consumption display, ECO PRO 345 Damage, tires 358
Consumption display, widget in the instrument Damping control active, see Adaptive M chassis/
cluster 158 suspension 287
Consumption, see Current consumption 158 Damping control, active, see Adaptive suspen‐
Consumption, see Trip data 171 sion 287
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Dashcam, see BMW Drive Recorder 220
Entertainment, Communication 6 Data memory 10
Container for washer fluid 391 Data protection, settings 64
Continued driving with a flat tire 372, 376 Data, see Deleting personal data 64
Control Display 43 Data, technical 412
Control Display, brightness 62 Date 60
Controller 43 Daytime running lights 178
Control systems, driving stability 225 DCC, see Cruise control 233
Convenient closing, vehicle key 80 Defrosting, see Defrosting windshield 294
Convenient opening, vehicle key 79 Defrosting, windshield 294
Coolant 390 Deleting personal data 64
Coolant level 391 Departure schedule, see Parked-car ventila‐
Coolant temperature, see Engine tempera‐ tion 298
ture 167 Departure time, parked-car ventilation 299
Cooling, maximum 291 Departure time, stationary climate control 302
Cooling system 390 Device list 70
Cornering light 179 Diagnosis connection 394
Corrosion on brake discs 335 Differential lock 228
Cosmetic mirror 310 Digital Key 89
Cross-country mobility, see xOffroad pack‐ Digital Key, see BMW Digital Key 89
age 285 Dimensions 412
421
Dimmable exterior mirrors 124 Driving notes, general 333

Dimmable interior mirror 125 Driving on bad roads 332
Direct dial buttons, see Programmable memory Driving stability control systems 225
buttons 42 Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 347
Direction indicator, see Turn signals 145 Driving through water 334
Display, iDrive 40 Driving tips 333
Display in the windshield, see Head-up Dis‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control 225
play 174 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 227
Display key 82 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive M chassis/
Display key, malfunction 86 suspension 287
Display key, see BMW display key 82 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive suspen‐
Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 182 sion 287
Display, notifications, BMW Intelligent Personal Dynamic Stability Control DSC 225
Assistant 52 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 227
Displays 156
Displays and symbols 7 E
Displays, ECO PRO 345
Disposal, coolant 391 ECO PRO 343
Disposal, vehicle battery 398 ECO PRO, bonus range 345
Distance control, see PDC 255 ECO PRO, Driving style analysis 347
Door handle lighting, see Welcome lights 178 ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics
Door opening angle, Surround View 265 Control 140
Downhill control, see HDC Hill Descent Con‐ ECO PRO, see Driving Dynamics Control 140
trol 228 Efficiency display, widget in the instrument clus‐
Drawbar nose weight, technical data 413 ter 158
Drive-off assistant 225 Efficient4x4, see xDrive 227
Drive-off assistant, see DSC 225 Electronic oil measurement 387
Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 61 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 225
Driver assistance, driving, see Intelligent E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Safety 188 Entertainment, Communication 6
Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 188 Emergency brake function when parking, Active
Driver Attention Camera 61 PDC 259
Drive-ready state, engine start 38 Emergency brake, see Emergency stop assis‐
Drive-ready state, idle state, and standby tant 218
state 37 Emergency braking, see PostCrash - iBrake 222
Driver profiles 65 Emergency Request 402
Driver profile, setup 65 Emergency service, see BMW Accident Assis‐
Driver profiles, welcome screen 65 tance 402
Driving 137 Emergency service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐
Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 188 tance 401
Driving comfort 282, 287 Emergency stop assistant 218
Driving Dynamics Control 140 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 349
Driving instructions, breaking in 332 Emergency unlocking, rear seat backrest 119
Driving mode, ECO PRO 343 Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 153
Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Emergency wheel 381
trol 140 Energy recovery 158
422
Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 169 F

Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 137
Engine compartment 383 Factory settings, see Reset vehicle configura‐
Engine coolant 390 tion 63
Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 345 Failure message, see Check Control 159
Engine oil, adding 388 False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional
Engine oil change 390 alarms 107
Engine oil filler neck 388 Fan, see Air flow 293
Engine oil temperature 167 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 119
Engine oil types to add 389 Fatigue alert 223
Engine start, see Drive-ready state 38 Fault indicators, see Check Control 159
Engine start, see Jump-starting 403 Filler neck for engine oil 388
Engine temperature 167 Fine wood parts, care 409
Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook First-aid kit 400
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ First Steps, see Setup Wizard 65
tion 6 Fittings for trailer safety chain, trailer towing 341
Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's Flag bracket 335
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐ Flat tire, changing wheels 377
munication 6 Flat tire, continued driving 372, 376
Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 374
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Flat tire message, FTM 375
Entry comparison 41 Flat tire message, Tire Pressure Monitor 370
Equipment, interior 307 Flat Tire Monitor TPM 374
Error indicators, see Check Control 159 Flat tire, repairing 362
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 225 Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 367
Evasion Assistant 193 Flat tire warning light, FTM 375
Exchanging, wheels and tires 359 Flat tire warning light, see Tire Pressure Moni‐
Exhaust gas system 333 tor 370
Exhaustion warner 223 Flooding, driving through 334
Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 333 Floor carpet, care 410
Experience Modes, BMW Intelligent Personal Floor mats, care 410
Assistant 53 Fold-away position, wiper 148
Exterior lighting during unlocking 79 Foot brake 334
Exterior lighting with the vehicle locked 80 Forward collision mitigation, see Intelligent
Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 125 Safety 188
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 124 For Your Own Safety 8
Exterior mirrors 124 Fragrance cartridge, see Ambient air pack‐
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 124 age 303
External start, see Jump-starting 403 Fragrance, see Ambient air package 303
External temperature 167 Fragrancing, see Ambient air package 303
Eyelet for towing 406 Front airbags 184
Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 324 Front collision mitigation 189
Front collision mitigation, see Approach Control
Warning 189
Front collision mitigation, see Intersection Colli‐
sion Warning 195
423
Front collision mitigation, see Pedestrian Warn‐ H

ing 200
Front fog lights 181 Handbrake, see Parking brake 142
Front fog lights, replacing, see Lights and Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 308
bulbs 396 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for
Front lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 396 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Front passenger seat functionality 116 Hazard warning flashers 400
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐ HDC Hill Descent Control 228
vation 187 Head airbags 185
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 187 Headlight control, automatic 176
Front seats 113 Headlight flasher 146
Fuel 386 Headlight glass 396
Fuel cap 348 Headlights, care 408
Fuel filler flap 348 Headlights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 396
Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 349 Head restraint pillow 123
Fuel gauge 165 Head restraints and seats 113
Fuel quality 386 Head restraints, front 121
Fuel recommendation 386 Head restraints, rear 122
Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 415 Head-up Display 174
Fuses 398 Head-up Display, care 410
Head-up Display, store position, see Memory
G function 126
Heated steering wheel 126
Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal Heavy cargo, stowing 324
Remote Control 307 Height, vehicle 412
Gasoline 386 High-beam Assistant 179
Gear change, Steptronic transmission 149 High beams 146
Gear shift indicator 169 High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐
General driving notes 333 tant 179
General settings 60 Hill Descent Control HDC 228
Gentleman function, see Front passenger seat Hills 335
functionality 116 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 225
Gesture Control 54 Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 320
Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 54 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote
Glare shield, see Sun visor 310 Control 307
Glass sunroof, electric 109 Homepage, see Internet 6
Glass sunroof, initialize the system 111 Hood 384
Glove compartment 318 Horn 32
GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Hotel function, see Valet parking mode 102
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Hot exhaust gas system 333
Gross vehicle weight, approved 413 Humidity in the headlight, see Headlight
Gross vehicle weight, trailer mode 413 glass 396
Ground clearance, see xOffroad package 285 Hydroplaning 334
424
I Intersection collision warning 195

Interval display, see Service notifications 168
iBrake - PostCrash 222 Ionization, see Ambient air package 303
Ice warning, see External temperature 167
Icy roads, see External temperature 167 J
Identification marks, tires 356
Identification number, see Vehicle identification Jacking points for the vehicle jack 379
number 12 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 111
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready Jam protection system, windows 108
state 37 Joystick, Steptronic transmission 149
iDrive 40 Jump-starting 403
ID transmitter, see Vehicle key 78 Jump-starting terminals 404
Ignition key, see Vehicle key 78
Indicator/warning lights 160 K
Individual air distribution 293
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 65 Kenaf, care 409
Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless Key Card, see BMW Digital Key 89
charging tray 314 Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 94
Inflation pressure, tires 350 Key, mechanical 92
Inflation pressure warning TPM, tires 374 Key, see BMW Digital Key 89
Information 6 Key, see BMW display key 82
Information window, Control Display 62 Key, see Vehicle key 78
Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 375 Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 149
Input, iDrive 40 Knee airbag 185
Instrument cluster 156
Instrument lighting 182 L
Integral Active Steering 230
Integrated key 92 Label on recommended tires 360
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 14 Lane change assistant 252
Integrated Universal Remote Control 307 Lane control assistant with active side collision
Intelligent emergency call 402 protection, see Side collision mitigation 214
Intelligent Personal Assistant 52 Lane departure warning 206
Intelligent Safety 188 Lane lines, Surround View 265
Intended use 8 Lane threshold, warning 206
Intensity, AUTO program 292 Language, set 61
Interior camera, see Driver Attention Camera 61 Laser headlights, replacing, see Lights and
Interior equipment 307 bulbs 396
Interior lights 182 Laser high beams 181
Interior lights during unlocking 79 Lashing eyes in the cargo area 324
Interior lights with the vehicle locked 80 LATCH child restraint fixing system 134
Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 125 Launch Control 154
Interior mirrors 125 Leather care 409
Interior motion sensor 107 LED front fog lights, replacing, see Lights and
Internet connection 73 bulbs 396
Internet hotspot 73 LED headlights, replacing, see Lights and
Internet page 6 bulbs 396
425
LED light carpet, see Welcome light 178 Maintenance system, BMW 393
Length, vehicle 412 Make-up mirror 310
Letters and numbers, entering 41 Malfunction, BMW display key 86
Light-alloy wheels, care 409 Malfunction, vehicle key 81
Light control, adaptive 179 Managing devices 70
Lighter, cigarettes 311 Manual brake, see Parking brake 142
Lighting 176 Manual control, air distribution 293
Lighting, loudspeaker, see Bowers & Wil‐ Manual control, air flow 293
kins 183 Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 149
Light in the exterior mirror, see Blind spot colli‐ Manual operation, fuel filler flap 349
sion warning 210 Manual Speed Limiter 231
Light in the exterior mirror, see Cross traffic Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
warning 278 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 396 Marking, run-flat tire 361
Lights 176 Massage seat, front 127
Lights and bulbs 396 Matt paint, care 409
Light switch 176 Maximum cooling 291
LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 231 Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit
List of all messages 63 Info 169
Load 324 Maximum speed, winter tires 360
Loading 323 M chassis/suspension, adaptive, see Adaptive M
Loading the cargo area, see Stowing cargo 324 chassis/suspension 287
Lock control elements, rear automatic climate Measuring units 61
control 298 Media of the Owner's Manual 14
Locking, automatic 104 Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 400
Locking, see Opening and Closing 78 Memory function 126
Locking, settings 104 Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection
Locking, vehicle key 79 lists 171
Lock, lug bolts 378 Menus, operating, iDrive 40
Loudspeaker lighting, see Bowers & Wilkins 183 Messages 63
Low beams 177 Messages, see Check Control 159
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐ Microfilter 294
tant 179 Mild Hybrid technology 398
Lower back support 115 Minimum tread depth, tires 358
Lower tailgate 101 Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐
Lug bolt lock 378 cle 334
Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage Mobile devices, managing 70
rack 336 Mobile phone, connecting 69
Lumbar support 115 Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
M Mobile Service, see BMW Accident Assis‐
tance 402
Maintenance 393 Mobile Service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐
Maintenance requirements, see Condition Based tance 401
Service CBS 393 Mobility System 362
Maintenance, see Service notifications 168 MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 235
426
Mode, ECO PRO 343 Oil level, checking electronically 387

Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Oil types to add, engine 389
Safety 8 Onboard Computer, see Trip data 171
Monitor, see Control Display 43 Onboard Diagnosis OBD 394
Mount for trailer hitch, care 410 Onboard literature, printed 14
Mounting for trailer hitch 340 Onboard vehicle tool kit 395
Mounting of child restraint systems 132 On-call service, see BMW Accident Assis‐
MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, tance 402
Entertainment, Communication 6 On-call service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐
M Sport differential, active 228 tance 401
Multi-function hook 325 Opening and closing 78
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32 Opening with the smartphone, see BMW Digital
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Key 89
Entertainment and Communication 6 Operating concept, iDrive 40
Music track, gesture control 55 Operation, app 53
Operation via voice 48
N Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7
Outside air, see AUC 292
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Overheating of the engine, see Engine tempera‐
Entertainment and Communication 6 ture 167
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor‐
front 121 age 411
Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints Owner's Manual, printed 14
rear 122 Owner's Manual via voice operation, BMW Intelli‐
Net, cargo area 325 gent Personal Assistant 54
Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels, care 409
New wheels and tires 359 P
Night Vision device, see Night Vision 203
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐ Paint, car care 408
tion 203 Pairing, mobile devices, see Connections 69
No-touch opening and closing of the tailgate 96 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 106
Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 405 Panic mode 106
Panorama View, see Surround View 263
O Panoramic glass sunroof, see Glass sunroof 109
Park Distance Control PDC 255
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 394 Parked-car ventilation 298
Object detection, see Night Vision 203 Parking aid, see PDC 255
Obstacle marking, rearview camera 262 Parking assistant 271
Obstacle marking, Surround View 265 Parking assistant Plus, see Surround View 263
Octane rating, see Recommended fuel Parking, Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 142
grade 387 Parking brake 142
Odometer, see Trip data 171 Parking lights 177
Oil, adding 388 Parts and accessories 8
Oil change 390 Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down, see
Oil change interval, see Service notifications 168 Automatic Curb Monitor 125
Oil filler neck 388 Pathway lighting 178
427
Pathway lighting, switching on 81 Rear automatic climate control, lock control ele‐
Pathway lines, rearview camera 262 ments 298
Payload, technical data 413 Rear axle steering, see Integral Active Steer‐
PDC Park Distance Control 255 ing 230
Pedestrian detection, see Night Vision 203 Rear collision preparation 217
Performance Control 288 Rear collision warning, see Rear collision prepa‐
Performance display, see Sport displays 173 ration 217
Personal data, deleting 64 Rear lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 396
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 65 Rear seat backrests, folding down 326
Personal settings 64 Rear seat backrest tilt 117
Person warning with braking function 200 Rear seats 116
Phone, connecting 69 Rear Traffic Alert 276
Pillow for head restraints in the rear 123 Rear ventilation, third row of seats, ventilation,
Plastic parts, care 410 third row of seats 295
Possible gestures, gesture control 55 Rearview camera, see Surround View 263
PostCrash - iBrake 222 Rearview camera, without Surround View 261
Power Display, instrument cluster 166 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 124
Power failure 397 Rear-view mirrors, interior 125
Power Meter, see Power Display 166 Rear window defroster 294
Power windows 108 Rear window wiper, operation 148
Pressure test tire, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/activated-
tor 367 charcoal filter 294
Pressure, tires 350 Recirculated-air mode 292
Printed onboard literature 14 Recommended fuel grade 387
Profiles, see Driver profiles 65 Recommended tire brands 360
Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 42 Refueling 348
Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam pro‐ Remote 3D View 270
tection system 111 Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐
Protective function, windows, see Jam protec‐ book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
tion system 108 cation 6
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 43 Remote control, see Vehicle key 78
Remote control, universal 307
Q Remote Engine Start, see Stationary climate
control 300
Queuing Assistant, see Assisted Driving Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook
Plus 250 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
R Remote Software Upgrade 57
Removable ball head 340
Racing track 336 Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 396
Radiator fluid 390 Replacing light diodes, see Lights and bulbs 396
Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ Replacing parts 395
tertainment and Communication 6 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 81
Rain sensor 147 Replacing, wheels and tires 359
Rear automatic climate control 295 Reporting safety malfunctions 13
428
RES CNCL button, Active Cruise Control Seat and armrest heating 127
ACC 235 Seat heating 127
RES CNCL button, cruise control 233 Seat heating, climate control rules 129
Reserve warning, see Range 168 Seating position for children 131
Reset settings, vehicle 63 Seats and head restraints 113
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor 369 Seats, front 113
Reset, vehicle configuration 63 Seats, rear 116
Reset, vehicle settings 63 Seat ventilation, climate control rules 129
RESUME button, Active Cruise Control 235 Securing, cargo 324
RESUME button, cruise control 233 Selection list in instrument cluster 171
Retreaded tires 360 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 149
Reversing Assistant 277 Self-leveling suspension, see Two-axle ride level
Roadside parking lights 177 control 282
Roller sunblinds, rear side windows 109 Self-supporting tires, see Run-flat tires 361
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 308 Sensors, care 410
RON recommended fuel grade 387 Service and warranty 9
Roofliner 36 Service Center, see BMW Accident Assis‐
Roof-mounted luggage rack 336 tance 402
Rope for tow-starting/towing 405 Service Center, see BMW Roadside Assis‐
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for tance 401
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Service notifications 168
RSC Runflat System, see Runflat tire 361 Service requirements, see Condition Based
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Service CBS 393
tertainment, Communication 6 Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual
Rubber components, care 409 for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐
Run-flat tire 361 tion 6
SET button, Active Cruise Control 235
S SET button, cruise control 233
Set speed, see Active Cruise Control with
Safe braking 334 Stop&Go function 235
Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key/Key Setting, Control Display 62
Card 89 Settings, general 60
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front Settings, locking/unlocking 104
passenger seat 121 Settings, seats and head restraints 113
Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 121 Setup Wizard 65
Safety belts 119 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 149
Safety belts, care 410 Shift point indicator, tachometer 166
Safety locks, doors and windows 136 Side airbag 184
Safety package, see Active Protection 222 Side collision mitigation 214
Safety switch, windows 109 Side parking aid, Surround View 265
Safety systems, see Airbags 184 Side parking aid without Surround View 260
Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 188 Side protection aid, Surround View, see Side
Saving fuel 342 parking aid 265
Screen Mirroring, connection 74 Side protection aid without Surround View, see
Screen, see Control Display 43 Side parking aid 260
Sealant, see Mobility System 362 Signaling, horn 32
429
Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig‐ Stability control systems 225
nals from the vehicle 104 Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7
Sitting safely 113 Standby state, idle state and drive-ready
Slide/tilt glass roof, see Glass sunroof 109 state 37
Smallest turning circle, vehicle 412 Start/stop, automatic function 137
Smartphone, connecting 69 Start/Stop button 137
Smartphone Integration, Android Auto prepara‐ Starting aid terminals 404
tion 75 Starting, see Drive-ready state 38
Smartphone Integration, Apple CarPlay prepara‐ Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 38
tion 75 Stationary climate control via Remote Engine
Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Start 300
Entertainment and Communication 6 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for
Smartphone, using via voice activation 51 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Smoker's package 310 Status control display, tires 369
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐ Status information, iDrive 41
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ Status of Owner's Manual 7
cation 6 Status, vehicle 173
Snow chains 366 Steering and Lane Control Assistant 245
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis 394 Steering Assistant, see Steering and Lane Con‐
Sockets, electrical devices 312 trol Assistant 245
Soft-close automatic, doors 102 Steering column adjustment 125
Software Update, see Remote Software Up‐ Steering, see Integral Active Steering 230
grade 57 Steering wheel, adjusting 125
Software Upgrade, see Remote Software Up‐ Steering wheel, buttons 32
grade 57 Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic
SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 402 transmission 149
Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Steptronic transmission 149
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Storage compartment, cargo area 325
Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 381 Storage compartment, center console 319
Speech recognition 48 Storage compartments 318
Speed Limit Assist 244 Storage compartments, locations 318
Speed Limit Device, Speed Limiter 231 Storage, tires 361
Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 169 Store Mirror position, see Memory function 126
Speed Limit Info 169 Store seat position, see Memory function 126
Speed warning 62 Store steering wheel position, see Memory func‐
Sport chassis/suspension, see Adaptive M chas‐ tion 126
sis/suspension 287 Storing the vehicle 411
Sport displays 173 Stowing, cargo 324
SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo
Control 140 area 324
SPORT PLUS, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Suitable devices 70
trol 140 Suitable mobile phones 70
Sport program, Steptronic transmission 149 Summer tires, tread 358
SPORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 140 Sun visor 310
Sport suspension, see Adaptive M suspension Sun visor, sliding 310
Professional 288 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 14
430
Supplementary text message 160 Time 60

Surface heating, see Seat and armrest heat‐ Tire brands, recommended 360
ing 127 Tire damage 358
Surround View 263 Tire identification marks 356
Surround View, gesture control 55 Tire inflation pressure 350
Suspension settings, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see TPM 374
trol 140 Tire inflation pressure monitor TPM 374
Swinging of trailer, see Trailer stabilization con‐ Tire pressure 350
trol 340 Tire Pressure Monitor 367
Switches, see Cockpit 32 Tire Pressure Monitor, reset 369
Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dynam‐ Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 362
ics Control 140 Tires and wheels 350
Switching off the engine, see Drive-ready Tires, changing 359
state 38 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 362
Symbols and displays 7 Tire settings 368
SYNC program, automatic climate control 293 Tires, run-flat 361
Tire tread 358
T Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 6
Tachometer 165 Tools 395
Tailgate, automatic 99 Top View, see Surround View 263
Tailgate, opening and closing with no-touch acti‐ Torque display, see Sport displays 173
vation 96 Touchpad, Controller 46
Tailgate, vehicle key 80 Tow bar 405
Tail lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 396 Tow fitting 406
Tank capacity 415 Towing 404
Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 8 Tow rope 405
Technical data 412 Tow-starting 404
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, TPM Flat Tire Monitor 374
Entertainment and Communication 6 Traction control 227
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ TRACTION, driving dynamics 227
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Temperature, automatic climate control 290 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Temperature display, see External tempera‐ Traffic Jam Assistant, see Assisted Driving
ture 167 Plus 250
Temperature, engine oil 167 Traffic jam assistant, see Steering and Lane
Text message, Check Control 160 Control Assistant 245
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 106 Trailer hitch, care 410
Thermal camera, see Night Vision 203 Trailer hitch, removable ball head 340
Thigh support 114 Trailer hitch, view of rearview camera 262
Third-party providers 51 Trailer hitch, view of Surround View 265
Third row of seats 118 Trailer loads 413
Tilt alarm sensor 107 Trailer stabilization control 340
Tilt, backrest 114 Trailer towing 338
Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror, see Trailer towing, activation 340
Automatic Curb Monitor 125 Trailer towing, technical data 413
431
Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 153 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis‐
Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 149 tance 400
Transporting children safely 131 Vehicle, breaking in 332
Travel & Comfort System 317 Vehicle care 408
Tread, tires 358 Vehicle care products 408
Trip data 171 Vehicle configuration, reset 63
Triple turn signal activation 145 Vehicle equipment 7
Trip odometer, see Trip data 171 Vehicle identification number 12
Trunk, see Cargo area 323 Vehicle key 78
Turning circle line, Surround View 265 Vehicle key, additional 81
Turning circle, vehicle 412 Vehicle key, integrated key 92
Turning radius lines, rearview camera 262 Vehicle key, loss 81
Turn signal, indicator light 163 Vehicle key, malfunction 81
Turn signal, replacing bulbs, see Lights and Vehicle key, replacing the battery 81
bulbs 396 Vehicle key with display, malfunction 86
Turn signals, high beams, headlight flasher 145 Vehicle key with display, see BMW display
Two-axle ride level control 282 key 82
Vehicle paint, care 408
U Vehicle status 173
Vehicle storage 411
Unintentional alarm, avoiding 107 Vehicle washing 407
Units, see Measuring units 61 Ventilation 294
Universal remote control 307 Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 298
Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 149 Venting, see Ventilation 294
Unlocking, automatic 104 Vent, see Ventilation 294
Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 78 Version Software, see Remote Software Up‐
Unlocking, settings 104 grade 57
Unlocking, vehicle key 79 Video recording, see BMW Drive Recorder 220
Unpaved roads, cross-country trips 332 Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
Updates made after the editorial deadline 7 tertainment and Communication 6
Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 57 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 12
Upholstery material care 409 Voice activation, gesture control 55
Upper backrest, front 115 Voice activation, see BMW Intelligent Personal
USB connection 76 Assistant 52
USB port, position in vehicle 313 Voice activation system 48
Used battery, disposing of 398 Voice command response 48
Use, intended 8 Voice control 48
Volume, gesture control 55
V
W
Valet parking mode 102
Vanity mirror 310 Wake word 48
Variable steering, see Integral Active Steer‐ Warning/indicator lights 160
ing 230 Warning against cross traffic 278
Vehicle battery 396 Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Blind
spot collision warning 210
432
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Cross Wood parts, care 409
traffic warning 278 Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 41
Warning messages, see Check Control 159 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 395
Warning triangle 400
Warranty 8 X
Washer fluid 391
Washer nozzles, windshield 148 xDrive 227
Washer system 146 xOffroad package 285
Washing systems, automatic 407
Washing, vehicle 407
Wash view, Surround View 265
Water on roads 334
Water, see Condensation water under the parked
vehicle 335
Website, see Internet 6
Weights 413
Welcome light during unlocking 79
Welcome lights 178
Welcome screen, driver profiles 65
Wheel base, vehicle 412
Wheels and tires 350
Wheels, changing 359
Widgets, iDrive 41
Width, vehicle 412
Wi-Fi connection 73
WiFi connection, see WLAN connection 73
Wi-Fi hotspot 73
Window, defrosting 294
Windows, powered 108
Windshield, defrosting 294
Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 391
Windshield washer nozzles 148
Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 146
Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor‐
age 411
Winter tires 360
Winter tires, tread 358
Wiper blades, replacing 395
Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 391
Wiper, fold-away position 148
Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 146
Wiper system 146
Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless
charging tray 314
Wireless charging tray for smartphones 314
WLAN connection 73
433
*BL5A10FB700F*
01405A10FB7 ue
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL5A10FB700F*
01405A10FB7 ue

2021 BMW x5 78225

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 BMW x5 78225

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FB7 - VI/20

After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Software Upgrade –

© 2020 Bayerische Motoren Werke

After a software update in the

Symbols and displays Vehicle features and

▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

Data memory This information generally records the state of a

Information about stored or exchanged data can ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.

Right nameplate iDrive

Reporting safety defects

Windshield To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

For Canadian customers

Owner's Manual media

Media at a glance Supplementary Owner's Manuals

Scrolling through the Owner's ▷ "Quick link"

Context help Executing

Opening via iDrive

1. Press the button.

Opening when a Check Control

Programmable memory buttons

Comfort Access Opening and closing the tailgate

Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.

Locking the vehicle

Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button

▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐

With Comfort Access: Depending on the set‐ Driver's door

1 Light switch element 1 Selector lever

Buttons on the Controller

Opens the main menu.

Opens the Apps menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens navigation map.

Opens destination input menu for

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering

No other commands may be available. In this

Terminating the voice activation system

This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐

Set-up and use

▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐

Adjusting the head restraint

Push switch up or down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors Storing

2. Press button on the door. The writ‐

Electrical steering wheel adjustment

1 Changing the entertainment source

Memory function Navigation destination input

Press or move the controller up to apply the Using the telephone

7. Select desired destination. "Accept"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐ Parking

End the sport program/manual mode:

Turn signal, high beams,

Engaging P Turn signal

▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point.

▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐ Symbol Function

High beams, headlight flasher Right roadside parking light.